Indonesian Way M3

The Indonesian Way

3

Module 3 – Daily Routine George Quinn & Uli Kozok

The Indonesian Way

2

Module 2 – A Visit from a Census Ofcial George Quinn & Uli Kozok

License “The Indonesian Way” by George Quinn and Uli Kozok is licensed under a Creative Commons “Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International (CC BY-NC-SA 4.0)” license. Under the license you are free to: ● ●

Share — copy and redistribute the material in any medium or format Adapt — remix, transform, and build upon the material

Under the following terms: ➢

➢ ➢

Attribution — You must give appropriate credit, provide a link to the license, and indicate if changes were made. You may do so in any reasonable manner, but not in any way that suggests the licensor endorses you or your use. NonCommercial — You may not use the material for commercial purposes. ShareAlike — If you remix, transform, or build upon the material, you must distribute your contributions under the same license as the original.

Please note that the license covers the text and the sound files, but excludes the illustrations. Date of Last Revision: 10 November 2014 The development of “The Indonesian Way” was sponsored by grant P017A090375-10 from the US Department of Education, International Research and Studies Program. The development of the print version was made possible by a grant received from the University of Tasmania.

Module 3

Daily Routine The main aim of Module 3 is to provide you with the vocabulary, sentence shells and cultural skills that will enable you to ask and answer questions about the things you usually do each day. The module will also get you started connecting sentences together into extended narratives. The module provides the vocabulary you will need to talk about daily activities. There is special emphasis on developing your command of verbs. You will learn how to use a number of common verbs with ber- and me- prefxes. You will learn the names of the days of the week and how to tell the time of day. You will also get more practice in expressing opinions and preferences, and you will learn to give responses to the questions “why?” and “who?” There are a number of role plays in the module, all of which help you to speak with increasing fuency about everyday activities. The culminating role play revolves around an important institution in Indonesian society, the Idul Fitri celebrations at the conclusion of the Muslim fasting month. You will be able to talk confdently, and at length, about what people usually do in the course of the day during Idul Fitri.

Lesson 32

32 Telling the Time

Aims • To learn how to tell the time.

Vocabulary Review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings. Foto: Jam Gadang di Bukittinggi, Sumatra Barat. © Eko Prianto

berjalan-jalan

to walk around

pagi

morning

bertanya

to ask

pegawai

employee

di antara

between

siang

noon

keluar

to get out

sore

afternoon

malam

night

“O’clock” There are two words commonly used in Indonesian to mark the times of the day. They are jam and pukul. They appear in front of the time expression. For example:

Make sure you don’t pronounce Jam empat jam like the Four o’clock English Pukul sepuluh word for a kind of Ten o’clock sweet sandwich Both pukul and jam are widely used throughout Indonesia. Of the spread. The two terms, pukul is slightly more formal than jam. In The Indonesian Indonesian word jam Way we shall mostly use jam, but you should practise (and expect to sounds like “jum” in hear) pukul as well. “jumping”. Jam is not exactly the same as the English “o’clock”. “O’clock” is only used in English to mark the hours and not the divisions of an hour. We say “two o’clock” but not “two thirty o’clock” or “half past two o’clock”. But in Indonesian jam is placed in front of all expressions of the time of day.

Lesson 32 To indicate “past” in the sense “minutes past the hour” most Indonesians use lewat (some also use lebih, but let’s stick to the more common lewat for the moment). Thus: Jam dua lewat lima Five past two Jam sebelas lewat sepuluh Ten past eleven To indicate “to” in the sense “minutes to/before the hour” you count back from the hour using kurang (literally “less” or “minus”). Thus: Jam tiga kurang lima Five to three (literally “three o’clock minus fve”) Jam empat kurang dua puluh Twenty to four The word for “quarter” is seperempat (derived from the number empat). So you can say: Jam satu lewat seperempat A quarter past one Jam enam kurang seperempat A quarter to six Notice the diferent order of the components in these expressions compared with the order of the components in English. Now comes the hard part. In order to express the notion of “half past the hour” you have to reorient your mind a little. There is no “half past” in Indonesian, but only “half before”. You place the word for “half” (setengah) in front of the number indicating the following hour. For example: Half past one Jam setengah dua (literally “half two o’clock”) Half past twelve Jam setengah satu Finally, expressions of time can be made somewhat more precise by adding the terms for “in the morning”, “in the afternoon”, “in the late afternoon” and “at night”. Of course, you have to always bear in mind that Indonesian doesn’t have exact equivalents for these English terms. As you learned in Lesson 1 pagi, siang and sore cover diferent hours of the day compared to the corresponding English terms. Study these examples: Jam dua belas siang Twelve noon Jam setengah lima sore Four thirty in the afternoon Jam satu lewat seperempat siang A quarter past one in the afternoon

Lesson 32 Jam delapan kurang seperempat pagi A quarter to eight in the morning Jam sepuluh malam Ten o’clock at night Jam dua belas tengah malam Twelve o’clock midnight Jam setengah delapan pagi. Half past seven in the morning

Cara Indonesia: Telling the Time the Indonesian Way As you can see from the examples above, because of the diferent order of components in expressions of time, because of the “peculiar” way of saying “half past”, and because of the somewhat diferent way Indonesians divide up the day, telling the time in Indonesian can be a bit of a headache at frst for English speakers. You certainly have to concentrate hard to master these expressions and make them come automatically. It will probably be no comfort to know that there are at least two other domains of difculty that you will have to wrestle with (though not right now). First, as you saw above, you can use the terms lewat and kurang as equivalents of “past” and “to/before” together with the number indicating the hour concerned. But in everyday usage lewat and kurang are also quite normally and automatically linked with the expression for “half past”. Thus the normal way of saying “twenty to four”, for example, is jam setengah empat lewat sepuluh, literally “a half before four plus ten”. And “twenty-fve past twelve” is quite normally expressed as jam setengah satu kurang lima, literally “a half before one, minus fve”. Another complicating factor is the much greater use Indonesians make of the twenty-four hour clock. So instead of saying, for example, jam lima sore (“fve o’clock in the afternoon”) it is quite common to read, and even hear people say, jam tujuh belas (“seventeen o’clock”) By the way, the Indonesian way of saying “half past” is derived from continental European usage, in particular that of the Dutch. In Dutch you say half acht – literally “half eight” – where in English we would say “half past seven”. To add a fnal complicating twist, in Malaysia (which, unlike Indonesia, used to be ruled by the British) the Dutch-derived way of saying “half past” is unknown. In Malaysia they use an English-infuenced way of telling the time. So “half past three” in Malaysia is pukul tiga setengah, not pukul setengah empat as it would be in Indonesia.

More on lewat and kurang In this lesson you have learned using kurang and lewat as indicators of time in the meaning “less” and “past” You already encountered kurang in Lessons 11 and 18 in the meanings “insufcient”, “not enough”, and “too little”: Ini kurang bagus (This is not good enough), Uang saya kurang (I don’t have enough money), Anak itu makan kurang (That child eats too little), Kurang dana (Insufcient funds).

Lesson 32 Besides indicating “past” in time, lewat also means “to pass by”: Nanti kita lewat pabrik roti (Later we will pass the bread factory), and also “by way of”, “through” and “via”: Saya ke Jakarta lewat Bandung (I go to Jakarta via Bandung).

Exercise 32-01 What are these times? Example: Jam tiga lewat seperempat. You write: 03.15 (Note that in Indonesia you separate the hours from the minutes by using a point, not a colon.) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Jam sebelas Jam tiga kurang dua puluh Jam setengah tujuh Jam sepuluh lewat dua puluh Jam depalan kurang lima

Jam setengah empat kurang lima Jam enam Jam setengah satu Jam tujuh kurang seperempat Jam setengah sembilan

Exercise 32-02 Here are some of the regular morning fights out of Adisucipto Airport at Yogyakarta. In the righthand column, write out each departure time in words in Indonesian. Begin each answer with Jam or Pukul. Check the initial example frst. Tujuan

Penerbangan

Berangkat

Write out the time in words

Denpasar

Lion Air

05.45

Jam enam kurang seperempat

1.

Denpasar

Garuda

06.00

2.

Jakarta

Merpati

06.05

3.

Jakarta

Batavia Air

06.15

4.

Jakarta

Mandala

06.45

5.

Jakarta

Wings Air

06.55

6.

Denpasar

Garuda

07.05

7.

Surabaya

Lion Air

07.30

8.

Surabaya

Wings Air

10.35

9.

Balikpapan

Mandala

11.10

10.

Balikpapan

Garuda

11.25

Lesson 32

Boleh Tertawa, Boleh Juga Tidak (Laugh if you want to, but you don’t have to) Orang Skotlandia Mau Berjalan-Jalan Alastair McAlastair berkunjung ke kota Glasgow. Sesudah check in di hotel, dia bertanya kepada pegawai hotel: “Maaf, jam berapa orang dapat makan di hotel ini?” “Makan?” kata pegawai. “Anda boleh makan pagi dari jam tujuh sampai jam sebelas. Makan siang dari jam sebelas sampai jam tiga siang. Minum teh di antara jam tiga siang dan jam enam sore. Makan malam dari jam enam sore sampai jam sebelas malam.” “Aduh!” kata Alastair McAlastair. “Kalau begitu, saya tidak dapat melihat kota ini! Saya harus tinggal di hotel! Jam berapa saya dapat keluar untuk berjalan-jalan!?” Adapted from “Tentang Orang Skotlandia” in Matra no. 74, September 1992, page 95

Cara Indonesia: Breakfast, Lunch, and Dinner Indonesians typically eat three times a day. Breakfast is usually called sarapan, but sometimes also makan pagi. Indonesians typically dine twice a day which is called makan siang and makan malam. Lunch is unknown. The most typical Indonesian breakfast is nasi goreng (fried rice) prepared from the left-over rice from the previous day. The fried rice is often served with a fried egg. Breakfast time is usually between 6:00 and 9:00. Other very popular breakfast dishes are mi goreng (fried noodles) , lontong sayur, and pecal. Dinner dishes are both based on rice with side dishes that almost always contain sambal (a chilli pepper based dish), kerupuk (crackers), vegetable, and occasionally a small piece of fsh or meat. If no fresh fsh or meat is served, it is usually substituted by dried anchovies (ikan teri) or other salted fsh (ikan asin). Foto: Lontong sayur served with tauco, rendang, and kerupuk udang (Kozok 2012)

Latihan 1–Kosa Kata Lalu Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. berjalan-jalan

between, among

bertanya

from late morning to mid afternoon

di antara

late afternoon

keluar

less, doesn’t really..., not quite

kurang

morning (until about 11:00)

Lesson 32 malam

night

pagi

ofce worker, employee

pegawai

to ask a question

siang

to go for a walk or stroll

sore

to go or come out

Latihan 2–Waktu 1 Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1. jam empat

a. a quarter past one

2. pukul sepuluh

b. a quarter to six

3. jam dua lewat lima

c. fve past two

4. jam sebelas lewat sepuluh

d. fve to three

5. jam tiga kurang lima

e. four o’clock

6. jam empat kurang dua puluh

f. half past one

7. jam satu lewat seperempat

g. ten o’clock

8. jam enam kurang seperempat

h. ten past eleven

9. jam setengah dua

i. twenty fve past twelve

10. jam setengah satu kurang lima

j. twenty to four

Latihan 3–Waktu 2 1. jam 14.00

a. jam sebelas lewat lima belas malam

2. jam 23.15

b. jam sebelas kurang lima siang

3. jam 16.25

c. jam setengah delapan pagi

4. jam 07.30

d. jam empat pagi

5. jam 00.05

e. jam delapan kurang seperempat malam

6. jam 12.55

f. jam setengah lima kurang lima sore

7. jam 04.00

g. jam dua belas lewat lima malam

8. jam 19.45

h. jam satu kurang lima siang

9. jam 10.55

i. jam dua siang

Lesson 32

Latihan 4–Waktu 3 Jodohkan gambar jam waktunya.

a. jam satu kurang seperempat

b. jam sepuluh lewat sepuluh

c. pukul dua

d. jam dua belas kurang dua puluh

e. jam satu lewat dua puluh

f. jam lima lewat seperempat

g. setengah delapan

h. jam dua lewat lima belas

Latihan 5― Rangkai Kata Urutkan kata-kata berikut menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti: 1. “Alastair McAlastair is going on a visit to Glasgow city.” Alastair McAlastair―kota―berkunjung―ke―Glasgow. 2. “What time will I get to leave to go for a stroll?” Jam―keluar―saya―dapat―untuk―berapa―berjalan-jalan? 3. “You can eat breakfast from 7 o’clock until 11 o’clock in the morning.” Anda―sampai―dari―boleh―jam tujuh―jam sebelas―sarapan―siang.

Lesson 32

Latihan 6―

Isian

Lengkapilah teks berikut sesuai dengan rekaman.―Listen to Sound File 032-01 to fll in the blanks. Alastair McAlastair __________ ke kota Glasgow. __________ check in di hotel, dia __________ kepada pegawai hotel: “Maaf, jam berapa orang dapat __________ di hotel ini?” “Makan?” kata __________. “Anda boleh makan __________ dari jam tujuh sampai jam sebelas. Makan siang dari jam sebelas __________ jam tiga siang. Minum teh di __________ jam tiga siang dan jam enam sore. Makan malam dari jam enam sore sampai jam sebelas malam.” “Aduh!” kata Alastair McAlastair. “Kalau __________, saya tidak dapat __________ kota ini! Saya harus tinggal di hotel! Jam berapa saya dapat __________ untuk berjalanjalan!?”

Latihan 7― Teka-Teki Silang Mendatar: 4. ofce worker, employee 6. how much, how many 7. late afternoon 8. city, town 10. to drink 13. past (when telling the time) 14. to go or come out 15. until (a certain time), as far as (a certain place) Menurun: 1. to see, to look at 2. must, have to 3. less, isn’t/aren’t really... 5. late morning to mid afternoon 6. to ask a question 9. may 10. to eat 11. night

Lesson 33

33 Making a Date or Appointment

Aims • To learn how to ask about the time of day.

Vocabulary Review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings. berkunjung ke...

to visit (a place)

mungkin

maybe

bioskop

cinema

nggak

no, not

gimana

how, what is...like?

pasar swalayan

supermarket

harus

must, have to

pesawat terbang

airplane

ikut

to join in

sampai

until

juga

also

sekarang

now

kembali

to return

sekeliling

around

kira-kira

approximately

teman

companion, friend

kuliah

university lecture

tempat

place

kurang

to, before (time)

mandi

to take a bath

“What Time?” When you ask “what time?” you expect an answer with numbers in it. The Indonesian question-word that demands or expects a reply in the form of numbers is berapa. “What time?” is jam berapa? (some people will say pukul berapa?). For example: Jam berapa? What time? What’s the time?

Jam setengah dua belas. It’s half past eleven.

Jam berapa sekarang? What time is it now?

Jam dua. It’s two o’clock

Jam berapa Anda ke bioskop? What time are you going to the cinema?

Jam lima kurang seperempat. At a quarter to fve.

Jam berapa pesawat terbang sampai? What time does/did the plane arrive?

Kira-kira jam setengah empat lewat lima. About twenty-fve to four. (15:35)

Lesson 33 You can practise generating questions from the following substitutional table. Use it to practise generating questions from it. You will need to insert your own choice of a word wherever there is a line and complete the question in your own word wherever there are dots. ke... makan pagi/ siang/ malam mandi

Jam berapa

(biasanya)

adik Anda

berbelanja

teman Anda

belajar...

Anda

minum ____ di...

pacar Anda

pulang dari...

ibu Anda

ikut kuliah...

?

naik ____ ke... tidur bertemu dengan... If you are asking about a particular time in the near future you can insert akan or mau. ke ... makan pagi/siang/malam mandi adik Anda Jam berapa

berbelanja

teman Anda

akan

belajar ...

Anda

mau

minum ___ di ...

pacar Anda

pulang dari...

ibu Anda

ikut kuliah...

?

naik ___ ke... tidur bertemu dengan...

Sampai In Lesson 32 we have encountered the word sampai as a preposition indicating the time or distance within which the action occurs. The meaning of sampai is 'until', 'up to', 'as far as'. Dia bekerja sampai jam 8. He works until 8 o'clock. Dia bekerja di Bandung dari bulan Agustus sampai bulan Oktober. He worked in Bandung from August until October. Kami berjalan kaki sampai desa Sukamakmur. We walked as far as the village of Sukamakmur.

Lesson 33 Dari Sabang sampai Merauke. From Sabang to Merauke. Sabang is the westernmost point of Indonesia and Merauke is the easternmost point of Indonesia. “Dari Sabang sampai Merauke” is the title of one of Indonesia's national songs. The distance is 5236 km which is about the same as the distance between Boston and Lisbon, Frankfurt and Kabul, Tokyo and Honolulu, or Melbourne and Jakarta. Sampai is also a verb with the meaning “to arrive”: Mereka sampai jam 15.30. They arrive at 15:30. Jam berapa pesawat terbang sampai? What time does the plane arrive? And fnally, the preposition sampai is also used in a number of frequent expressions: Sampai nanti! See you later! Sampai jumpa! Until we meet again! / See you later. Sampai bertemu! So long! / Until we meet again!

Exercise 33-01 Make a question using the phrase in italics. Each question should begin with the question phrase jam berapa. Then write an answer to the question. The answer should contain the time that appears after the word jawaban (answer). It should be prefaced with the word jam and written out in full in words. Here is an example: Pertanyaan: pulang dari kampus You write: Jam berapa Anda pulang dari kampus?

Jawaban: 5.00 sore You write: Jam lima sore.

1. Pertanyaan: akan makan di... Jawaban: 1.30 siang

6. Pertanyaan: berbelanja di pasar swalayan Jawaban: 2.45 siang

2. Pertanyaan: mandi Jawaban. 7.15 malam

7. Pertanyaan: tidur biasanya Jawaban : 10.30 malam

3. Pertanyaan: masuk kuliah... Jawaban: 11.00 siang

8. Pertanyaan: kembali ke pusat kota Jawaban: 4.45 sore

4. Pertanyaan: mau pergi ke rumah teman Jawaban: kira-kira 7.30 malam

9. Pertanyaan: belajar bahasa Indonesia Jawaban: 12 tengah malam

5. Pertanyaan: akan bertemu dengan... Jawaban: 11.20 siang

10. Pertanyaan: berjalan-jalan keliling kampus Jawaban: 7.05 pagi

Lesson 33

Making a Date or Appointment You have practised accepting or politely parrying an invitation. You can now elaborate on this a little by mentioning a particular hour of the day. Let’s look at two slightly diferent ways you can ask someone for a date or make an appointment with someone. (1) dapat Apakah saya bisa boleh

makan bertemu belajar minum bercakap-cakap

dengan Anda nanti

siang sore malam

jam .....

?

berkunjung ke... bermain tenis berjalan-jalan berbelanja dengan saya nanti belajar makan berlari di lapangan

siang sore malam

jam .........

?

(2)

dapat Apakah Anda mau bisa boleh

Each of these shells can be the beginning point for an extended conversation. Using the language resources you have already studied you can accept the request / invitation by echoing the key word in the question (dapat, bisa, boleh, mau) then, for example, you can ask di mana? (where?). From this point the conversation can go in a variety of directions. You can also reject the request / invitation, beginning your response with maaf (sorry). Further down there are two examples of how a conversation might develop. As always, frst listen to the dialogues very carefully, cover up the Indonesian side with a card and, using the English translation as a prompt, try to reproduce the Indonesian from memory, moving the card down to check that you got the Indonesian correct. Listen carefully to the following examples in Sound File 033-01. You can have a look at the translation whenever you fnd difcult words in the dialogue.

Dialogue Eka

Apakah saya dapat bertemu dengan Anda nanti sore jam setengah enam?

Tentu saja. Di mana?

Bagaimana kalau di Restoran Boga Ria?

Restoran Boga Ria? Di mana restoran itu?

Di samping gedung bioskop di Jalan Sunan Muria, tidak jauh dari terminal bus.

Baik. Restoran Boga Ria itu restoran apa?

Restoran Jawa. Makanannya enak sekali.

O begitu. Saya suka makan ikan. Apakah Anda juga suka makan ikan?

Dian

Lesson 33 Suka sekali. Tetapi saya lebih suka ayam.

Apakah saya bisa naik bus ke sana?

Bisa. Anda bisa juga berjalan kaki ke sana.

Eka

Can I meet you this afternoon at half past fve?

Of course you can. Where?

What about at the Boga Ria Restaurant?

The Boga Ria? Where is it?

Beside the movie house in Sunan Muria Street, not far from the bus terminal.

Okay. What kind of restaurant is the Boga Ria?

It’s a Javanese restaurant. Its food is very nice.

Really? I like fsh. Do you like fsh too?

Very much. But I prefer chicken.

Can I go there by bus?

Dian

Yes, you can. You can also walk there. You can also refuse a request for a date or decline to make an appointment, in which case you think of an excuse and the dialogue might run something like this (Sound File 033-02).

Dialogue 2 Eka

Eka

Apakah Anda mau berbelanja dengan saya nanti malam jam tujuh?

Wah, maaf. Nanti malam saya harus belajar.

Bagaimana kalau nanti sore jam setengah lima?

Nanti sore? Maaf, nanti sore saya ke rumah kakak saya.

O begitu. Di mana rumah kakak Anda?

Jauh dari sini.

Jam berapa Anda pergi ke sana? Apakah saya boleh ikut?

Maaf, tidak bisa. Saya ke sana dengan orang tua saya. Mobil mereka kecil. Maaf, tidak cukup tempat di mobil itu.

Would you like to come shopping with me tonight at seven o’clock?

Oh, I’m sorry. Tonight I’ve got to study.

What about this afternoon at half past four?

This afternoon? Sorry, I’m going to my elder sister’s place.

Oh, I see. Where is your sister’s house?

A long way from here.

What time are you going there? Can I come along?

I’m sorry, that’s not possible. I’m going with my parents. Their car is small. I’m sorry, but there’s not enough space in the car.

Dian

Dian

Lesson 33

Exercise 33-02 Taking either of the two dialogues you have just studied as your beginning point, rewrite the dialogue changing the times, places and activities, but retaining the general shell of the dialogue. For example, if you take the second dialogue as your shell, your dialogue might begin: Apakah Anda mau makan dengan saya nanti siang jam satu? Wah, maaf. Tidak mungkin. Nanti siang ada kuliah.

Role Play: Making a Date / Appointment Taking the two questions on the previous exercise as your beginning points and using the model dialogues that follow (but varying them), conduct a role play with your teacher/tutor or with a classmate in which a possible date or appointment is discussed. Try as hard as you can to give the conversation extra life and variation by incorporating into it any of the language resources you have studied in previous lessons. In real life, conversations tend to meander and to be repetitive. Take advantage of this as you talk about making a date or appointment. Using the resources of Module 1, ask where someone comes from, ask about transport arrangements, ask for precise information about the location of a place, talk about food and drink etc. Using the resources of Module 2 ask about someone’s family, talk about someone’s house, wander of on a tangent and ask about the price of something. In short, fesh out your conversation with every resource of vocabulary, idiom and situation that you have studied so far, while always keeping in mind that ultimately the conversation is about making a date or appointment.

A “Street-Language” Variant of the Model Dialogue You can also make an appointment or date using the lively, pithy language of informal interaction. Here is an example that parallels the formal, standard dialogue you have been studying. What you read below is Javanese-style colloquial Indonesian. You might hear something like it in the streets of Semarang or Yogyakarta in Central Java, but probably not in the streets of Kupang (Timor) or Medan (Sumatra). Remember too, that the speakers are young – older people would not normally talk like this. Listen to the dialogue frst from Sound File 033-03, savouring the diferences between it and the more formal version you studied earlier in the lesson.

Tati

Ketemu nanti sore yuk, setengah enam!

Oke. Di mana?

Kalo di Restoran Boga Ria, gimana?

Restoran Boga Ria? Di mana sih?

Samping gedung bioskop, di Sunan Muria, nggak jauh dari terminal bis.

Beres. Restoran apaan sih Boga Ria?

Jawa punya. Makanannya lumayan.

O gitu. Aku doyan ikan. Kamu juga doyan?

Nuning

Lesson 33 Doyan banget. Tapi aku lebih suka ayam.

Bisa ke sana pake bis?

Bisa. Jalan aja ya bisa. Now read it through again taking in the notes in the righthand column below. From the notes you will see that colloquial Indonesian can be more colourful, subtle and emotional than the somewhat drier formal variant of the language. But equally you will see how very difcult and elusive a really authentic command of colloquial usage can be. It demands, among other things, a confdent familiarity with local cultures. And because this kind of language is not much written down, textbooks can only give you the bare basics. Mastery of it demands, above all, a really sharp ear for the way people speak in everyday life in the streets, markets, campuses and streetside eateries of Indonesia. Ketemu nanti sore yuk, setengah enam!

ketemu: (a borrowing from Javanese) ketemu is a common colloquial variant of bertemu. yuk: a colloquial variant of ayo. setengah enam: the marker word for times of the day, jam or pukul, is often dropped in colloquial usage.

Oke. Di mana?

oke: from English ‘okay’.

Kalo di Restoran Boga Ria, gimana?

kalo: an informal variant of kalau. gimana: an informal variant of bagaimana. Gimana may appear in the beginning or at the end of a phrase.

Restoran Boga Ria? Di mana sih? di mana: colloquial Indonesian tends to be pithy, dropping words

(here restoran itu) where it is clear from preceding parts of the conversation what you are referring to. sih: one of many particles that are common in informal or slangy usage. Sih adds emphasis and colour to a question, often making the question feel more pointed, even adding a note of irritation, bewilderment, puzzlement, surprise or sarcasm.

Samping gedung bioskop, di Sunan Muria, nggak jauh dari terminal bis.

Samping gedung bioskop, di Sunan Muria: here the preposition di and the marker-word for street addresses jalan are dropped. nggak: a colloquial substitute for tidak. bis: a colloquial substitute for bus.

Beres. Restoran apaan sih Boga Ria?

beres: literally “fxed up”, “put right”, “all okay”, “resolved”. Here beres is close to the Australian colloquialism “No worries!” apaan: Apaan is a slangy variant of apa meaning “what kind”. Apaan adds a note of humorous scepticism or cynicism to the question, especially in combination with the salty particle sih, as if you are being jokingly sarcastic about a restaurant with a pretentious name like Boga Ria (“Joyous Cuisine”).

Jawa punya. Makanannya lumayan.

punya: In colloquial Indonesian punya can be used with nouns, names and pronouns to express possession. As you have seen, in standard Indonesian the possessor follows the thing possessed (rumah Anda “your house”). But in the punya expressions of colloquial Indonesian the possessor comes before the thing possessed, the sequence being: noun/name/pronoun + punya + the name of the thing possessed. For example Itu saya punya sepeda “That’s my bicycle.” So the phrase Jawa punya means “Javanese” (i.e. “belonging” to Java) and is probably a pithy contraction of Jawa punya restoran “a Javanese restaurant.” By the way, this kind of punya structure was probably borrowed into Indonesian from the Malay used by Chinese migrants in the streets of old Batavia. It parallels the possessive structure found in Chinese. lumayan: “not bad”. As in colloquial English, in colloquial Indonesian there is a tendency to understate something when in fact you are really enthusiastic about it.

Lesson 33 O gitu. Aku doyan ikan. Kamu juga doyan?

O gitu: a colloquial contraction of O begitu (I see. Really.) ya: “also”, “too” (a colloquial substitute for juga) Ya in this sense almost always comes after the subject of a sentence, never at the end of a phrase or sentence. doyan: a borrowing from Javanese) “to like something (especially certain foods)”, “to have a taste for”

Doyan banget. Tapi aku lebih suka banget: from Jakarta-Malay “very”, “very much” tapi: a colloquial contraction of tetapi. ayam.

aku: an informal and intimate substitute for saya.

Bisa ke sana pake bis?

bisa: a mildly informal equivalent of dapat. pake: is an informal variant of pakai (to use, to wear) as a slangy counterpart of naik meaning “by (a certain mode of transport).”

Bisa. Jalan aja ya bisa.

jalan: a colloquial contraction of berjalan kaki (to walk, to go on foot). aja: a colloquial contraction of saja (just, simply). Jalan aja ya bisa: Literally “Walk just also can.” (You can also simply walk). The pronoun kamu (you) has been dropped and the order of words is quite diferent from the formal usage you studied in the model dialogue earlier in this lesson.

Now practise this exchange with a (preferably youthful) partner, imagining the relaxed, spontaneous circumstances in which the two of you might be meeting and talking.

Latihan 1—Menjodohkan Jodohkanlah kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. berkunjung

approximately

nggak

airplane

bioskop

to take a bath

pasar swalayan

around

gimana

must, have to

pesawat

friend

harus

cinema

sampai

no, not (coll.)

ikut

possibly, maybe

sekarang

supermarket

kembali

to join in, follow

sekeliling

place

kira-kira

to return

teman

now

mandi

how? (coll.)

tempat

to sleep

mungkin

to visit

tidur

until, to arrive

Latihan 2—Menjodohkan Jodohkan kalimat di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan 1. Jam berapa?

a. It’s two o’clock.

2. Jam setengah dua belas.

b. What time is it now?

3. Jam berapa sekarang?

c. At what time?

4. Jam dua.

d. It’s half past eleven.

5. Jam berapa Anda ke bioskop?

e. About three thirty-fve.

Lesson 33 6. Saya ke bioskop jam lima kurang seperempat.

f. What time does the plane arrive?

7. Jam berapa pesawat terbang sampai?

g. What time are you going to the cinema?

8. Kira-kira jam setengah empat lewat lima.

h. I’m going to the cinema at a quarter to fve.

Latihan 3—Menyimak: Pemahaman Listen to Sound File 033-01 to answer the following questions: 1. Eka and Dian are... A. close friends B. dating each other C. married D. know each other only vaguely 2. Is the following statement true or false?: “Eka wants to meet Dian at 18:30” A. True B. False 3. Is the following statement true or false?: “Dian agrees with the proposed time.” A. True B. False 4. Dian knows the address of the restaurant. The restaurant is located: A. opposite a cinema B. in close proximity to a bus terminal C. on Jalan Sunan Muria D. quite far from the bus terminal E. in the same building where the cinema is F. in the Sunan Muria building 5. When someone asks “rumah makan Andalas itu restoran apa?” then the possible matching answer is: A. Rumah makan Padang B. enak sekali makanannya C. rumah makan itu mahal sekali D. cukup besar 6. What does Dian like to eat? A. chicken B. beef C. pork D. fsh E. she is vegetarian 7. What phrase does Eka use to say that he prefers chicken?

Lesson 33 8. Instead of naik bus one can also say berjalan bus. A. True B. False 9. Instead of berjalan kaki one can also say naik kaki. A. True B. False

Latihan 4—Invitation Accepted Dengarkan Rekaman 033-01 dan lengkapi teks berikut dengan memilih kata yang tepat.

Eka

Apakah saya dapat ___________ ___________ Anda nanti sore jam setengah enam?

Dian

Tentu saja. Di mana?

Eka

Bagaimana kalau di Restoran Boga Ria?

Dian

Restoran Boga Ria? Di mana restoran itu?

Eka

Di samping ___________ bioskop di Jalan Sunan Muria, tidak jauh dari terminal bus.

Dian

Baik. Restoran Boga Ria itu restoran apa?

Eka

Restoran Jawa. Makanannya enak ___________.

Dian

O begitu. Saya ___________ makan ikan. Apakah Anda juga suka makan ___________?

Eka

Suka sekali. Tetapi saya lebih suka ayam.

Dian

Apakah saya ___________ naik bus ke sana?

Eka

Bisa. Anda bisa juga ___________ kaki ke sana.

Latihan 5—Invitation Refused Dengarkan Rekaman 033-02 dan lengkapi teks berikut dengan memilih kata yang tepat. Eka

Apakah Anda mau __________ __________ saya nanti malam jam tujuh?

Dian

Wah, maaf. Nanti malam saya __________ belajar.

Eka

Bagaimana kalau nanti sore jam setengah lima?

Dian

Nanti sore? Maaf, nanti __________ saya ke __________ kakak saya.

Lesson 33 Eka

O begitu. Di mana rumah kakak Anda?

Dian

Jauh __________ sini.

Eka

Jam berapa Anda __________ ke sana? Apakah saya boleh ikut?

Dian

Maaf, tidak bisa. Saya ke sana dengan orang tua saya. Mobil mereka kecil. Maaf, tidak __________ tempat di mobil itu.

Latihan 6—Informal Style Dengarkan Rekaman 033-03 dan lengkapi teks berikut dengan memilih kata yang tepat.

Tati

__________ nanti sore yuk, setengah enam!

Nuning

Oke. Di mana?

Tati

Kalo di Restoran Boga Ria, gimana?

Nuning

Restoran Boga Ria? Di mana sih?

Tati

__________ gedung bioskop, di Sunan Muria, __________ jauh dari terminal bis.

Nuning

Beres. Restoran __________ sih Boga Ria?

Tati

Jawa punya. Makanannya __________.

Nuning

O gitu. Aku __________ ikan. Kamu juga __________?

Tati

Doyan __________. Tapi aku lebih suka __________.

Nuning

Bisa ke sana __________ bis?

Tati

Bisa. Jalan __________ juga bisa.

Latihan 7—Rangkai Kata Urutkan kata-kata berikut ini menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti: 1. “What time are you going to the cinema?” Jam—ke—berapa—Anda—bioskop? 2. “I’m going to the cinema at a quarter to fve.” Saya—jam—kurang—ke—lima—bioskop—seperempat. 3. “What time does/did the plane arrive?” Jam—terbang—berapa—pesawat—sampai?

Lesson 33 4. “About three thirty-fve.” Kira-kira—jam—lewat—empat—setengah—lima.

Latihan 8—Jodohkan: Informal Indonesian 1. This term is a common colloquial variant of bertemu.

a. apaan

2. A colloquial variant of ayo

b. gimana

3. The informal speech used to say “all okay” or “no worries”.

c. sih

4. An informal variant of bagaimana.

d. ketemu

5. A slangy particle that adds emphasis and colour to a question.

e. nggak

6. A colloquial substitute for tidak.

f. lumayan

7. A slangy variant of apa meaning ’what kind’.

g. punya

8. Can be used with nouns, names and pronouns to express possession.

h. yuk

9. Used to express: “fair”, “reasonable”, “quite okay”, or “not bad”

i. beres

Latihan 9—Teka-Teki Silang Mendatar: 1. companion, friend 3. to eat, to have a meal 6. to go shopping 7. you’re welcome 9. an informal variant of bagaimana 11. must, have to 13. cinema 16. to drink 17. feld, ground, open space 18. to sleep, to go to bed 19. to play 20. around, all around Menurun: 2. an informal variant of tidak 4. to study at a university 5. to run 6. to meet 8. possibly, maybe 10. place, location 12. until, as far as, up to 14. now 15. to go or come along, to join in

Lesson 34

34 “Who Do You Go Shopping With?”

Aims • To practice talking about what you do at certain times of the day, and with whom.

Vocabulary Review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings.

Berbelanja di Pasar Ikan (Pantai Depok) © Yan Arief

ayah

father

bertemu

to meet

belajar

to study

dengan

with

berbelanja

to go shopping

lapangan

feld

angkot

mini bus

pulang

to go home

bercakap-cakap

to chat

berangkat

to depart

In the morning / afternoon etc. You frst met the word pada back in Lesson 20. It is a preposition with several diferent functions and meanings. It is often used in front of expressions for units of time like “day”, “year” etc. In these cases is translatable with the English words “on”, “at” and “in” depending on context. You have also already met the terms pagi, siang, sore and malam. You can squeeze more work out of these words by “book-ending” them with pada and hari (day). Study these phrases. pada pagi hari in the morning

pada siang hari in the late morning to mid afternoon

pada sore hari in the late afternoon

pada malam hari at night

pada jam 16:00 at four o'clock

pada bulan Oktober in October

Lesson 34 These phrases with ...hari usually appear at the beginning or at the end of a sentence. Using them you can make sentences like these. Biasanya saya pergi ke kampus pada pagi hari. I usually go to the campus in the morning. Pada malam hari kadang-kadang saya belajar di perpustakaan. At night I sometimes study in the library. Pada sore hari saya suka minum kopi di ruang keluarga. In the late afternoon I like to drink cofee in the sitting room. These phrases do not relate to a specifc day, but they describe what you usually do (or where you are etc) at a certain part of the day. They hence difer considerably from nanti siang, nanti sore, and nanti malam that you learned in Lesson 33 which all relate to single events occurring at the present day: Nanti siang saya masuk kantor. At around noon (roughly between 10 and 14:00) I will go to my ofce. Nanti malam saya berangkat ke Jakarta. Tonight I am leaving for Jakarta. Dengan (with, together with) can help you describe who you do things with. Study this substitution table. Use the vocabulary you already know to add more items to the columns in the latter part of the sentence. For example, in the verb column you could mention activities like makan, duduk, minum etc., and instead of the last two columns you could substitute the names of real people you know.

pagi hari Pada

siang hari

(kadang-kadang)

sore hari

(biasanya)

malam hari

saya

berjalan-jalan

anak saya.

bercakap-cakap

ayah saya.

bertemu

ibu saya.

belajar

dengan

pacar saya.

berbelanja

teman saya.

bermain tenis

suami saya.

bermain musik

adik saya.

“With whom?” / “Who with?” The sentences in the table above can be used to answer questions with dengan siapa (with whom? who with?) in them. Usually dengan siapa comes at the end of a sentence. Practice generating questions from the following substitution table, then answer them with complete sentences like those in the table above. In the last columns you can insert the names of real people you know, as well as the kinship terms you see above.

Lesson 34 berjalan-jalan

Pada

pagi hari

bercakap-cakap

siang hari

bertemu

sore hari

(biasanya)

Anda

malam hari

belajar

dengan siapa

?

berbelanja bermain tenis bermain musik

Dialogue Listen to the Sound File 034-01 two or three times, if necessary look at the transcription.

Ani

Pada sore hari Anda belajar dengan siapa?

Pada sore hari, saya belajar dengan adik saya.

O begitu. Biasanya Anda belajar di mana?

Biasanya saya belajar di perpustakaan.

Jam berapa Anda pergi ke perpustakaan?

Saya pergi ke perpustakaan jam setengah enam.

Biasanya Anda pulang jam berapa?

Biasanya saya pulang jam tujuh seperempat.*

Anda pulang naik apa?

Saya pulang naik angkot.

Hmmm. Apakah Anda suka pulang naik angkot?

Tidak. Saya tidak suka pulang naik angkot.

Eko

*) Occasionally lewat is omitted in colloquial speech. Now go to Latihan 3 to test your understanding of the dialogue.

Exercise 34-01 In this exercise, you will listen to Sound File 034-02. Basically, it is the same sound fle, but this time it is in the form of a substitution drill. You will answer the questions using the cue words provided. Your answers should be a complete long sentence. Say your answer out loud in confdent, well pronounced Indonesian. If necessary, stop the sound fle and repeat the sentences as many times as necessary until you can produce all the sentences correctly frst time, pronounce them smoothly, and understand instantly what each one means. Preferably you should do this exercise listening to the sound fle, but you can also do it this way: The changed word or phrase is given in the list on the right. Place a card over the sentences and cue words. Move the card down and expose the frst sentence. Say the sentence out loud, confdently and smoothly. Now look at the cue word on the right. Don’t move the card down yet. In your mind, insert the cue word into the sentence you have just read, substituting it for one of the words in the sentence so that you produce a new, slightly changed, but still correct sentence. Move the card down exposing the next line, and check that you got your new sentence right. Now make another new sentence using the new cue word that has come into view on the right. Pro-

Lesson 34 ceed in this way until you have completed the whole sequence of sentences. Repeat the sequence as many times as necessary until you can produce all the sentences correctly frst time, pronouncing them smoothly, and understanding instantly what each one means. Pada sore hari Anda belajar dengan siapa?

adik saya

O begitu. Biasanya Anda belajar di mana?

perpustakaan

Jam berapa Anda pergi ke perpustakaan?

setengah enam

Biasanya Anda pulang jam berapa?

tujuh seperempat

Anda pulang naik apa?

angkot

Hmmm. Apakah Anda suka pulang naik angkot?

Tidak. Saya tidak suka..

Now take the block of questions and answers you have just practised and introduce variations into it by putting new items into the blanks in the sentences. You should use diferent verbs, kinship terms (or names of people), places, times, modes of transport, and (in the case of the last sentence) opinions. Make sure each sentence in the dialogue builds logically and sensibly on the previous one. Pada ...... hari Anda ...... dengan siapa? Pada ...... hari saya ...... dengan ...... O begitu. Biasanya Anda ...... di mana? Biasanya saya ...... di ....... Jam berapa Anda pergi ke ......? Saya pergi ke ...... jam ....... Biasanya Anda pulang jam berapa? Biasanya saya pulang jam ....... Anda pulang naik apa? Saya pulang naik ....... Hmmm. Apakah Anda suka pulang naik ......? Tidak. Saya tidak suka pulang naik ....... NOW, repeat the dialogue over and over, each time inserting new items into the blanks. When you think you have the vocabulary, sentence patterns and sentence sequences well mastered, put aside the textbook and talk direct to your teacher/tutor or a classmate, beginning your conversation with Pada ...... hari, Anda ...... dengan siapa? Use the sentences you have practised as a springboard to develop an extended conversation. Don’t be afraid to go back to the initial question and re-cycle it (using new words to talk about something a bit diferent, of course). At frst, the conversation will sound rather stilted and formulaic, but as you gain confdence you will be able to personalise it more and more, and introduce more and more variations and extensions. As you do this remember to concentrate on maintaining grammatical correctness. And you should stick with the vocabulary you know, because if you try to say something and fnd that you don’t have enough words to say it, the conversation will “die”. So go back over your vocabulary cards and refresh your recollection of the hundreds of relevant words we have practised up to this point. As you practise, use a watch or clock to time yourself. You and your partner should be able to talk without a break for many minutes. See if you can “break your record” for non-stop, fowing, grammatically correct, talk each time you repeat the conversation.

Lesson 34

Exercise 34-02 Decide whether the following statements are true (benar) or false (salah). 1. Laki-laki itu biasanya pulang pada jam 19.15.

Benar / Salah

2. Laki-laki itu suka belajar dengan adiknya di rumahnya.

Benar / Salah

3. Laki-laki itu suka pulang naik angkot.

Benar / Salah

4. Laki-laki itu pergi ke perpustakaan pagi-pagi sekali (very early in the morning).

Benar / Salah

Then answer with a full sentence. You don’t have to write the answer, just say it aloud. 1. Benar. Laki-laki itu biasanya pulang jam tujuh lewat seperempat. NOTE: In Lesson 20 you learned the word betul in the meaning of ‘correct’, ‘that’s right’. Benar and betul are synonyms, and both share salah as their antonym. BENAR/BETUL: real; really, right; correct; valid; honest; true, truely SALAH: false; fallacious; incorrect; inaccurate; errant; erroneous; mistaken; wrong

Ucapan: Pronouncing the /h/ sound Listen to Sound File 034-04. When /h/ appears at the end of a syllable in Indonesian it is very lightly, but audibly, breathed. Practise saying these words, audibly breathing the fnal /h/ sound. rumah

teh

lebih

murah

putih

sekolah

setengah

kuliah

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. angkot

to go home

bertemu

to chat

ayah

city transport

dengan

father

belajar

feld, open space

lapangan

to go shopping

berbelanja

to meet

pulang

to study

bercakap-cakap

with

Lesson 34

Latihan 2—Isian Lengkapilah teks berikut dengan memilih kata yang tepat: belajar—berangkat—berbelanja— berjalan-jalan—berkunjung—bermain—bermain tenis—bertemu—malam hari—pada—pada sore hari—salah 1. __________ malam hari Agung __________ di Gedung Olahraga. 2. Rudi suka sekali musik Hawaiʻi. Sekarang dia sudah bisa __________ ukulele. 3. Besok pagi saya akan __________ dengan teman saya di perpustakaan. 4. Saya mau __________ di perpustakaan sampai __________. 5. Tahun depan Tono mau __________ di Sumatra. 6. Tono mau __________ ke Danau Toba dan dia juga mau naik Gunung Sibayak. 7. Bus dari Jakarta ke Medan biasanya __________ pada siang hari, tetapi kadang-kadang busnya berangkat __________. 8. Saya mau ke Bandung, tetapi saya naik bus yang __________. Sekarang saya di Bogor! 9. Bagaimana kalau kita (we) __________ di Sarinah Mall? Saya mau mencari baju (shirt) untuk anak saya.

Latihan 3—Dialogue Read the “Dialogue” between Eko and Ani above, and test your comprehension of the dialogue. 1. Eko pergi ke perpustakaan dengan adiknya. A. Benar B. Salah 2. Eko belajar di perpustakaan pada pagi hari. A. Benar B. Salah 3. Eko pergi ke perpustakaan sesudah jam lima. A. Benar B. Salah 4. Eko belajar di perpustakaan lebih dari satu jam. A. Benar B. Salah 5. Eko pulang ke rumahnya naik taksi. A. Benar B. Salah 6. Eko suka sekali naik angkot. A. Benar B. Salah

Lesson 34

Latihan 4—Menyimak Listen to Sound File 034-03 and match the six recorded questions with an appropriate answer. 1.

a. Biasanya saya pulang jam tujuh seperempat.

2.

b. Saya pergi ke perpustakaan jam setengah enam

3.

c. Saya pulang naik bemo.

4.

d. Tidak. Saya tidak suka pulang naik bemo.

5.

e. Biasanya saya belajar di perpustakaan

6.

f. Pada sore hari saya belajar dengan adik saya.

Latihan 5—Rangkai Kata Urutkanlah kata-kata di bawah ini menjadi kalimat yang benar, yang artinya : 1. “I usually go to the campus in the morning.” Biasanya—kampus—pada—pergi—ke—saya—pagi—hari. 2. “At night I sometimes study in the library.” Pada—hari—di—saya—belajar—malam—kadang-kadang—perpustakaan. 3. “In the late afternoon I like to sit and drink cofee in the sitting room.” Pada—di—dan—sore—duduk—ruang tamu—hari—saya—suka—minum kopi. 4. “In the late afternoon I will study with my friend.” Pada—dengan—teman—sore—hari—akan—saya—belajar—saya. 5. “My younger sibling does not like to play tennis.” Adik—tidak—bermain—saya—suka—tenis.

Latihan 6—Pilihan Ganda Some of these sentences are correct and make good sense, others are grammatically wrong or don’t make good sense. Decide whether they are Benar (True) or Salah (False). 1. Pada pagi hari biasanya saya beli roti di toko Holland Bakery. A. Benar B. Salah 2. Apakah biasanya teman Anda pulang naik sepeda motor? A. Benar B. Salah 3. Anda mau pergi ke bioskop jam apa? A. Benar B. Salah

Lesson 34 4. Apakah mereka pulang naik apa? A. Benar B. Salah 5. Pacar saya tidak suka bermain tenis. A. Benar B. Salah 6. Pada sore siang saya akan belajar dengan kakak saya. A. Benar B. Salah 7. Pada malam hari kadang-kadang saya pulang dari bioskop naik teman. A. Benar B. Salah 8. Biasanya Anda bercakap-cakap ke siapa? A. Benar B. Salah 9. Biasanya saya berolahraga pada pagi hari. A. Benar B. Salah

Latihan 7—Teka Teki Silang Mendatar: 3. mini bus (public transport) 5. to meet 7. to study 8. to come or go home 10. morning 11. father 13. space, room 14. feld, ground, open space 15. a half Menurun: 1. library 2. cheap 4. to study at a university 5. to go shopping 6. house 9. boyfriend, girlfriend 12. with

Lesson 35

35 “What Do You Think?”

Aims • To practice talking about what someone usually does at a certain time of the day.

Vocabulary Review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings. bekerja

to work

lari

to run

berkunjung

to visit (a place)

masih

still

bermain

to play

pulang

to come home

ke mana

to where

sedang

in the process of

kuliah

a lecture

sepak bola

football (soccer)

lapangan

feld

“What do you usually do?” In English there are many diferent ways you can ask someone what they usually do at a certain time. For example, if you are speaking fairly formally you might say: What do you usually do in the afternoon? If you are being a bit less formal you can say: What are you up to in the afternoon? or perhaps What’s on at four o’clock? Indonesian also has many ways of asking this question. In everyday conversation you often use the word acara apa? (what program? what agenda? what is the particular thing you plan to do”) or kegiatan apa? (what activity?). These are coupled with the verbs ada or punya. It is also very common to use ke mana (to where?). Study these examples that show how acara, kegiatan and ke mana can be used. Pada sore hari biasanya ada acara apa? OR Pada sore hari biasanya Anda punya acara apa? In the late afternoon what program do you usually have? [In other words] What do you usually do in the late afternoon? Biasanya ada kegiatan apa pada pagi hari? OR Biasanya Anda punya

Lesson 35 kegiatan apa pada pagi hari? Usually, what activities do you have in the morning? [In other words] What do you usually do in the morning? Pada siang hari biasanya Anda ke mana? In the afternoon where do you usually go? [In other words] What do you usually do in the afternoon? Sesudah kuliah bahasa Inggris biasanya Anda pergi ke mana? After the English lecture, where do you usually go? [In other words] After the English lecture what do you usually do? You can even ask this question in a more formal way using a formula that begins: Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan.... What do you usually do... So... you can ask: sesudah pulang dari kantor jam lima sore Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan

jam delapan pagi

?

jam sepuluh malam jam tiga siang Here are some possible answers to these various questions in which you say what you do and where you do it. tidur di rumah belajar di perpustakaan bekerja di toko Sogo lari pagi di taman kota bermain tenis di lapangan tenis Biasanya saya

(sedang)

bersenam di gedung olahraga

(masih)

berenang di kolam renang bermain sepak bola di lapangan olahraga beristirahat di rumah bersembahyang di musala berkunjung ke rumah teman

Notice that in statements like these the adverb biasanya normally goes at the beginning of the sentence, though it is not wrong to put biasanya in the middle or at the end of the sentence. Notice also that you can insert sedang or masih if you want to emphasise that what you are doing is “on-going” or “unfnished” at the hour mentioned. If someone asks you what you usually do at a certain time of the day, you can begin your answer with Biasanya saya...... (Usually I .... ), then you can give more information by adding .... tetapi kadang-kadang saya..... (...but sometimes I ....).

Lesson 35 For example: Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam tujuh pagi? What are you usually doing at seven in the morning? Biasanya saya makan di dapur, tetapi kadang-kadang saya masih mandi. Usually I’m eating in the kitchen, but sometimes I’m still taking a bath. Pada sore hari biasanya ada kegiatan apa? What do you usually do in the late afternoon? Biasanya saya bersenam di gedung olahraga tetapi kadang-kadang saya pulang saja. Usually I work out at the sports hall, but sometimes I just go home. Biasanya ada acara apa pada malam hari? What do you usually do at night? Biasanya saya bercakap-cakap dengan teman tetapi kadang-kadang saya tidur saja. Usually I chat with friends, but sometimes I just go to bed. Sesudah pulang dari kampus biasanya Anda punya acara apa? After coming home from the campus what do you usually do? Biasanya saya lari dengan adik di taman. Usually I go for a run with my younger sister in the park. Translated literally, the question Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan? looks like this: Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan? What (is it) which usually by you is done? For the moment, don’t worry about the grammatical rationale for the order of words or the form of the verb lakukan. Just learn the sequence of words by heart. (The adverb biasanya can go almost anywhere in the sentence – beginning, middle, end – EXCEPT between Anda and lakukan.) The question is very formal and you won’t hear it much in everyday conversation. But don’t worry about this either. For the moment think of it as a kind of formal “passport” that will open the door to practice of many more immediately useful sentences and words. Biasanya Anda pergi ke mana pada siang hari? Where do you usually go in the afternoon? Biasanya saya tidak pergi ke mana-mana. Saya di kantor saja. Usually I don’t go anywhere. I just stay at the ofce. Biasanya ada kegiatan apa pada malam hari? What do you usually do at night? Biasanya saya bersembahyang di musala, lalu saya belajar di asrama. Usually I perform prayers in the prayer house, then I study in the dorm.

Lesson 35

Exercise 35-01 Answer each of the questions in this exercise with a complete sentence beginning with Biasanya saya... and containing an “add on” beginning with ....tetapi kadang-kadang saya.... Choose from among the verbs suggested below, and don’t forget to mention the name of a room or place if appropriate. Also, try to give answers that tell what you personally actually do. Study this example frst. Question: Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam tujuh malam? You may write: Biasanya saya makan di ruang makan, tetapi kadang-kadang saya bercakap-cakap dengan teman. mandi, belajar, makan, minum, bercakap-cakap, bekerja, pulang, lari pagi, bermain (tenis / sepak bola), bersenam, berenang, beristirahat, bersembahyang, tidur, masak, berbelanja, bertemu (dengan _____), pergi (ke ____), berkunjung (ke ____), kembali (dari ____) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam tujuh pagi? Biasanya Anda punya acara apa pada siang hari? Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam tiga sore? Biasanya Anda pergi ke mana sesudah pulang dari kampus? Biasanya ada kegiatan apa pada sore hari? Biasanya Anda punya kegiatan apa sesudah bermain sepak bola? Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam dua belas lewat seperempat siang? Biasanya ada acara apa pada pagi hari? Biasanya Anda pergi ke mana pada malam hari? Biasanya ada acara apa sesudah makan siang?

Exercise 35-02 Complete the three sentences that follow each question drawing on the vocabulary, models and exercises in Lesson 34. Try to make your answers as diverse as possible, especially by using a variety of verbs and mentioning a variety of places. 1.

2.

3.

Pertanyaan:

Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam tujuh pagi?

Jawaban:

Pada pagi hari biasanya saya .......

Pertanyaan:

O begitu. Apakah Anda juga ......?

Jawaban:

Ya. Kadang-kadang saya juga ......

Pertanyaan:

Biasanya Anda punya acara apa pada siang hari?

Jawaban:

Jam sebelas pagi biasanya saya......

Pertanyaan:

O begitu. Apakah Anda juga.....?

Jawaban:

Tidak. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya.....

Pertanyaan:

Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam tiga siang?

Jawaban:

Pada siang hari biasanya saya .........

Pertanyaan:

O begitu. Apakah kadang-kadang Anda juga......?

Lesson 35

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Jawaban:

Tidak. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya.......

Pertanyaan:

Biasanya Anda pergi ke mana sesudah pulang dari kampus?

Jawaban:

Sesudah pulang dari kampus? Biasanya saya.........

Pertanyaan:

O begitu. Apakah Anda juga .........?

Jawaban:

Ya. Kadang-kadang saya juga .........

Pertanyaan:

Biasanya ada kegiatan apa pada sore hari?

Jawaban:

Pada sore hari biasanya saya .........

Pertanyaan:

O begitu. Apakah kadang-kadang Anda juga........?

Jawaban:

Ya. Kadang-kadang saya juga.......

Pertanyaan:

Biasanya Anda punya kegiatan apa sesudah bermain sepak bola?

Jawaban:

Sesudah bermain sepak bola? Wah, biasanya saya.......

Pertanyaan:

O begitu. Apakah kadang-kadang Anda juga..........?

Jawaban:

Tidak. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya..........

Pertanyaan:

Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam dua belas lewat seperempat siang?

Jawaban:

Hmmmm, biasanya saya.........

Pertanyaan:

O begitu. Apakah kadang-kadang Anda juga.........?

Jawaban:

Ya. Kadang-kadang saya juga..........

Pertanyaan:

Biasanya ada acara apa pada pagi hari?

Jawaban:

Kira-kira jam tujuh pagi biasanya saya ........

Pertanyaan:

O begitu. Apakah Anda juga .......?

Jawaban:

Tidak. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya........

Pertanyaan:

Biasanya Anda pergi ke mana pada malam hari?

Jawaban:

.........

Pertanyaan:

O begitu. Apakah Anda juga......?

Jawaban:

Tidak. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya..........

10. Pertanyaan:

Biasanya ada acara apa sesudah makan siang?

Jawaban:

Sesudah makan siang, biasanya saya.........

Pertanyaan:

O begitu. Apakah Anda juga.........?

Jawaban:

Ya. Kadang-kadang saya juga..........

Ngapain belajar bahasa Indonesia? Sulit sih! The word ngapain is pronounced with an initial sound like the “ng” in the middle of the English word “singing”. It is a very slangy word that originated in the local dialect of Jakarta but is now heard in slangy talk among young people right across the country. It means “what (is someone) doing?”. In some contexts it can mean “why?”, “what for?”, “what’s going on?” or “what’s the point?”. Often (but far from always) it

Lesson 35 has overtones of sarcasm, indiference, cynicism, ridicule, scepticism or incredulity. Ngapain is formed from the base-word apa, with the informal verbal prefx ng- and the verbal sufx –in. The prefx ng- and the sufx –in are both very common in informal usage, and we shall glance at more examples of them later in the book. Study these examples. Ngapain kamu? What are you doing? / What are you up to? Nanti sore ngapain mereka? What are they doing this (late) afternoon? Ngapain belajar bahasa Indonesia? Sulit sih! Why would you want to study Indonesian? It’s tough! Ngapain pacaran sama dia!? Why would she want to be going out with him? Why would he want to be going out with her?

Dialogue Listen to this short conversation in Sound File 035-01 between two young people and savour its terse liveliness. It echoes the subject matter you studied earlier in the lesson but adopts the decidedly informal, even slangy, language you might hear in the streets of Jakarta. You have already met some of the informal words in the conversation: gimana, nggak, aja, jalan-jalan, sama, bisa, aku, ortu, kalo, O gitu, -mu, bilang, ama, sih. Check that you remember their meanings. If you get stuck, look at the translation. Transcription Ari

Eh Wien, gimana kabarnya?

Wiwin

Baik. Ke mana nih?

Ari

Nggak ke mana-mana. Eh, Wien, nanti malem ngapain?

Wiwin

Aku cuma di rumah aja. Emangnya kenapa?

Ari

Mau nggak, jalan-jalan sama aku ke tempatnya Joni.

Wiwin

Wah... nggak bisa, aku. Ortu nggak mau kalo aku keluar malem, apalagi ama kamu.

Ari

O gitu. Makasih. Bilang makasih ama ortumu, ya.

Wiwin

Ha ha ha. Kalian ngapain sih?

Ari

Biasa. Cuma main badminton aja di Gedung Olahraga.

Lesson 35 Translation Ari

Hey, Wien, how are you?

Wiwin

Fine. Where are you of to?

Ari

Nowhere. Hey Wien, what are you up to tonight?

Wiwin

I’ll just be at home. Why?

Ari

Would you like to come with me to Joni’s place?

Wiwin

Ohhh...I can’t. My parents don’t like if I go out at night, especially with you.

Ari

Is that so. Well, thank you. Say thanks to your parents too, OK?

Wiwin

Hahaha. What are you folks up to?

Ari

The usual. Just playing badminton at the Sports Hall.

Further explanation Eh Wien, gimana kabarnya?

Wien: a contraction of Wiwien which in turn is an informal contraction of the young lady’s name, probably Winarti. gimana kabarnya: a colloquial equivalent of apa kabar?

Baik. Ke mana nih?

When it is clear who is being addressed you don’t need a second-person pronoun like Anda, kamu or lu. nih: an informal variant of ini (just as tuh is an informal varianty of itu). Nih here adds a note of immediacy, something like “at the moment”.

Nggak ke mana-mana. Eh, Wien, nanti malem ngapain?

malem: an informal variant of malam. ngapain: what are you doing?

Aku cuma di rumah aja. Emangnya kenapa?

cuma: an informal substitute for hanya (only, just) kenapa: a common (and slightly more informal) variant of mengapa (why?) emangnya: from the formal memang (indeed). Emangnya kenapa has the force of “Why, what’s it to you?”

Mau nggak, jalan-jalan sama aku ke tempatnya Joni.

Mau nggak: “would you like to or not?” tempatnya Joni: tempat ‘place’ is often used instead of rumah.

Lesson 35 Wah... nggak bisa, aku. Ortu nggak mau kalo aku keluar malem, apalagi ama kamu.

ama: an informal substitute for bersama ‘together with’ or dengan ‘with’

O gitu. Makasih. Bilang makasih ama ortumu, ya.

makasih: an informal variant of terima kasih

Ha ha ha. Kalian ngapain sih?

kalian: the plural form of kamu.

Biasa. Cuma main badminton aja di Gedung Olahraga.

main: an informal variant of bermain (to play)

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. bermain

to work

masih

a lecture

berkunjung

to play

pulang

feld, open space

bekerja

to return, go home

sedang

soccer, football

kuliah

to visit (a place)

sepak bola

still

lapangan

in the process of...

Latihan 2—Menjodohkan Jodohkan kalimat di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1. Pada malam hari biasanya ada acara apa?

a. Usually I am eating in the kitchen, but sometimes I am still taking a bath.

2. Biasanya ada kegiatan apa pada pagi hari?

b. What do you usually do at seven in the morning?

3. Pada siang hari biasanya Anda ke mana?

c. What activities are there/do you do in the morning?

4. Sesudah kuliah bahasa Inggris biasanya Anda pergi ke mana?

d. After the English lecture, where do you usually go?

5. Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan?

e. What do you usually do?

6. Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam tujuh pagi?

f. What is usually going on in the evening?

7. Biasanya saya makan di dapur, tetapi kadang-kadang saya masih mandi.

g. Where do you usually go in the afternoon?

8. Pada sore hari biasanya ada kegiatan apa?

h. What activities do you usually do in the late afternoon?

Lesson 35

Latihan 3—Menjodohkan Listen to the nine sentences in Sound File 035-02 and match them with the translations to the right. a. After coming home from the campus what do you usually do? b. Usually I chat with friends, but sometimes I just go to bed. c. Usually I don’t go anywhere. d. Usually I go for a run with my younger sister in the park. e. Usually I perform prayers in the prayer house, then I study in my apartment. f. Usually I work out at the sports hall, but sometimes I just go home. g. What do you usually do at night? h. Where do you usually go in the afternoon?

Latihan 4—Rangkai Kata Reorder the Indonesian words below to say : 1. “What is usually going on in the late afternoon?” Pada—sore—hari—acara—ada—biasanya—apa? 2. “What activities do you typically do in the morning?” Biasanya—pada—ada—apa—kegiatan—pagi—hari 3. “After the English lecture, where do you usually go?” Sesudah—biasanya—kuliah—pergi—ke—Anda—bahasa Inggris—mana? 4. “What do you usually do after you come home from the ofce?” Apa—dari—pulang—yang—biasanya—Anda—sesudah—lakukan—kantor? 5. “What do you usually do at eight in the morning?” Apa—delapan—lakukan—yang—jam—biasanya—Anda—pagi?

Latihan 5—Pertanyaan & Jawaban You will listen to fve questions (Sound File 035-03). Only one answer is possible. 1. Recording 1 A. Ya. Dan kadang-kadang saya juga berbelanja di Sarinah. B. Pada pagi hari biasanya saya bangun pagi-pagi. C. Jam tujuh malam biasanya saya makan malam.

Lesson 35 2. Recording 2 A. Jam sebelas siang biasanya saya di kantor. B. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya di kampus. C. Jam delapan malam biasanya saya di rumah. 3. Recording 3 A. Pada malam biasanya saya menonton flm. B. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya makan dengan teman. C. Pada sore hari biasanya saya bekerja. 4. Recording 4 A. Saya pergi ke kampus setiap hari. B. Sesudah pulang dari kampus, saya pulang ke rumah. C. Kadang-kadang saya tidak pergi ke kampus karena saya sakit. 5. Recording 5 A. Sesudah bermain sepak bola, biasanya saya pulang ke rumah. B. Saya suka bermain sepak bola tetapi saya tidak selalu bermain dengan teman saya. C. Saya bermain sepak bola dengan teman saya setiap hari.

Latihan 6—Isian Complete the dialogue. Note that the entire dialogue is held in Jakarta-style colloquial Indonesian. Choose from the following words: aja—ama—cuma—gimana—emangnya— kalian—main—makasih—malem—ngapain—nggak—nih Wiwin & Ari Ari

Eh Wien, __________ kabarnya?

Wiwin

Baik. Ke mana __________?

Ari

Nggak ke mana-mana. Eh, Wien, nanti malem __________?

Wiwin

Aku __________ di rumah aja. __________ kenapa?

Ari

Mau __________, jalan-jalan sama aku ke tempatnya Joni.

Wiwin

Wah... nggak bisa, aku. Ortu nggak mau kalo aku keluar __________, apalagi __________ kamu.

Ari

O gitu. Makasih. Bilang __________ ama ortumu, ya.

Wiwin

Ha ha ha. __________ ngapain sih?

Ari

Biasa. Cuma __________ badminton __________ di Gedung Olahraga.

Lesson 35

Latihan 7—Menjodohkan Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan defnisinya di sebelah kanan.—Match the items on the left to their defnitions on the right. 1. gimana

a. (informal variant of bersama) with, together with

2. nggak

b. a slangy particle that adds emphasis and colour to a question or assertion

3. aja

c. (informal variant of saya) I, me

4. jalan-jalan

d. (informal variant of o begitu), Is that so? I see. Really.

5. sama

e. (informal variant of tidak), no, not

6. aku

f. (a slangy abbreviation of orang tua) parents

7. ortu

g. (informal variant of kamu) your

8. o gitu

h. (informal variant of berjalan-jalan) to go for a walk/stroll, to wander about, to travel around

9. -mu

i. (informal variant of bagaimana), how, what is...like?

10. ama

j. (informal variant of saja) just, only

11. sih

k. (informal variant of sama) with, together with

Latihan 8—Isian Lengkapi teks berikut sesuai dengan rekaman.—Listen to Sound File 035-05 to fll in the blanks. (Note: kami=we, hari libur=holiday) Buku Harian Hari ini hari libur dan aku punya banyak __________. Pada pagi hari, aku mau __________. Aku suka __________, apalagi berenang, tapi __________ tidak buka. Jadi, aku dan temanku __________ pagi di alun-alun. __________ lari, aku pulang ke __________. Pada siang hari aku bertemu dengan pacarku di mal. Namanya Tomi. Kami sudah 2 tahun __________. Kami biasa __________ banyak kegiatan bersama, seperti belajar, pergi ke kampus dan olahraga. Tomi suka sekali bermain __________. Kalau tidak ada yang __________, kami biasanya berjalan-jalan saja di __________. Pada sore hari, aku tidak punya __________ jadi aku hanya __________ di apartemen.

Lesson 35

Latihan 9—Teka Teki Silang (TTS) Mendatar: 2. in the process of... 3. to go shopping 4. Muslim prayer room 5. to visit (a place) 8. to do (something) 9. to pray, to worship 11. to work 12. still 13. difcult, hard to do 14. to cook 15. to go/come home Menurun: 1. to play 3. to rest, to take a break 6. a lecture, to study at a university 7. to swim 8. feld, open space 9. to work out, to do gymnastics 10. to sleep, to go to bed 11. to meet

Lesson 36

36 What Do You Do In Your Free Time?

Aims • To practice talking about recreational activities.

Vocabulary Review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings. acara

agenda, event

bagaimana kalau

what if...

berenang

to swim

beristirahat

to rest

bersembahyang

to pray

bersenam

to work out

di samping

beside

kegiatan

an activity

lapangan

a feld

mungkin

possibly

tidak usah

don’t need to

Ibu dan Anak Bermain Congklak © Mathieu Castel

Talking About Free Time and Days Off Here are some ways of asking about spare time, free time or leisure time: Biasanya ada acara apa pada hari libur? What’s usually on the agenda on your day of? Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan kalau tidak bekerja atau belajar? What do you usually do if you are not working or studying? Kalau Anda tidak bekerja apakah Anda hanya beristirahat saja? If you’re not working, do you just rest (and do nothing else)? Apakah Anda suka berolahraga pada waktu senggang? Do you enjoy playing sport in your free time?

Lesson 36 Kalau tidak bekerja Anda suka berjalan-jalan ke mana? If you’re not working, where do you like to go (for recreational purposes)? Saya suka sekali berbelanja pada waktu senggang. Kalau Anda bagaimana? I love shopping in my spare time. What about you? Pacar saya suka sekali bekerja di kebun pada waktu senggang, tetapi saya lebih suka pergi ke bioskop. My girlfriend/boyfriend loves working in the garden in her/his spare time, but I prefer to go to the cinema. Kalau Anda tidak pergi ke kampus biasanya ada kegiatan apa? If you don’t go to the campus, what activities do you have? Pada waktu senggang apakah Anda suka pergi ke Gedung Olahraga atau kolam renang? In your spare time, do you like to go to the sports ground or the swimming pool? Each of these questions can be varied. Here are some examples. See if you can add more items to the substitution columns. kalau tidak bekerja? Apa yang Anda lakukan

pada hari libur? kalau tidak mau belajar? pergi ke kantor?

Biasanya ada kegiatan apa kalau Anda tidak

bekerja atau belajar? bertemu dengan teman? tidur saja?

Kalau tidak bekerja, apakah Anda hanya

beristirahat saja? tinggal di rumah saja?

berenang Apakah Anda suka

berolahraga

pada waktu senggang?

pergi ke ... pergi Kalau tidak bekerja, Anda suka

berjalan-jalan

ke mana?

berkunjung rumah Di samping di mesjid, apakah Anda juga bersembahyang di

musala kantor

?

Lesson 36 bermain tenis Saya suka sekali

berbelanja

pada waktu senggang. Kalau Anda bagaimana?

naik bus ke ... tinggal di rumah Pacar saya suka sekali

bekerja di kebun

pada waktu senggang, tetapi saya lebih suka ...

masak di dapur

Exercise 36-01 Listen to Sound File 036-01 and then read this passage through carefully several times. Try to remember it as best you can.

Hari Libur

H

ari ini hari libur. Tidak ada kuliah, pasar sepi, anak-anak tidak masuk sekolah, kantor pemerintah tutup. Pada hari libur biasanya saya di rumah saja, tetapi kadang-kadang kami sekeluarga berjalan-jalan ke kampung. Tadi pagi saya ke mal bersama dengan teman saya Astuti. Toko-toko ramai sekali. Saya dan Astuti suka minum kopi di kafe. Saya suka kopi manis asal Jawa, tetapi Astuti lebih suka kopi susu asal Sulawesi. Harganya cukup mahal, kira-kira Rp.50.000 untuk kopi dan kue. Kalau di warung biasa tidak sampai Rp. 3.000. Once you have almost memorised the text do the exercise below without referring back to the text above. My Holiday Today is a holiday. The university is closed,

Hari ini hari _________. Tidak ada kuliah, pa-

the market is empty, the children don’t go to

sar _________, anak-anak tidak masuk seko-

school, and the government ofces are

lah, kantor pemerintah _________. Pada hari

closed. On holidays I usually just stay at

libur biasanya saya di rumah _________, teta-

home, but once in a while our whole family

pi kadang-kadang kami _________ berjalan-

goes to visit the village. This morning I went

-jalan ke kampung. _________ saya ke mal

to the shopping mall together with my friend

_________ teman saya Astuti. Toko-toko

Astuti. The shops were very crowded. Astuti

_________. Saya dan Astuti _________ minum

and I like to have a cofee in a café. I like

kopi di kafe. Saya suka kopi manis asal Jawa,

Javanese cofee with sugar, but Astuti

tetapi Astuti _________ kopi susu asal Sula-

prefers cofee from Sulawesi. It’s pretty ex-

wesi. Harganya _________ mahal, _________

pensive, a cup of cofee and a piece of cake

Rp.50.000 untuk kopi dan kue. Kalau di wa-

cost about Rp. 50,000. In a foodstall it would

rung biasa tidak sampai Rp. 3.000.

be less than Rp. 3,000.

Lesson 36

SeIn combination with a noun, the prefx se- sometimes takes on the meaning “all..., the whole...” Tetapi kadang-kadang kami sekeluarga berjalan-jalan ke kampung. But sometimes the whole family travels to the village (i.e. the family’s hometown).

Dialogue: Ibu Gah & Ida Listen to the Sound File 036-02 between Ibu Gah (64 years old) and Ida (19 years old). After that, read the transcription and try memorise the conversation as much as you can. If you forget some words, take a quick peek at the transcription. Say the Indonesian text out loud until you can pronounce all words correctly and smoothly.

Ibu Gah

Ida, hari ini hari libur. Biasanya kamu pergi ke mana pada hari libur?

Hari libur? Biasanya saya beristirahat saja di rumah.

Hah? Beristirahat di rumah? Ibu kira kamu pasti berenang di kolam renang atau lari pagi.

Ya, memang, kadang-kadang saya lari pagi di taman.

O begitu. Apakah kamu juga suka bersenam di Gedung Olahraga?

Kadang-kadang. Kalau Ibu bagaimana? Apakah Ibu juga suka berolahraga?

Tidak. Ibu lebih suka masak di rumah atau bekerja di kebun pada waktu senggang.

Bu... Ibu tidak boleh tinggal di rumah saja. Apakah Ibu mau berjalan-jalan dengan saya di taman?

Terima kasih, Ida. Ibu sudah tua! Ibu suka beristirahat di rumah. Kadang-kadang Ibu juga berbelanja di Mal Taman Cempaka.

Katanya di Taman Cempaka ada restoran yang enak. Apakah saya boleh ikut dengan Ibu ke mal?

Boleh, Ida. Ibu mau ke Taman Cempaka sekarang. Tetapi katanya kamu mau lari pagi.

Ah, tidak usah, Bu. Saya lebih suka ikut Ibu ke mal. Siapa tahu bisa makan enak dengan Ibu.

Ida

With a classmate or a tutor, practice this conversation and see if you can repeat it perfectly without looking back at the script.

Lesson 36

In Your Free Time or On Your Day Off Imagine you are sitting in a cofee shop (warung kopi) after a long day’s work or study. The conversation turns to recreation. What do you do in your free time (pada waktu senggang) or on a public day of / public holiday (pada hari libur) or when you are not working or studying?

☞ To ask about... • what someone usually does

use ...apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan? or ...biasanya Anda pergi ke mana? or ...biasanya ada kegiatan apa? or ...biasanya ada acara apa?

• where something is done

use Di mana...?

• what time something is done

use Jam berapa...?

• with whom something is done

use ...dengan siapa?

• whether someone does something use Apakah Anda...? • how long you do something

use Berapa lama...?

• what (kind of) sport, food etc.

use ...apa (e.g. olahraga apa? what sport?)

☞ To talk about what you... • would like to do

use mau

• can do

use bisa or dapat

• like to do

use suka

• prefer to do

use lebih suka

• usually do

use biasanya

☞ You can talk about the times when you do something, for example... • the times of the day

use jam..., pada pagi hari, pada siang hari, pada sore hari, pada malam hari

• today

use hari ini, nanti siang, nanti sore, nanti malam

☞ You can talk about categories of recreational, or leisure-time, activity... • staying at home

use tinggal, beristirahat, masak, bekerja, belajar

• going somewhere

use pergi, kembali, pulang, naik ___ ke..., berkunjung ke..., bertemu dengan...

• physical exertion

use lari pagi, berenang, berjalan kaki, bersenam naik sepeda, berolahraga, bermain sepak bola, bermain tenis, bermain badminton

• indulging yourself

use makan, minum, berbelanja, bercakap-cakap, tidur, pergi ke pesta, duduk di warung kopi

Lesson 36

☞ You can talk about places and people... • around the house

use di + rumah, dapur, kebun, garasi, apartemen

• in town

use di + taman, mal, toko, restoran, bioskop, hotel

• at sports facilities

use di + lapangan tenis, kolam renang, gedung olahraga

• family

use dengan + keluarga, suami, istri, orang tua, anak, ibu, ayah, kakak, adik

• friends and pets

use dengan + pacar, teman, mahasiswa, anjing, kucing

☞ You can add authentic life to the conversation with these words... • exclamations

use Hah!? Aduh! Bagus! Wah!

• “I’m listening”

use O begitu, Memang, Baik

• connectors

use juga, dan, atau, kalau begitu, di samping...

• giving your opinion

use tetapi, saya kira, katanya, o ya, saya lebih suka... Kalau Anda bagaimana?

• making suggestions

use Apakah Anda mau...? Bagaimana kalau..., Ayo... tidak usah...

From this list of “pointers” you can generate literally millions of unique combinations. The pointers are sifted from all the previous lessons in The Indonesian Way, but review of Lessons 32– 36 will be of special help to you as sources of vocabulary, grammar, and sentences that you can use to liven up the present role play. Talk about your own habits, preferences and opinions, but don’t try to say more than your current command of Indonesian permits you to say. In other words, tailor your ideas to the language resources you have mastered. If you try to say more than you are currently capable of saying you will feel frustrated, the conversation may die, or worst of all, you will drop into English. Avoid this as far as you can by talking fuently and correctly within the parameters you have practised to this point. If necessary keep the list of pointers before you to glance at from time to time. But as soon as you can, let go of it and “fy” by yourself. Repeat the role play several times, each time striving for smoother fuency, greater correctness and more variation. You will fnd there is a lot you can say with the resources sketched above. Challenge yourself. How many minutes can you and your partner talk in correct Indonesian without pausing or dropping into English? Set a target, and time yourself with a clock or stopwatch. Each time you repeat the role play try to break your record.

Lesson 36

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. acara

agenda, event

bersenam

possibly, maybe

berenang

activity

di samping

to swim

beristirahat

besides

kegiatan

to pray

bersembahyang

to work out

mungkin

to rest

Latihan 2—To talk about what you... Match the topic with the most appropriate Indonesian phrase. 1. want, would like to do

a. biasanya

2. can do

b. lebih suka

3. like to do

c. suka

4. prefer to do

d. mau

5. usually do

e. bisa, dapat

Latihan 3—Menjodohkan: To ask about... Match the topic with the most appropriate Indonesian phrase. 1. what someone usually does

a. Jam berapa...

2. where something is done

b. Di mana...

3. what time something is done

c. Berapa lama...

4. with whom something is done

d. Apakah Anda...

5. whether someone does something

e. Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan

6. how long you do something

f. ...dengan siapa

7. what (kind of) sport, food, etc.

g. ...apa (e.g. olahraga apa)

Latihan 4—Menjodohkan Jodohkanlah kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1. hari libur

a. quiet, lonely, deserted

2. kalau Anda bagaimana

b. to really like, to love (doing sth.)

3. pasti

c. defnetely, sure to be

Lesson 36 4. sepi

d. not allowed to, shouldn’t

5. suka sekali

e. a day of, a holiday

6. tidak boleh

f. a sports ground/feld

7. tidak usah

g. what about you

8. lapangan olahraga

h. free time, spare time

9. waktu senggang

i. (yes) indeed

10. memang

j. don’t need to, shouldn’t bother to

Latihan 5—Menyimak Jodohkanlah rekaman dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan.—Match the eleven sentences of Sound File 036-03 with the sentences in the right column. 1.

a. Do you enjoy playing sports in your free time?

2.

b. I love shopping in my spare time.

3.

c. I prefer to go to the cinema.

4.

d. If you don’t go to the campus, what activities do you have?

5.

e. If you’re not working, do you just rest (and do nothing else?)

6.

f. If you’re not working, where do you like to go?

7.

g. In your spare time, do you like to go to the sports ground or the swimming pool?

8.

h. My boyfriend loves working in the garden in his spare time.

9.

i. What about you?

10.

j. What do you usually do if you are not working or studying?

11.

k. What’s usually on the agenda on your day of?

Latihan 6—Benar Salah Based on the dialogue between Ida and Bu Gah, which of the following statements are true (benar) and which are false (salah)? 1. On holidays Ida usually stays at home. A. Benar B. Salah 2. On holidays Ida usually does some gardening. A. Benar B. Salah 3. Ibu Gah is surprised that Ida is not more active. A. Benar B. Salah

Lesson 36 4. Ida wants to go to the swimming pool. A. Benar B. Salah 5. Because she is already old, Ibu Gah does not engage in sports. A. Benar B. Salah 6. Ida likes the idea of going to the mall because she hopes the food will be good there. A. Benar B. Salah

Latihan 7—Jawab Pertanyaan Translate the highlighted words or phrases. Ibu Gah

Ida, Today is a holiday. Where do you usually go on a holiday?

Ida

On a holiday? Usually I stay home and take a rest.

Ibu Gah

What? Staying at home to take a rest? I thought you would certainly go to a swimming pool or do some jogging in the morning.

Ida

Yes, that’s right, sometimes I run in the park. Do you also like sports?

Ibu Gah

No. I rather cook at home or spend my leisure time working in the garden.

Ida

Ma’am... You shouldn’t stay home all the time. Do you want to take a walk with me in the park?

Ibu Gah

Thank you, Ida. I am already old! I prefer resting at home. Sometimes I like to shop at Taman Cempaka Mall.

Ida

I heard there’s a delicious restaurant at Taman Cempaka. Can I join you to the mall?

Ibu Gah

Sure, Ida. I want to go now to Taman Cempaka. But you said you wanted to run in the morning.

Ida

Oh... that’s not important, Ma’am. I rather go with you to the mall. Who knows the food may be yummie.

Latihan 8—Isian: Percakapan Lengkapi teks berikut dengan memilih kata yang tepat:—ikut—taman—bersenam—juga— senggang—pergi—beristirahat—saja—Katanya—berenang—berolahraga

Ibu Gah

Ida, hari ini hari libur. Biasanya kamu __________ ke mana pada hari libur?

Hari libur? Biasanya saya __________ saja di rumah.

Hah? Beristirahat di rumah? Ibu kira kamu pasti __________ di kolam renang atau lari pagi.

Ya, memang, kadang-kadang saya lari pagi di __________.

Ida

Lesson 36 O begitu. Apakah kamu juga suka __________ di Gedung Olahraga?

Kadang-kadang. Kalau Ibu bagaimana? Apakah Ibu juga suka __________?

Tidak. Ibu lebih suka masak di rumah atau bekerja di kebun pada waktu __________.

Bu... Ibu tidak boleh tinggal di rumah __________. Apakah Ibu mau berjalan-jalan dengan saya di taman?

Terima kasih, Ida. Ibu sudah tua! Ibu suka beristirahat di rumah. Kadang-kadang Ibu __________ berbelanja di Mal Taman Cempaka.

__________ di Taman Cempaka ada restoran yang enak. Apakah saya boleh ikut dengan Ibu ke mal?

Boleh, Ida. Ibu mau ke Taman Cempaka sekarang. Tetapi katanya kamu mau lari pagi.

Ah, tidak usah, Bu. Saya lebih suka __________ Ibu ke mal. Siapa tahu bisa makan enak dengan Ibu.

Latihan 9—Rangkai Kata Urutkanlah kata-kata di bawah ini menjadi kalimat yang benar, yang artinya : 1. “Do you enjoy playing sport in your free time?” Apakah—berolahraga—waktu—pada—suka—Anda—senggang? 2. “If you’re not working, where do you like to go (for recreational purposes)?” Kalau—ke—suka—berjalan-jalan—tidak—Anda—bekerja,—mana? 3. “I love shopping in my spare time.” Saya—waktu—pada—suka—berbelanja—sekali—senggang. 4. “My girlfriend/boyfriend loves working in the garden in his/her spare time.” Pacar—waktu—sekali—bekerja di kebun—suka—saya—pada—senggang. 5. “What do you do on the holiday?” Apa—pada—hari—Anda—lakukan—yang—libur? 6. “This morning I went to the Fajar Shop with my friend Astuti.” Tadi—Toko Fajar—dengan—saya—teman saya—pagi—bersama—ke—Astuti. 7. “It’s pretty expensive, about Rp.50.000 for a cofee and a cake. Harganya—untuk—mahal,—kopi—kira-kira—dan—cukup—Rp.50.000—kue.

Lesson 36

Latihan 19—Teka Teki Silang (TTS) Mendatar: 1. to swim 4. to rest, to take a break 5. garden 6. cat 8. to work out, to do gymnastics 11. to study 13. agenda, (radio, TV) program 15. university student 16. family Menurun: 1. to pray 2. wife 3. to go 7. to work 9. activity 10. husband 12. dog 14. to cook

Lesson 37

37 What Did You Do Last Night?

Aims • To give practice asking and answering questions about some particular events.

Vocabulary Review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings.

Mesjid Gede Kauman di Yogyakarta. © ChrisSteph LewisBoegeman

acara

program, event

kira-kira

approximately

atau

or

pasti

defnitely

berenang

to swim

pesta

party

beristirahat

to rest

pulang

to go home

berkunjung (ke...)

to visit (a place)

pusat

the centre

bersembahyang

to pray

seperti biasa

as usual

bertemu

to meet

susu

milk

hanya

only

warung

streetside stall

kamu

you

More on “What Time?” and “Where?” You know already that “What time?” is Jam berapa? and Where? is Di mana? In the question Jam berapa Anda ke kantor? the person asking the question knows that you will be going to your ofce, but she doesn’t know the time. In Indonesian, the information that is unknown is generally

Lesson 37 the subject of the sentence (marked red) whereas the known information is put in the predicate (marked blue): Jam berapa Anda ke kantor? What time do you go to your ofce?

Jam sebelas saya ke kantor. I am going to my ofce at eleven o’clock.

Di mana Mesjid Gede? Where is the Grand Mosque?

Di Yogyakarta Mesjid Gede. The Grand Mosque is in Yogyakarta.

The position of subject and predicate can generally be reversed without altering the meaning: Anda ke kantor jam berapa? What time do you go to your ofce? Mesjid Gede di mana? Where is the Grand Mosque?

Saya ke kantor jam sebelas. I am going to my ofce at eleven o’clock. Mesjid Gede di Yogyakarta. The Grand Mosque is in Yogyakarta.

Please note that there is no question-answer pattern. If the question has the subject in initial position, the answer may as well have the predicate in initial position: position of subject and pre dicate can generally be reversed in Indonesian without altering the meaning: Di mana Mesjid Gede?

Mesjid Gede di Yogyakarta.

Here are some more options for asking “what time?” and “where?”. Practise generating questions and answers from the sentence shells below. Make as many diferent combinations as you can from the various columns. Add to the choices in each column by borrowing from the sentence shells in Lesson 32 and other recent lessons. You can include or exclude mau and akan according to what you want to say. Biasanya can ft in to these shells at various points too—especially at the beginning of the sentence, after jam berapa and at the end of the sentence.

Jam berapa

Jam berapa

teman Anda Anda pacar Anda ibu Anda

guru Anda Anda suami Anda

(akan) (mau)

(akan) (mau)

lari pagi bermain tenis bersenam berenang berolahraga beristirahat berkunjung ke bersembahyang di beristirahat di

di gedung olahraga di kolam renang di taman kota di lapangan olahraga

apartemen Pusat Mahasiswa mesjid musala

?

?

In your answer you can simply say the time, or you can “echo” the question. Guru saya Saya Pacar saya

(jam tujuh)

(akan) (mau)

bermain tenis di lapangan olahraga. bersembahyang di musala berenang di kolam renang

jam tujuh.

Lesson 37

“What Time Did You Get Home Last Night?” The Indonesian term for “last night” is tadi malam. You have the language resources to ask and answer questions about what someone did last night. Study these examples. Jam berapa kamu pulang tadi malam? What time did you get home last night? Saya pulang jam sebelas. I came home at eleven o’clock. Kamu ke mana tadi malam? Where did you go last night? Saya ke pesta di rumah teman. I went to a party at a friend’s place. Kamu pergi ke pesta itu dengan siapa? Who did you go to the party with? Saya pergi ke pesta dengan Arif. I went to the party with Arif. Apakah kamu minum bir atau anggur tadi malam? Did you drink beer or wine last night? Saya minum bir dan anggur. I drank beer and wine. Di mana kamu minum? Where did you drink? Di rumah teman. At my friend’s place. Kamu pulang naik apa? How did you come home (i.e. by what mode of transport)? Saya pulang naik sepeda motor. I came home by motor bike. Study the model dialogue below. There are two characters in it. One is a suspicious mother, the other a wayward son. Notice the use of these new phrases: Saya tidak percaya. I don’t believe it/you. Pasti kamu.... You are bound to have... / You must have... There’s no doubt in my mind that you... Nanti dulu. Just a moment. / Hang on a sec. Now to the dialogue.

Lesson 37

Dialogue Notice how the wayward son appears to be somewhat devious, or perhaps a bit nervous about telling the full truth. Notice also that the mother addresses her son with the informal, “speak ing-down” pronoun kamu (the son could never address his mother with kamu) and refers to herself with the “speaking-down” pronoun aku. In the usual fashion, after listening to the sound fle very carefully, without looking at the transcription, try to say the Indonesian text out loud. If you get stuck, look at the translation to get the English equivalent. Keep practising until you can say the Indonesian without error and, if possible, without being prompted by having to glance at the English translation. Before reading the following transcription, listen to Sound File 037-01 and answer the following questions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

What time did the boy go home? What did he play at the Sports Hall? With whom was he there? Did he drink alcohol? How did he get home?

Bu Yanti

Jam berapa kamu pulang tadi malam?

Saya pulang kira-kira jam delapan, Bu.

Jam delapan? Aku tidak percaya! Kamu pergi ke mana tadi malam?

Saya pergi ke gedung olahraga. Saya bermain bulu tangkis.

O begitu. Kamu bermain dengan siapa?

Dengan teman saya Tanti.

Pasti kamu ke rumah Tanti.

Tidak, Bu. Saya hanya bermain bulu tangkis dengan Tanti di gedung olahraga.

Hmmm. Apakah kamu minum alkohol tadi malam?

Tidak, Bu. Saya minum susu saja di gedung olahraga.

Nanti dulu. Apakah ada rumah makan atau warung di gedung olahraga? Saya kira tidak ada.

Ada, Bu. Ada warung kecil di belakang gedung.

O begitu. Kamu pulang naik apa?

Naik sepeda, Bu, seperti biasa.

Hah? Pasti kamu pulang naik sepeda motor dengan Tanti.

O tidak, Bu. Tadi malam saya capai sekali. Saya pulang jam delapan naik sepeda.

Suryo

Hmmm. Ternyata kamu anak yang baik. Translation

Bu Yanti

What time did you get home last night?

I got home about eight o’clock, mother.

About eight o’ clock? I don’t believe it! Where did you go last night?

I went to the sports hall. I played badminton.

Suryo

Lesson 37 Really? Who did you play with?

With my friend Tanti.

You must have gone to Tanti’s place.

No, mother. I only played badminton with Tanti in the sport hall.

Did you drink alcohol last night?

No, mother. I had some milk at the sports hall.

Just a moment. Is there a restaurant or eatery at the sports hall? I don’t think there is.

Yes, there is, mother. There is a small eatery behind the sports hall.

I see. How did you come home?

By bicycle, mother, as always.

What? You defnitely came home by motorbike with Tanti.

Oh, no I didn’t, mother. I was very tired last night. I came home at eight o’clock by bicycle.

Hmmm. It would appear that you are a good boy after all.

Exercise 37-01 Answer the following questions using your own words. You should not follow the storyline as in the above dialogue but invent your own. 1. Jam berapa Anda pulang tadi malam? 2. Anda pergi ke mana tadi malam? 3. Anda pergi ke lapangan olahraga dengan siapa? 4. Apakah Anda minum wiski tadi malam? 5. Di mana Anda minum? 6. Anda pulang naik apa? 7. Apakah Anda bertemu dengan Susi tadi malam? 8. Siapa nama teman Anda? 9. Jam berapa Anda pergi ke klab malam tadi malam? 10. Ada acara apa tadi malam?

Role Play: “What Time Did You Get Home Last Night?” Indonesian parents and the landladies in charge of student boarding houses are often very strict and conservative, and will often interrogate children or lodgers – even if they are young adults – about their personal lives. With your teacher/tutor or with a classmate, role play a vari ation of the above dialogue. There will be two characters in the role play: perhaps (as above) a worried parent and a wayward son/daughter, or perhaps a stern landlady and a wayward young lodger. The interrogator should put his/her questions aggressively and respond to answers with scepticism. The wayward child/lodger should give humorously devious answers. To bring the role play to life, make sure that you have thoroughly mastered all the relevant vocabulary and sentence

Lesson 37 shells and can produce them without thinking too much. Play the dialogue for laughs, whether belly-laughs or subtle laughs. Squeeze as much melodramatic emotion from it as you can.

Ucapan: More practice with /h/ in the fnal position As we have seen previously, when /h/ appears at the end of a syllable it is very lightly, but audibly, breathed. Try saying these sentences, audibly breathing the fnal /h/ sound. Don’t forget to also roll the /r/, suppress aspiration, and pronounce each syllable with roughly equal stress but with some extra stress on the second-to-last syllable (except where that syllable has an unstressed /ə/ sound in it). Listen to Sound File 037-02. ✗

Rumah Ibu Gah putih.

✗

Sudah jam setengah tujuh.

✗

Sekolah menengah desa Suruh.

✗

Apakah buah itu murah?

✗

Apakah gedung pemerintah itu jauh dari sini?

✗

Ayah bertanya: “Apakah saya boleh makan buah ini?”

✗

Tujuh tambah sepuluh itu tujuh belas.

✗

Rumah sakit ini bersih dan murah.

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu acara

agenda, event

kira-kira

to swim

atau

approximately

pasti

to return home

berenang

you (informal)

pesta

party, festivity

beristirahat

only

pulang

ordinary, normal

berkunjung (ke...)

centre

pusat

defnitely

bersembahyang

to visit (a place)

seperti

to meet

bertemu

or

biasa

stall, eatery

hanya

to pray

susu

as

kamu

to take a rest

warung

milk

Latihan 2—Menjodohkan Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1. Saya tidak percaya.

a. As usual.

2. Pasti kamu minum, ya

b. I don’t think there is one.

3. Nanti dulu.

c. I see.

4. O begitu.

d. I’m pretty sure there is one.

Lesson 37 5. Seperti biasa.

e. I’m sure you had a sip.

6. Saya kira ada.

f. I don’t believe you.

7. Saya kira tidak ada.

g. Hang on a sec.

Latihan 3—Isian Lengkapi teks berikut dengan memilih kata yang tepat: belakang—berapa—capai—gedung —hanya—kira—kira-kira—makan—minum—naik—pasti—percaya—pulang—seperti—siapa —susu—tadi—teman—ternyata

Bu Yanti

Suryo

Jam ___________ kamu pulang tadi malam?

Saya pulang ___________ jam delapan, Bu.

Jam delapan? Aku tidak __________! Kamu pergi ke mana ___________ malam?

Saya pergi ke ___________ olahraga. Saya bermain bulu tangkis.

O begitu. Kamu bermain dengan ___________?

Dengan ___________ saya Tanti.

___________ kamu ke rumah Tanti.

Tidak, Bu. Saya ___________ bermain bulu tangkis dengan Tanti di gedung olahraga.

Hmmm. Apakah kamu ___________ alkohol tadi malam?

Tidak, Bu. Saya minum ___________ saja di gedung olahraga.

Nanti dulu. Apakah ada rumah ___________ atau warung di gedung olahraga? Saya ___________ tidak ada.

Ada, Bu. Ada warung kecil di ___________ gedung.

O begitu. Kamu ___________ naik apa?

Naik sepeda, Bu, ___________ biasa.

Hah? Pasti kamu pulang __________ sepeda motor dengan Tanti.

O tidak, Bu. Tadi malam saya ___________ sekali. Saya pulang jam delapan naik sepeda.

Hmmm. ___________ kamu anak yang baik.

Latihan 4—Pemahaman Refer to the narrative to answer the following questions. 1. At what time the boy came home last night A. 6 B. 7 C. 8 D. 9

Lesson 37 2. What did the mother say to show her disbelief to her son A. “Jam berapa kamu pulang tadi malam” B. “O begitu.” C. “Aku tidak percaya.” D. “Kamu pergi ke mana tadi malam” 3. What did the son do at the sport hall A. He drank a lot of beer. B. He played badminton. C. He had a date with Tanti. D. He sold beverages in a small shop behind the sport hall. 4. Did the son drank alcohol last night A. He drank lots of alcohol. B. He drank alcohol but just a little. C. He did not drink any alcohol. D. He drank alcohol and milk. 5. How did the son feel after going back from the sport hall A. dizzy B. tired C. upset D. excited

Latihan 5—Matching: Pertanyaan dan Jawaban Dengarkan rekaman berikut dan pilih jawaban yang tepat.—Listen to Sound File 037-03 and choose the correct answer. 1.

a. Saya pulang naik sepeda motor.

2.

b. Di rumah teman.

3.

c. Saya minum bir dan anggur.

4.

d. Saya pulang jam sebelas.

5.

e. Saya pergi ke pesta dengan Arif.

6.

f. Saya ke pesta di rumah teman.

Latihan 6—Rangkai Kata Urutkan kata-kata berikut sehingga menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti: 1. “What time do you go jogging?” Anda—lari pagi?—berapa—Jam 2. “What time will your friend go to the night club?” pergi—berapa—teman—klab malam?—Jam—akan—ke—Anda 3. “What time does your boyfriend want to swim in the swimming pool?” berapa?—mau—kolam renang—jam—di—Pacar Anda—berenang

Lesson 37 4. “What time does your husband want to visit the University Student Center?” jam—berapa?—mau—ke—Pusat Mahasiswa—berkunjung—Suami Anda 5. “What time do you want to pray at the small mosque?” bersembahyang—musala?—Anda—di—mau—Jam—berapa

Latihan 7—Teka Teki Silang (TTS) Mendatar: 1. to say/do your prayers 3. roughly/approximately 4. to swim 7. apparently 8. milk 10. a party 12. to believe 14. a small streetside eatery 17. plans, a TV/radio program 18. you (informal) 19. or 20. the centre Menurun: 1. to take a break 2. to visit (a place) 5. to meet 6. to come/go home 9. only 11. all; all of them 13. tired 15. glass 16. defnitely

Lesson 38

38 Days Of The Week

Aims • To introduce and practise the names of the days of the week. • To practise determining a day, hour and place to meet.

Vocabulary Review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings. bagaimana kalau...

what about

ikut

to come along

berbicara

to speak

jam berapa

what time

bertemu

to meet

pulang

to go home

boleh

allowed to, may

tanggal

date

bulu tangkis

badminton

The Days of the Week These are the days of the week in Indonesian. Notice that the names of the days are frequently preceded by the “marker word” hari (day). Senin

Selasa

Rabu

Kamis

Jumat

Sabtu

Minggu

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Saturday

Sunday

Besok & Kemarin Kemarin dulu

Kemarin

Hari ini

Besok

Lusa

Senin, 3 Mei

Selasa, 4 Mei

Rabu, 5 Mei

Kamis, 6 Mei

Jumat, 7 Mei

Besok is ‘tomorrow’, kemarin is ‘yesterday’, lusa is ‘the day after tomorrow’ and kemarin dulu is ‘the day before yesterday’.

Lesson 38

Mohon Perhatian!! You will come across quite a few variations in the form and spelling of the names of days of the week. For example, the word for Friday is occasionally spelled Jum’at or Juma’at. Ahad is sometimes used for Sunday instead of hari Minggu. Wednesday is in Java often rendered as hari Rebo and Thursday as hari Kemis. The names of the days of the week (Ahad, Senin, Selasa, Rabu, Kamis, Jumat, Sabtu) are all derived from Arabic: Ahad = al-ahad, Senin = al-ithnayn, Rabu= al-arbi’aa’, Kamis = al-khamīs, Jumat= al-jum’ah, Sabtu= as-sabt. The frst fve days simply mean “the frst”, the second”, “the third” and so on. Al-jum’ah is the ‘day of gathering’ from the Arabic jum’ah ‘gather’ when Muslims gather in mosques for the Friday prayers. Assabt means ‘day of rest’ from sabt ‘to hibernate, to not do anything’. An exception is the alternative name for Sunday–hari Minggu– which comes from the Portuguese domingo. Bear in mind that minggu also means “a week”. Also, you might be interested to know that the word for Saturday, Sabtu, is derived from an ancient Semitic word that we have borrowed into English by way of Hebrew in the form of the word “Sabbath”. (Saturday is the seventh day of the week or the Sabbath day in the Semitic tradition.) If you want to ask what day it is you say: Hari apa hari ini? or Hari ini hari apa? What day is it today? You can also say: Hari apa kemarin? Kemarin hari apa? What day was it yesterday? Hari apa besok? Besok hari apa? What day is it tomorrow? You might answer these questions with sentences like these: Hari ini hari Minggu. Today is Sunday Kemarin hari Sabtu. Yesterday was Saturday. Kemarin dulu hari Jumat. The day before yesterday was Friday. Besok hari Senin. Tomorrow is Monday. Lusa hari Selasa. The day after tomorrow is Tuesday. You can also mention the date on which a certain day falls. Tanggal is the marker word that appears in front of a date when the date is expressed as a number in a month. So you can say: Senin tanggal tujuh Mei Monday the 7th of May

Lesson 38 Jumat tanggal delapan belas Juni Friday the 18th of June (There will be more practice of tanggal and the names of months in Module 4.) When you are talking about something that happened on a particular day or date, the day or date is usually (but not always) preceded by the preposition pada. Pada can correspond to many diferent English prepositions, but when it is used in front of dates and the names of days it is usually the same as the English “on”. pada hari Rabu on Wednesday pada hari Sabtu tanggal tiga belas on Saturday the 13th.

Cara Indonesia: The Confusing World of Calendars Even the humble calendar reveals something of Indonesia’s extraordinary diversity and its complex cultural history. Look at this page from an ordinary calendar which shows the month of May of the year 1997 C.E. You will notice that under the number representing each date in the month there is other information. You will fnd the name of the corresponding day in the Javanese fve day week (Kliwon, Legi, Pahing, Pon and Wage). To the left and right of this day is the date in the current Javanese month and the current month according to the Islamic of Hijri calendar. On the far right you will fnd the names of these months and the current year in the Javanese and Muslim chronologies. As May 1997 covers two Javanese months (Besar and Sura), and two Hijri months (Dzulhijjah and Muharram). Dzulhijjah, also spelled Dhu al-Ḥijjah is the twelfth and fnal month in theHijri calendar. Therefore 1 Muharraam A.H. is the frst day of the frst month of the Hijri calendar and 1 Muharram 1418 corresponds with 1 Sura 1929 in the Javanese calendar. As both the Hijri and the Javanese calendars are lunar calendars, their dates either correspond of difer by a day only. You can read more about this at http://www.kalenderjawa.com where the Hijri, Javanese, and Greorgian calendars are displayed next to each other. The last day of the month in the example below is Saturday 31 May 1997, or Sabtu tanggal tiga puluh satu Mei tahun seribu sembilan ratus sembilan puluh tujuh. The calendar shows that the same day is also Legi the twenty-fourth of Besar in the Javanese calendar, and Saturday (Sabtu) the ninth of Muharram in the Hijri calendar. As the world celebrated the arrival of a new millennium on 1 January 2000, an Indonesian calendar would have shown that in the Hijri era we were in the year 1420, in the Javanese calendar it was 1932, and in the Balinese calendar it was 1920. The Hijri calendar is widely used for religious purposes in Indonesia. It is based on cycles of the moon, not the sun as the European or Gregorian calendar is. The lunar year is shorter by some 11 days than a year in the international solar calendar. Islamic feast days, which are the most important holidays for most Indonesians, are celebrated according to the Hijri calendar, so the celebration of them shifts forward by (usually) 11 days each year in the international

Lesson 38 European/Gregorian calendar, slightly complicated by leap years in both calendar systems. Many millions of Javanese and Balinese also regularly consult their own Javanese and Balinese calendars, especially to keep track of market days and to regulate ritual life. There is much more to the Javanese and Balinese calendars (and their counterparts in other regional traditions) than introduced here. In fact there are ‘weeks’ numbering from two to ten days, the most important of which is the six-day week. Together, the fve-, six-, and seven-day weeks form a repeating cycle of 210 days (5x6x7), divided into 30 named weeks called wuku, that is used as the basis for numerological calculations important in determining when and where to schedule important events like weddings and other rites of passage, business trips, and other signifcant decisions in life. Most people know the day on which they were born as expressed in these three interlocked cycles, although fewer and fewer Indonesians depend on such calculations as time passes.

Making an Appointment Want to invite someone to do something with you? We have already studied how you can do this in Module 1 (Lesson 13) and in Lesson 33 in the current module. You will recall that you practised sentences like this. Apakah Anda mau makan dengan saya? Apakah Anda mau pergi dengan saya? Apakah Anda mau berbelanja dengan saya nanti malam jam tujuh? Apakah saya boleh bertemu dengan Anda nanti siang jam satu? Let’s now ring a few variations on these sentences. Study the two substitution tables below.

Apakah saya

boleh bisa dapat

berenang berbicara bekerja bermain tenis berbelanja berjalan-jalan bercakap-cakap bertemu belajar ikut makan

dengan Anda?

Lesson 38

Apakah Anda

boleh bisa mau dapat

berenang berbicara bekerja bermain tenis berbelanja berjalan-jalan bercakap-cakap bertemu belajar ikut makan

dengan saya?

You can accept invitations like these by echoing the key word in the question: Bisa, Dapat, Mau or Boleh (note that dapat is rarely used in spoken Indonesian). To reject the invitation it is best to avoid saying tidak mau. This can sound too blunt, even churlish and hostile. It is much better to preface your “no” answer with a polite Maaf and add saya tidak bisa. Practise generating sentences from the two tables using their words in various combinations. Try to memorise them. Keep saying sentences (imagining situations in which they might be spoken) until you can say them smoothly and unhesitatingly.

Exercise 38-01 Answer each of these invitations in the afrmative (“yes”) using an “echo-answer”, that is, echoing Bisa, Dapat, Mau or Boleh as appropriate. Then go on and answer the follow up questions. Try to introduce as much variation as possible into your answers to the follow-up questions. Study the example frst. Apakah Anda mau makan dengan saya? Mau. Hari apa? Hari Sabtu. Jam berapa? Jam setengah delapan malam. Di mana? Hmmmm. Di Restoran Kita di Jalan Hayam Wuruk. 1. Apakah Anda bisa bermain bulu tangkis dengan saya? Hari apa? ........................................................... Jam berapa? ........................................................... Di mana? ........................................................... 2. Apakah saya boleh belajar dengan Anda? Hari apa? ........................................................... Jam berapa? ........................................................... Di mana? ........................................................... 3. Apakah Anda bisa berjalan-jalan dengan saya? Hari apa? ........................................................... Jam berapa? ........................................................... Di mana? ...........................................................

Lesson 38 4. Apakah Anda mau makan dengan saya? Hari apa? ........................................................... Jam berapa? ........................................................... Di mana? ........................................................... 5. Apakah Anda mau berbelanja dengan saya? Hari apa? ........................................................... Jam berapa? ........................................................... Di mana? ........................................................... 6. Apakah saya bisa bertemu dengan Anda? Hari apa? ........................................................... Jam berapa? ........................................................... Di mana? ........................................................... 7. Apakah saya boleh berbicara dengan Anda? Hari apa? ........................................................... Jam berapa? ........................................................... Di mana? ........................................................... 8. Apakah saya boleh ikut dengan Anda? Hari apa? ........................................................... Jam berapa? ........................................................... Ke mana? ........................................................... 9. Apakah saya bisa ikut berenang dengan Anda? Hari apa? ........................................................... Jam berapa? ........................................................... Di mana? ...........................................................

Writing the Date (and the Time) Following the international standard ISO 8601 the correct way writing a date is 201011-14, and the correct way writing date and time is 2010-11-14 18:19. So far, only a few countries have ofcially adopted ISO 8601. Instead Indonesians use the dd-mm-yy convention which is used almost everywhere in the world. The USA is one of very few countries that still uses the mm-dd-yyy convention, and also the only country that still relies on the 12-hour clock even in ofcial publications.

Asking When? The questions Hari apa? and Jam berapa? are specifc questions and require specifc answers such as hari Selasa and jam delapan. A more unspecifc interrogative is kapan ‘when?’. Kapan kamu bisa datang? Besok. Kapan Pak Tobing datang dari Jakarta? Hari Sabtu. But remember that whenever you require a specifc answer, it is always better to ask tahun berapa?, bulan berapa?, tanggal berapa?, jam berapa?, or hari apa? You should also be aware that kapan is an interrogative and as such always followed by a question mark. It is NOT the same ‘when’ that we use in English in a sentences such as "when I was 10 years old...".

Lesson 38

Role Play: Finding a Suitable Day, Hour and Place With a classmate or with your teacher/tutor imagine that you have run into a friend. The two of you would like to fnd time to get together but you are both very busy and it is difcult to fnd a day, hour or place that suits you both. Here is the role play scenario in skeletal form. Your challenge is to follow this scenario putting plenty of conversational fesh on bare bones given below. • The two acquaintances run into each other. There are greetings and initial smalltalk... perhaps beginning with Anda mau ke mana? or Anda dari mana? • One speaker issues an invitation e.g. Apakah Anda mau.... or makes a request e.g. Apakah saya boleh.... • The other speaker asks for more details (Hari apa? Jam berapa? Di mana?) before rejecting the invitation/request e.g. Maaf, saya tidak bisa... or Maaf, Anda tidak boleh... and giving a reason or excuse e.g. Saya harus pergi ke.... • The frst speaker is persistent and asks “What about...” (Bagaimana kalau...) • This too is rejected (politely, of course) with reasons or excuses. • The frst speaker continues to be persistent, either asking again Bagaimana kalau... or issuing a new invitation or request. • Eventually the two friends agree on a suitable day, hour and place. The second speaker issues a “counter-invitation” or a request of his/her own, and the cycle of the role play begins again with diferent details, better correctness and smoother fuency. Potentially, this scenario can be repeated over and over. See how many cycles you can work through, building the conversation in each cycle around one of the main verbs we have studied to talk about everyday activities and leisure. Here is a list of most of them. berenang, berbicara, bekerja, bermain tenis, berbelanja, berjalan-jalan, bercakap-cakap, bertemu, belajar, ikut , makan, minum, berkunjung (ke...), bersembahyang, bersenam

Ucapan: Practice with /h/ between vowels Listen to Sound File 038-01. When /h/ appears between two vowels it can be clearly audible or scarcely audible at all, depending on the vowels that fank it. When /h/ occurs between two vowels that are the same it is breathed and is clearly audible. Practise audibly breathing the /h/ in these words. mahal bahasa

mahasiswa Pak Luhur

pohon Bu Solihin

But, if the /h/ occurs between two vowels that are diferent it is scarcely audible, in fact in the speech of many Indonesians, especially Javanese, it almost disappears altogether. Practise saying these words with a very light, almost non-existent, /h/ sound. tahu lahir

Suharti latihan

tahun melihat

Lesson 38

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. bagaimana kalau

badminton

ikut

how many hours

berbicara

date

jam berapa

to meet

bertemu

what if

pulang

to speak

boleh

to join in, follow

tanggal

may

bulu tangkis

to go home

berapa jam

what time

Latihan 2—Short Answers Answer in the afrmative, using: masih, boleh, mau, bisa, sudah 1. Apakah Anda mau makan dengan saya?

..................................

2. Apakah saya boleh bertemu dengan Anda nanti siang jam satu?

..................................

3. Apakah saya bisa berjalan-jalan dengan Anda?

..................................

4. Apakah Anda masih mau makan dengan saya?

..................................

5. Apakah Anda sudah makan?

..................................

Latihan 3—Hari, Jam dan Tempat Lengkapi teks berikut dengan memilih kata yang tepat: besok—jam berapa—jam enam— jauh—ke mana—malam ini—nanti—sekarang Tigor

Apa kabar?

Hotma

Kabar baik.

Tigor

Kamu mau ____________?

Hotma

Tidak ke mana-mana.

Tigor

Apakah kamu mau makan dengan saya?

Hotma

____________Di mana?

Tigor

____________. Kita bisa pergi ke warung dekat rumah saya.

Hotma

Maaf, saya tidak bisa karena harus bekerja. Rumah Anda ____________ dari tempat kerja saya.

Tigor

Bagaimana kalau kita (“we”) makan ____________?

Hotma

Maaf, saya tidak bisa. Saya harus membantu ibu masak

Lesson 38 Tigor

Bagaimana kalau ____________ kita makan pagi?

Hotma

Maaf, saya tidak bisa...tapi kamu bisa makan malam dengan keluarga saya ____________.

Tigor

Suka sekali! Jam berapa saya bisa datang?

Hotma

Kira-kira jam enam.

Tigor

Sampai jumpa ____________ malam!

Hotma

Sampai jumpa!

Latihan 4—Pemahaman Jawablah pertanyaan-pertanyaan berikut sesuai dengan bacaan.—Refer to the narrative to answer the following questions. 1. Hotma says he is going nowhere. How does he say “nowhere”?

...................................

2. Hotma cannot go to the small restaurant close to Tigor’s house because: A. he has to work B. he doesn’t like the food there C. he has to study D. the distance is too far to get to work in time 3. At 18:00 Hotma has to: A. work B. study C. help his mother cook D. eat dinner with his family 4. Tigor replies to Hotma’s invitation to have dinner tonight saying that he: A. really likes the idea and can come B. likes the idea but has other commitments C. he can only make it at six o’clock D. can’t make it 5. Hotma invites Tigor for dinner at: A. 06:00 B. 12:00 C. 16:00 D. 18:00 6. What phrase do they use for “see you later”?

.....................................................

Lesson 38

Latihan 5—Nama Hari Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. Monday

hari Sabtu

Friday

hari Kamis

Tuesday

hari Minggu

Saturday

hari Selasa

Wednesday

hari Jumat

Sunday

hari Rabu

Thursday

hari Senin

Latihan 6—Menjodohkan Jodohkan kalimat di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1. What day is it today?

a. Besok hari apa?

2. Today is Sunday

b. Besok hari Senin.

3. What day was it yesterday?

c. Hari apa hari ini?

4. Yesterday was Saturday

d. Hari apa kemarin?

5. What day is it tomorrow?

e. Hari ini hari Minggu.

6. Tomorrow is Monday.

f. Kemarin dulu hari apa?

7. What day is the day after tomorrow?

g. Kemarin hari Sabtu.

8. What day is the day before yesterday?

h. Lusa hari apa?

Latihan 7—Kuis 1. Kalau hari ini Hari Kamis, kemarin hari apa? A. Hari Minggu B. Hari Selasa C. Hari Sabtu D. Hari Rabu 2. Kalau hari ini hari Senin, besok hari apa? A. Hari Minggu B. Hari Selasa C. Hari Sabtu D. Hari Rabu 3. Ada berapa hari dalam satu minggu? A. empat hari B. enam hari C. tujuh hari D. sepuluh hari

Lesson 38 4. Kemarin hari Jumat. Lusa hari apa? A. Hari Minggu B. Hari Senin C. Hari Selasa D. Hari Rabu 5. Which word is sometimes used for Sunday instead of “hari Minggu”? A. hari Jumat B. Ahad C. hari Selasa D. hari Senin

Latihan 8—Pilihan Ganda Refer to the calendar to answer the following questions. 1. Tanggal dua puluh satu hari apa? A. hari Rabu B. hari Selasa C. hari Senin D. hari Minggu 2. Kalau hari ini tanggal dua belas, besok hari apa? A. hari Selasa B. hari Rabu C. hari Sabtu D. hari Jumat 3. Hari apa tanggal dua? A. hari Kamis B. hari Jumat C. hari Sabtu D. hari Minggu 4. Apakah tanggal tiga belas hari Selasa atau hari Rabu? A. hari Selasa B. hari Rabu 5. Hari apa tanggal dua puluh lima? A. hari Minggu B. hari Senin C. hari Selasa D. hari Rabu 6. Kalau besok tanggal sembilan, hari ini hari apa? A. hari Kamis B. hari Jumat

Lesson 38

Latihan 9—Menjodohkan Match the 12 phrases of Sound File 038-02 to their translations on the right. Note that there are two ways of saying “Saturday night”! a. last Friday

b. Saturday night

c. last Sunday

d. the day after tomorrow

e. Monday night

f. the day before yesterday

g. next Thursday

1

h. tomorrow morning

i. next Tuesday

j. Wednesday morning

k. Saturday night

l. yesterday (early) afternoon

Latihan 10—Rangkai Kata Urutkan kata-kata berikut menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti: 1. “Monday the 7th of May.” Hari—Senin—tujuh—tanggal—Mei. 2. “Friday the 18th of June.” Hari—tanggal—Jumat—belas—delapan—Juni. 3. “If today is Monday, what day is tomorrow?” Kalau—hari—hari—hari—besok—ini—Senin,—apa? 4. “If tomorrow is Wednesday, what day is today?” Kalau—Rabu,—hari—besok—apa—hari—hari—ini? 5. “Do you want to go shopping with me later tonight at seven?” Apakah—nanti—Anda—mau berbelanja—saya—malam—dengan—jam tujuh?

Lesson 38

Latihan 11—Teka Teki Silang (TTS) Mendatar: 1. to meet 3. to swim 4. to study 5. Thursday 6. Monday 7. to work 9. Wednesday 10. Friday 13. Saturday 14. Tuesday 15. to pray 16. to play Menurun: 1. to go shopping 2. yesterday 4. tomorrow 7. to speak 8. day after tomorrow 11. Sunday 12. such-and-such a date

Lesson 39

39 Membeli Tiket Pesawat

Aims • To practise telling the time in colloquial and formal Indonesian.

Vocabulary Review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings.

Tiket Elektronik © Uli Kozok

bantu

to help

lewat

more, past

berangkat

to depart

murah

cheap

berapa lama

how long

oh begitu

I see

boleh

may

penuh

full

jam berapa

what time

pesawat terbang

airplane

kapan

when

perusahaan

company

kira-kira

approximately

saja

only

kurang

less, before, to (time)

setengah

a half

lalu

then, ago

seperempat

one fourth

Answer the following questions based on your personal experience or information that you heard concerning Indonesian airlines. If you don't know the answer, just guess! ✗

Apakah Anda pernah naik pesawat terbang di Indonesia? Kapan? Di mana?

✗

Penerbangan (airline) apa saja yang ada di Indonesia?

✗

Menurut Anda, bagaimana perusahaan penerbangan di Indonesia?

✗

Apakah pesawat terbang di Indonesia sudah tua atau masih baru?

Read the following text AFTER you have answered all questions.

Lesson 39

Air Transport in Indonesia Indonesia’s transport system has been shaped over time by the economic resource base of an archipelago with thousands of islands, and the distribution of its more than 200 million people highly concentrated on a single island, Java, where about 40% of all Indonesians live. Indonesia has a fairly modern air transport system linking most of the larger towns to Jakarta. While Jakarta is still the most important hub for national and international fights, other airports are increasingly expending their international connections. One of the major international airlines serving Indonesia is the Malaysian company Air Asia that has daily fights from Kuala Lumpur to Banda Aceh, Bandung, Denpasar, Jakarta, Makassar, Medan, Padang, Pekanbaru, Solo, Surabaya, and Yogyakarta. The largest domestic airline is state-owned Garuda Indonesia with 87 aircraft (45 on order) serving 51 destinations. One of the largest domestic companies is Lion Air which has recently rejuvenated its feet of 59 aircrafts with another 139 on order, and which now operates more than 200 daily fights to 36 destinations. After some major aviation accidents airlines have started to modernise their aging feets. The small Mandala Airlines now has a very modern feet of only 5.6 years and the average age of Lion Air’s feet is 5 years, which compares well to international carriers (Emirates 6.1, Singapore Airlines 6.9 years, Qantas 9.8 years, United Airlines 13.6 years, American Airlines 14.3, Delta 17.1 years). Figures are for October 2013.

More on “lebih” and “yang” The meaning of lebih is “more, -er (when you are comparing qualities or quantities)”: lebih besar

bigger

lebih bagus

better

lebih mahal

more expensive

lebih terkenal

more famous

lebih tua

older

lebih keras

harder, more solid

lebih luas

broader

lebih sulit

more difcult

If you ask a question comparing two persons, you use the interrogative siapa “who”: Siapa lebih tua? Pak Hakim atau Pak Imran? Who is older? Mr. Hakim or Mr. Imran? and the answer would be: Pak Hakim lebih tua daripada Pak Imran. Mr. Hakim is older than Mr. Imran. It is quite common to place “yang” after siapa and before an adjective or before lebih + adjective: Siapa yang lebih tua? Pak Hakim atau Pak Imran? Who is (the one that is) older? Mr. Hakim or Mr. Imran? and the answer would be: Pak Hakim yang lebih tua. Pak Hakim is the older one.

Lesson 39 If you ask a question comparing two things, you use the interrogative yang mana “which (out of a known set)”: Yang mana lebih mahal? Honda City atau Toyota Corolla? Which one is more expensive? The Honda City or the Toyota Corolla? and the answer would be: Toyota Corolla lebih mahal daripada Honda City. The Toyota Corolla is more expensive than the Honda City. It is quite common to add “yang” before the adjective or before lebih + adjective: Yang mana yang lebih mahal? Honda City atau Toyota Corolla? Which one (is the one that) is more expensive? The Honda City or the Toyota Corolla? and the answer would be: Toyota Corolla lebih mahal . The Toyota Corolla is more expensive.

Yang paling Superlative phrases are formed by placing noun + yang paling ‘most’ before the adjective: Gedung yang paling tinggi The tallest building. Tiket yang paling mahal. The most expensive ticket.

Dialogue Listen to Sound File 039-01 between Ibu Melati and Ibu Ainun (a ticket attendant). Ibu Melati tinggal di Semarang, tetapi adiknya tinggal di Jakarta. Ibu Melati mau naik pesawat ke Jakarta. Di dekat rumahnya ada agen perjalanan.

Ibu Ainun

Selamat siang, Bu.

Selamat siang.

Silakan duduk, Bu. Bisa saya bantu?

Saya mau ke Jakarta.

Oh begitu. Dari Semarang ke Jakarta, ya? Kapan Ibu mau berangkat?

Hari Sabtu, Bu. Sore. Eh, berapa lama penerbangannya?

Kira-kira satu jam.

Berapa harga tiketnya?

Kalau Garuda, lima ratus ribu Rupiah.

Apakah ada yang lebih murah?

Ada. Sriwijaya dan Mandala.

Yang mana yang paling murah?

Yang paling murah Mandala, tetapi Sabtu sudah penuh. Bagaimana kalau Jumat?

Jumat juga boleh. Jam berapa?

Hari Jumat Mandala berangkat jam lima belas lewat empat puluh dengan nomor penerbangan RI 293.

Lalu berapa harganya?

Ibu Melati

Lesson 39 Tiga ratus tujuh puluh ribu Rupiah. Untuk berapa orang, Bu?

Satu saja. Nama saya Melati.

Baiklah Now check your understanding of this dialogue by doing Latihan 2 and 3. Always consult a good dictionary or the vocabulary cards whenever you stumble upon difcult words.

Question Word Plus “Saja” Imagine you have a friend who just returned from Indonesia. You know that he went to Indonesia, but you want to know what places he has visited. When we ask that person “Where did you go to?” the answer can be unspecifc, such as “I visited many places in Java and Sumatra” When we want the answer to be more specifc, we can modify the question slightly: “Where all did you go to?” and then the answer is likely to be more specifc: “I went to Jakarta, Bandung and Medan.” In Indonesian, when we want the answer to contain more than one thing we use a question word followed by saja. Penerbangan apa saja yang ada di Indonesia? What airlines are there in Indonesia? Here, the answer expected is not only “banyak”, but should be more specifc. For instance: Banyak penerbangan ada di Indonesia, ada Merpati, Garuda, Sriwijaya Air, dan banyak lagi. More examples with question word plus saja: Siapa saja yang datang? Who (all) came? Kamu ke mana saja tadi? What places did you visit today? Apa saja yang kamu beli di pasar? What things did you buy at the market? Buku apa saja yang harus kita baca? What books do we have to read? In case you noticed that the two last sentences sound a bit unfamiliar, they are of the same type as Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan? in Lesson 35. What we said there also applies here: For the moment, don’t worry about the grammatical rationale for the order of words or the form of the verbs beli (buy) and baca (read). But if you really need to fnd out now, look at Lesson 46 and 93 where Passive Type II is explained.

Lesson 39

Jam Berapa?—Telling the Time in Indonesian The 24-hour clock is a convention of time keeping in which the day runs from midnight to midnight and is divided into 24 hours, indicated by the hours passed since midnight, from 0 to 23. This system is the most commonly used time notation in the world today. There are only a handful of countries that still use the 12-hour clock, and the only remaining country in the world that uses the 12-hour clock for ofcial purposes is the USA. In Indonesia, the time is often followed by a reference to the time zone, i.e. WIB (Waktu Indonesia Barat), WITA (Waktu Indonesia Tengah), and WIT (Waktu Indonesia Timur). Indonesia Western Time is seven hours in advance (UTC+7) of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), Indonesia Central Time is eight hours ahead, and Indonesia Eastern Time is nine hours ahead of GMT. In formal Indonesian the time is pronounced as Jam ___ lewat ___ menit. In formal Indonesian it is also common to use pukul instead of jam. Note that a dot is typically used as the hour-minute separator: 08.25

Jam delapan lewat dua puluh lima menit

09.15

Jam sembilan lewat lima belas menit

10.55

Pukul sepuluh lewat lima puluh lima menit

16.30

Pukul enam belas lewat tiga puluh menit

23.36

Pukul dua puluh tiga lewat tiga puluh enam menit However, in colloquial speech 16:00 is usually referred to as jam empat, or jam empat sore if this is not evident from the context. While 16:30 is jam enam belas lewat tiga puluh menit, in colloquial speech it is rendered as setengah lima. A quarter to and a quarter past are indicated by kurang seperempat and lewat seperempat. The times 20, 25, 35, and 40 minutes after the hour use the 30 minutes (setengah...) as the point of reference: setengah sembilan kurang lima setengah dua belas lewat sepuluh setengah lima lewat lima Look at the poster to the left to see how the time is shown in the proper format. Pkl. is the abbreviated form of pukul: Senin, 22 September 2014, Pkl. 08.30 WIB which is Monday, 22 September 2014 at 08.30 a.m. https://pbs.twimg.com/media/BxzxiLOIMAAUBYP.jpg:large

Lesson 39

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu 1 Jodohkan kata di kolom sebelah kiri dengan artinya di kolom sebelah kanan. jam berapa

cheap

kapan

approximately

bantu

I see

kira-kira

to depart

berangkat

less, to (time)

kurang

what time

boleh

a half

lalu

to help

lewat

past

perusahaan

may

murah

then, ago

setengah

a quarter

oh begitu

when

seperempat

company

Latihan 2—Pemahaman Listen to Sound File 039-01 while answering the following questions. 1. What does Mrs. Melati’s want to do at the travel agency? A. She wants to book a fight to Semarang. B. She wants to enquire about available fights, but she doesn’t want to book. C. She books a fight to Jakarta. 2. Does Ibu Melati know how long the fight is? A. Yes B. No 3. The travel agent indicates that the fight takes about an hour. How does she say “about, approximately”? .............................................................. 4. How much does the Garuda ticket costs? (write in digits)

........................................

5. The Mandala fight is cheaper than the Sriwijaya fight. A. Correct B. False 6. Ibu Melati inquires whether there are cheaper fights. What word or phrase does she use for “cheaper”? ......................................................................... 7. Ibu Melati also wants to know what the cheapest fight is. How does she say the cheapest? ......................................................................................... 8. What’s wrong with the Mandala fight on Saturday? A. It is too expensive. B. It is too early. C. It takes too long. D. It’s booked out.

Lesson 39 9. So fnally she books a fight on A. Monday B. Wednesday C. Friday D. Saturday 10. The fnal purchase price is... A. 730,000 B. 307,000 C. 370,000 D. 300,700

Latihan 3—Isian Listen to Sound File 039-01 again and fll in the gaps.

Ibu Ainun

Selamat siang, Bu.

Selamat siang.

Silakan duduk, Bu. Bisa saya ______?

Saya mau ke Jakarta.

Oh begitu. Dari Semarang ke Jakarta, ya? Kapan Ibu mau __________?

Hari __________, Bu. Sore. Eh, berapa lama penerbangannya?

Kira-kira satu jam.

__________ harga tiketnya?

Kalau Garuda, 500.000 Rupiah.

Apakah ada yang lebih __________?

Ada. Sriwijaya dan Mandala.

Yang __________ yang paling murah?

Yang paling murah Mandala, tetapi Sabtu sudah _______. Bagaimana kalau Jumat?

Jumat juga __________. Jam berapa?

Hari Jumat Mandala _______ jam 15.40 dengan nomor penerbangan RI 293.

Lalu berapa harganya?

370.000 Rupiah. Untuk berapa orang, Bu?

Satu __________. Nama saya Melati.

Baiklah

Latihan 4—Bertanya Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1. berapa jam?

a. which one?

2. apakah ada?

b. are there?

3. berapa lama?

c. how much does it cost?

4. kapan?

d. how many hours?

5. jam berapa?

e. when?

6. bagaimana kalau?

f. what about?

Ibu Melati

Lesson 39 7. berapa?

g. how many/much?

8. berapa harganya?

h. at what time?

9. yang mana?

i. how long?

Latihan 5—Menjodohkan Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1. Yang paling bagus ini.

a. What about Saturday?

2. Kalau ini, bagaimana?

b. Can I help you?

3. Bagaimana kalau hari Sabtu?

c. Which one is the cheapest?

4. Yang mana yang paling murah?

d. Saturday is fne, too.

5. Apakah ada yang lebih murah?

e. Is there a cheaper one?

6. Hari Sabtu juga boleh.

f. This is the best one.

7. Bisa saya bantu?

g. What about this? How is it?

Latihan 6—Pilihan Ganda : Angka Write the number in numerals according to the convention used in Indonesia. 1. How do you write the number “tiga ratus lima puluh ribu”? A. 350.000 B. 350,000 2. “seratus delapan puluh ribu” (in digits)

..................................................................

3. “lima puluh dua ribu”

..................................................................

4. “empat ribu delapan ratus”

..................................................................

5. “seribu tiga ratus”

..................................................................

6. “lima belas ribu tujuh ratus”

..................................................................

7. “empat ratus enam puluh sembilan ribu”

..................................................................

Latihan 7—Telling the Time in Colloquial Indonesian Look at the Semarang Airport Flight Schedule (Jadwal Penerbangan) and write the times as they would be spoken in colloquial Indonesian. Example: GA 247 berangkat ke Jakarta jam setengah delapan kurang sepuluh

Lesson 39 1. GA244 datang dari Jakarta jam A. delapan belas lewat empat puluh B. setengah tujuh lewat sepuluh 2. GA230 datang dari Jakarta jam ................................................ ................................................ 3. GA232 datang dari Jakarta jam ................................................ ................................................ 4. GA235 tiba di Jakarta jam ................................................ 5. TGN 126 berangkat ke Pangkalanbun jam ................................................ 6. GA 238 datang dari Jakarta jam ................................................ ................................................

Latihan 8—Rangkai Kata Urutkan kata-kata berikut ini menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti: 1. “Is there a cheaper one?” Apakah—lebih—ada—yang— murah?

Jadwal Penerbangan BANDARA AHMAD YANI SEMARANG Telp. Informasi Bandara: (024) 7608735 No. Pnb (Hari)

Berangk at

Tiba

No Pnb (Hari)

Datan g

GARUDA Ke Jakarta

Dari Jakarta

GA 231 (Setiap hari)

06.00

07.00

GA 230 (Setiap hari)

07.05

GA 233 (Setiap hari)

07.40

08.40

GA 232 (Setiap hari)

08.40

GA 235 (Setiap hari)

09.20

10.20

GA 234 (Setiap hari)

10.20

GA 237 (Setiap hari)

11.00

12.00

GA 236 (Setiap hari)

12.00

GA 239 (Setiap hari)

12.40

13.40

GA 238 (Setiap hari)

13.40

GA 241 (Setiap hari)

14.20

15.20

GA 240 (Setiap hari)

15.20

GA 243 (Setiap hari)

16.00

17.00

GA 242 (Setiap hari)

17.00

GA 245 (Setiap hari)

17.40

18.40

GA 244 (Setiap hari)

18.40

GA 247 (Setiap hari)

19.20

20.20

GA 246 (Setiap hari)

20.00

KALSTAR TRIGANA AIR Ke Pangkalanbun TGN 126 (Setiap hari)

Dari Pangkalanbun 12.45

14.32

TGN 125 (Setiap hari)

2. “Mandala is the cheapest, but Saturday they’re sold out.” Yang—Mandala,—sudah—murah—paling—Sabtu—tetapi—penuh. 3. “How long does the fight take to Yogyakarta?” Berapa—ke—penerbangan—lama—Yogyakarta? 4. “The fight to Palembang is already full on Saturday.” Hari—sudah—Sabtu—Palembang—penerbangan—ke—penuh. 5. “May I ask for the ticket price to Denpasar?” Boleh—ke—harga—saya—tiket—minta—Denpasar?

12.02

Lesson 39

Latihan 9—Teka Teki Silang (TTS) Mendatar: 2. can, may, it’s okay 3. just, only 5. schedule 6. hour, clock, o’clock 8. how? 10. according to 12. price 15. fight 16. cheap Menurun: 1. when? 2. how many, how much? 3. late afternoon 4. long (of time) 7. ticket 8. to depart 9. full 11. but 13. to help 14. also

Lesson 40

40 Verbs With The Me- Prefx

Aims • To introduce and practise some common verbs with the meN- prefx. • To give further practice with sedang.

Vocabulary Review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings. anjing

a dog

kemarin

yesterday

besok

tomorrow

keterangan

information

burung

a bird

lakukan

to do something

dapur

a kitchen

masak

to cook

dinding

an interior wall

pakaian

clothing

halaman

a yard

membantu

to help

Rambu di Jalan Raya Bahasa Many words in Indonesian consist of a base word to which afxes are attached. An afx is a syllable that cannot stand on its own as a free-standing word but is always attached to a “mother-word”, called a base word. When it is attached to the front end of a base word it is called a prefx, and when attached to the rear end it is called a sufx. A combination of a prefx and sufx that always appears together “straddling” a base word is called a circumfx. Although it can’t stand on its own, an afx – whether a prefx, suffx or circumfx – usually has a consistent meaning or a consistent grammatical function. We have afxation in English. Take, for example, the word “comfort”. You can regard “comfort” as a base word and you can attach the sufx “-able” to it forming the derived word “comfortable”. Or you can attach the prefx “dis-” to the base, producing the word “discomfort”. You can also attach a prefx and a sufx to the base at the same time, producing, for example, the word “uncomfortable”. Base words are usually “naked” words without afxes attached to them. In Indonesian base words usually consist of two syllables, like makan, minum, buah, warna, tinggal, tanya, bantu etc.

Lesson 40 A few – mostly foreign borrowings – may consist of three syllables, like pustaka (from Sanskrit) and sekolah (Portuguese) or just one syllable like hak (Arabic). Prefxes and sufxes can be attached to these to form derived words, i.e. words that have afxes in them. You have met some derived words already. For example, makan (to eat) gives us makanan (food). Here makan is the base word, -an is a sufx, and makanan is the derived word. Here are a few more examples you have already met in previous lessons. sekolah school

bersekolah to go to school

tinggal to stay

meninggal to die, to pass away

minum to drink

minuman a drink, a beverage

buah fruit

buah-buahan a variety of fruits

bertanya (from •tanya) to ask a question

pertanyaan a question

membantu (from •bantu) to help

pembantu an assistant, a household servant

These examples show, among other things, that the attachment of an afx can sometimes change the function of a word: a verb may become a noun (makan becomes makanan), a noun may become a verb (sekolah becomes bersekolah) or there may be no change in function. Sometimes the attachment of an afx can produce a radically diferent (though usually related) meaning, as you can see in the case of tinggal and meninggal. The two most common verbal prefxes in Indonesian are ber- and meN-. Verbs with a ber- prefx are usually intransitive, that is, they are like the English “he died”. You cannot “die” someone else – dying is something done by the “doer” of the action. That’s why the verb is called “intransitive” – it doesn’t transmit or infict its action on to anyone or anything else. An Indonesian verb with a ber- prefx is like this. The action expressed in the verb happens to the doer of the action expressed in the verb, not to anyone or anything else. Take, for example, the sentence Mereka sedang bersenam (They are doing gymnastics). Here the action of doing gymnastics is being done by the subject of the verb (mereka) – you cannot “gymnastic” someone else. The prefx meN- on the other hand usually (but far from always!) signals that the verb it is attached to is transitive, that is, the action expressed in the verb is being inficted on someone or something else. Take, for example, the sentence Pak Mitra membuka pintu (Mr Mitra opened the door). Here Mr Mitra is inficting the action of opening on to the door, so the verb is transitive and it takes a meN- prefx. As the ber- and me- prefxes attach themselves to a base word, there is often a variation in form of the prefx and/or the front end of the base word in order to produce a “seamless” new word, i.e. one that is smoothly integrated and easily pronounceable. For example, in the verb bekerja (to work), the base-word is kerja. To facilitate pronunciation, the /r/ is dropped from the ber- prefx. You never fnd *berkerja. Belajar is formed from the base word ajar with a ber- prefx, but to make the derived form roll more smoothly of the tongue the ber- is modifed slightly to bel-.

Lesson 40 Similarly with the me- prefx. The baseword tinggal merges with the me- prefx to produce the “blended” word meninggal. The prefx me- is likewise “glued” to the basewords bantu and buka with the nasal sound /m/ to produce the transitive verbs membantu and membuka. This process of modifying the prefx and/or base word so that they ft together smoothly is called assimilation. The prefx meN- “assimilates” to base words in quite complex ways, depending on the initial sound in each base word. Because the rules for the assimilation of the meN- prefx are complex, we won’t cover them explicitly until Module Five of The Indonesian Way. In the meantime just learn the forms of meN- verbs “as they come”. It is important to get a feel for the process of afxation in general, and for the distinction between base word and prefx in particular. One reason why this is important is that the entries in most dictionaries of the Indonesian language are arranged in alphabetical order of the base words. This means that if you meet the word bersekolah, for example, and try to look it up in a dictionary under “b” you won’t fnd it. You will have to look it up under “s” for sekolah. Similarly, when you frst see meninggal (or any of the many thousands of words like it) you can’t immediately see that the base word is tinggal. You won’t fnd meninggal listed under “m” in most dictionaries, so you need to know what the base-word is if you are to fnd it up in a dictionary. (George Quinn’s Learner’s Dictionary of Today’s Indonesian is an exception to this convention. All the main entries in this dictionary are arranged according to the frst letter of each word, irrespective of whether it is a base-word or not.)

Introducing Verbs with the Me- Prefx In previous lessons you have practised using a number of verbs with the ber- prefx: berasal, berbelanja, berbicara, bercakap-cakap, berdiri, berenang, beristirahat, berjalan, berjalan-jalan, berkunjung (ke...), berlari, bermain, bersekolah, bersembahyang, bersenam, bertanya, bertemu, berumur..., berwarna..., bekerja and belajar. Check that you remember the meanings of each of them. A few meN- (the capital N denotes the added nasal) prefx verbs have also popped up: melihat (to see something, to look at something), memanggil (to call out to someone, to summon someone), membantu (to help someone, to assist someone), membuka (to open something), mempunyai (to have something, to own something). You will notice that they all have an object, that is a person or thing that each verb governs, or impinges on, or “inficts” itself on. You will learn more about the prefx meN- later on. For the time being it is sufcient to simply memorise the most common changes that occur when the prefx meN- is added to a base word: meN- becomes me- when the root word begins with l, m, r, y meN- becomes men- when the root word begins with c, j, d and t meN- becomes mem- when the root word begins with b, p meN- becomes meng- when the root word begins with a vowel, h, or g, k meN- becomes meny- when the root word begins with s Note that initial s as well as the three voiceless plosives p, t, and k are dropped when the prefx meN- is added. (Bases beginning with f, n, q, v, w, x, z, are rare or non-existing, and hence not included) Lets look at some more meN- verbs. Study the examples below. Ayah membaca surat kabar di ruang keluarga. Father is reading the newspaper in the living room.

Lesson 40 Johannes mencuci pakaiannya di kamar mandi. Johannes is washing his clothes in the laundry (bathroom). Kakak mendengarkan radio di kamar tidurnya. Elder sister is listening to the radio in her bedroom. Nia membersihkan dapur. Nia cleaned the kitchen. Magdalena menulis novel. Magdalena is writing a novel. Mereka menonton televisi di ruang keluarga. They are watching television in the living room. Hendro menyapu ruang makan. Hendro sweeps the dining room. The previous, and also the following sentences, were translated either in present or past tense. But bear in mind that the Indonesian language does not explicitly indicate tense nor plurality, and hence each of the sentences could be translated diferently, e.g. Magdalena menulis novel could also be translated as “Magdalena writes novels” or “Magdalena is writing a novel”. Study these examples: Kemarin ayah membaca surat kabar di ruang keluarga. Yesterday, father read the newspaper in the sitting room. Apakah Johannes mencuci pakaiannya di kamar mandi nanti? Is Johannes going to be washing his clothes in the laundry later today? Tadi kakak mendengarkan radio di kamar tidurnya. [My] (older) sister just listened to the radio in her bedroom. Besok Nia membersihkan dapur. Tomorrow, Nia is going to clean the kitchen. Magdalena menulis novel. Magdalena wrote a novel. Mereka menonton televisi di ruang keluarga kemarin malam. Yesterday night they watched television in the living room.

Sedang apa? /Ngapain? If you want to ask about what someone is doing right at this moment you can use the phrase sedang apa? which means something like “in the middle of (doing) what?” Ibu Suratminingsih sedang apa? Ibu Suratminingsih sedang mencuci piring. What is Mrs. Suratminingsih doing? Mrs. Suratminingsih is washing the dishes. The word sedang is hence similar to the gerund in English. In colloquial Indonesian lagi is commonly used instead of sedang and apa is replaced by ngapain, resulting in the phrase: Lagi ngapain?

Lesson 40 In colloquial Indonesian, the prefx meN- is usually dropped while the nasalisation is retained resulting in nulis instead of menulis, mbaca instead of membaca etc. Verbal roots beginning with the letter c, however, change to ny: mencuci becomes nyuci. You should also be aware that many speakers of Indonesian, especially from Jakarta, but often also from other places in Java, change the a-sound in fnal closed syllables to a weak e: datang is hence pronounced dateng, and teman is often pronounced temen. However, this change does not occur regularly, and hence it is not necessary for you to learn these words. It is completely sufcient if you are aware that a in fnal closed syllables often becomes e as you can hear in the examples below. Study these examples: FORMAL Sedang apa? What are you doing right now? Saya sedang menulis surat kepada teman saya. I’m writing a letter to my friend. Sisilia sedang apa sekarang? What’s Sisilia doing at the moment? Dia sedang mencuci piring di belakang. She’s washing dishes out the back. INFORMAL Lagi ngapain? What are you doing right now? Aku lagi nulis surat ke temanku. I’m writing a letter to my friend. Sisilia lagi ngapain? What’s Sisilia doing at the moment? Dia lagi nyuci piring di belakang. She’s washing dishes out the back. Practise making up questions and answers from the substitutional table below. If you can , make additions of your own to the columns on the right of the verb. Notice that when you ask a question that has sedang in it, in the answer you can say sedang followed by a verb, but you don’t have to repeat the word sedang and sedang can’t stand on its own in an answer. 1. Ibu Ayah

sedang apa?

Matius

Dia (sedang) membaca

majalah

kamar tidur.

surat kabar

ruang keluarga.

novel

di dapur.

buku

kebun.

surat

perpustakaan.

Lesson 40 2. Nuning Suratmi Farida

sedang apa?

Hamid Adam di belakang rumah. piring

di dapur.

----------------------------------------------------Dia (sedang) mencuci

pakaian

di halaman belakang.

----------------------------------------------------mobil

di garasi. di depan rumah.

3. Anak Anda Kakak Anda Teman Anda

sedang apa?

Adik Anda kota flm

di bioskop

---------------------------------------------------rumah Dia (sedang) menonton

televisi

di ruang keluarga rumah temannya

---------------------------------------------------tenis

di universitas gedung olahraga

4. Isteri Anda Suami Anda

sedang apa?

Pacar Anda

Dia (sedang) mendengarkan

radio

halaman belakang.

musik

di kebun.

burung-burung

samping rumah.

Lesson 40 5. Tutu dan Frans Endang dan Lina

sedang apa?

Ayah dan Ibu halaman depan. garasi. ruang keluarga. Mereka (sedang) membersihkan

dinding dapur. mobil. lemari es.

6. Anda sedang apa? keterangan tentang keluarga saya. Saya (sedang) menulis

buku. surat kepada pacar saya.

Si Ratna lagi ngapain, sih? In Lesson 35 you learned the word lakukan ‘to do’ as part of the phrase: Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan... “What do you usually do...?” Instead of sedang apa we can, of course, use the passive verb lakukan/dilakukan: Ibu Ningsih sedang apa? Si Salimin sedang apa? Kamu sedang apa?

Apa yang sedang dilakukan Ibu Ningsih? Apa yang sedang dilakukan Salimin? Apa yang sedang kamu lakukan?

With second person pronouns (kamu, Anda etc) you have to use the passive form lakukan (passive type II), and not the passive type I form dilakukan, but we will explain that later in detail. For the time being it is sufcient that you know that you have the choice of using either a more formal construction with lakukan or the more relaxed, yet still formal, variant with sedang apa. However, in more slangy colloquial Indonesian it is far more common to use the Jakarta variant lagi ngapain instead of sedang apa. Lagi is the colloquial variant for sedang, and ngapain is based on apa with the Jakarta prefx ng- and sufx -in. Ngapain means: “what (is/are) (you/he/she) doing?” So, lagi ngapain means “what are you doing right now?” Ibu Ningsih sedang apa? Si Salimin sedang apa? Kamu sedang apa?

Ibu Ningsih lagi ngapain? Lagi ngapain Si Salimin? Lagi ngapain kamu?

Feel free to add sih at the end of the question to give it more pep: Si Salimin lagi ngapain sih?

Lesson 40 Note the particle Si in front of the name Salimin. Si is not part of the name but rather a kind of article that is often attached to names, preferably in colloquial speach and when refering to younger people. It is actually the same si that distinguishes apa from siapa!

Ucapan: Practice with /h/ before a consonant You have practised audibly breathing the /h/ sound when it occurs at the end of a word e.g. in words like sekolah, rumah, murah, putih etc. The /h/ sound is, in fact, always breathed at the end of any syllable, even when that syllable is in the middle of a word and is followed by a con sonant. Practise saying the words from below (Sound File 040-01), breathing the /h/ sound. (In the pronunciation help here, the /h/ is reduplicated and underlined to help you remember to breathe it.) majalahnya membersihkan sesudahnya

Latihan 1—Kata Lalu Jodohkanlah kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. anjing

dog

halaman

yard

besok

tomorrow

keterangan

declaration

burung

bird

masak

to cook

dapur

kitchen

pakaian

clothes

dinding

(interior) wall

kemarin

yesterday

Latihan 2—Kata Baru Jodohkan kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan membaca

to wash sth

membersihkan

to write

mendengarkan

to, towards

menulis

a letter

mencuci

to clean sth

menonton

what are (you) doing?

majalah

to read

surat kabar

plate, dish

kepada

magazine

surat

a newspaper

piring

to listen to sth

sedang apa?

to watch sth

Lesson 40

Latihan 3― Affxation Base words are usually “naked” words without afxes attached to them. Match the Indonesian base word to the derived words. Check the meaning of the derived words in the key to the exercises. 1. sekolah

a. pembantu

2. tinggal

b. pertanyaan

3. minum

c. minuman

4. buah

d. meninggal

5. tanya

e. bersekolah

6. bantu

f. buah-buahan

Latihan 4―Menjodohkan Let’s look at some more “me-” verbs. Each sentence here has been translated as if it is happening at the moment. But bear in mind that, in a diferent context, each of these sentences could be referring to a past, or even a future, event. 1. Ayah membaca surat kabar di ruang keluarga.

a. They are watching television in the living room.

2. Adiknya mencuci pakaiannya di kamar mandi.

b. Grandma is cleaning the kitchen.

3. Kakakku mendengarkan radio di kamarnya.

c. My mother is writing a novel.

4. Nenek membersihkan dapur.

d. Father is reading the newspaper in the living room.

5. Ibu saya menulis novel.

e. Her brother is washing his clothes in the bathroom.

6. Mereka menonton televisi di ruang ke- f. My elder sister is listening to the radio luarga. in her room.

Latihan 5―Menjodohkan As the Indonesian language does not know grammatical tense it has to rely on time markers such as besok, kemarin, sudah, akan, nanti, or tadi. 1. Ayah sudah membaca surat kabar di ruang keluarga.

a. Father has read the newspaper in the living room.

2. Adiknya tadi mencuci pakaiannya di kamar mandi.

b. Her brother has just washed his clothes in the bathroom.

3. Kemarin kakakku mendengarkan radio di kamarnya.

c. Later they are going to watch television in the living room.

Lesson 40 4. Besok nenek membersihkan dapur.

d. My mother will be writing a novel.

5. Ibu saya akan menulis novel.

e. Tomorrow grandma will be cleaning the kitchen.

6. Nanti mereka menonton televisi di ruang keluarga.

f. Yesterday my elder sister listened to the radio in her room.

Latihan 6―Menjodohkan Match the sentence stems on the left to the ending sentence response on the right. The sentence response will be a continuation of the sentence stems. For example: Left:

Pada hari Sabtu malam biasanya saya menonton flm dengan Susi, On Saturday nights usually I watch flms with Susi, Right: ...tetapi tadi malam saya menonton flm dengan Giok Nio. ...but last night I watched a flm with Giok Nio.

1. Ayah sedang beristirahat di kamar tidur

a. dan adiknya akan mencuci piring.

2. Kadang-kadang Yuni duduk di kebun,

b. dan pada sore hari dia bermain tenis dengan temannya.

3. Pada hari Selasa saya mencuci pakaian

c. dan pada hari Kamis saya membersihkan dapur.

4. Anda mau bertemu dengan dia sekarang?

d. dan pada hari Selasa dia menonton pertandingan sepak bola.

5. Saya suka menonton televisi,

e. dan ibu bekerja di kebun.

6. Wahyudi akan masak nanti malam

f. dan pada jam delapan dia pulang.

7. Pada hari Jumat Bapak Maimun bersembahyang di mesjid

g. Maaf tidak bisa. Saya harus pergi ke pasar sekarang.

8. Jam lima sore dia pergi ke rumah teman

h. tetapi biasanya dia menulis surat di ruang makan.

9. Pada pagi hari Fitri bersenam di gedung olahraga

i. tetapi kadang-kadang dia membaca surat kabar di ruang keluarga.

10. Biasanya Bapak Lopulisa minum kopi di ruang makan,

j. tetapi saya lebih suka mendengarkan musik di radio.

Lesson 40

Latihan 7―Jawaban Lengkap Answer the following sentences with complete sentences containing a meN- or meN-...-kan verb with the appropriate object.

1.Ibu Suratminingsih sedang apa?

2.Pak Fernandes sedang apa?

3.Keluarga Latumahina sedang apa?

4.Gerson sedang apa?

5.Bambang sedang apa?

6.Si Hendro sedang apa?

Lesson 40

7.Keluarga Sucipto sedang apa?

8.Ibu Nia dan Ros sedang apa?

9.Orang-orang ini sedang apa?

10. Anda sedang apa?

Latihan 8―Pilihan Ganda

P

Keluarga Pak Yohanes

ada pagi hari biasanya keluarga Pak Yohanes duduk di ruang makan. Bapak Yohanes membaca koran dan Ibu Yohanes memasak nasi goreng untuk sarapan. Ardi mendengarkan musik di radio lalu menonton berita di televisi. Delia membantu Ibu Yohanes memasak nasi goreng. Sesudah makan, Ibu Yohanes mencuci piring. Delia membantu Ardi mencuci pakaian. Pak Yohanes berada di halaman belakang. Dia sedang menyapu halaman itu. 1. What does Mr. Yohanes’ family do every morning? A. They watch news together on the TV. B. They sit in the dining room. C. They cook fried rice together. D. They talk in the dining room. 2. What does Mr. Yohanes do in the dining room? A. He is eating fried rice. B. He is reading a newspaper.

Lesson 40 C. He is cooking fried rice. D. He is helping Mrs. Yohanes cooking fried rice. 3. Is Ardi listening to the news on the radio? A. Yes B. No 4. What does Mrs. Yohanes do after breakfast? A. She helps Delia washing the clothes. B. She sweeps the foor. C. She washes the dishes. D. She cleans the kitchen. 5. Where does Mr. Yohanes go after breakfast? A. He goes to his ofce. B. He goes to his neighbour’s house. C. He goes to a cofee shop. D. He goes to the backyard. 6. Is Mr. Yohanes cleaning the backyard? A. Yes B. No

Latihan 9―Prefix MeAdd the prefx Me- to the following bases. Remember that you cannot mechanically add the prefx me- to the base. In many cases you have to add a nasal sound between the prefx and the base. 1. tulis

..................................................................

2. masak

..................................................................

3. cuci

..................................................................

4. tonton

..................................................................

5. baca

..................................................................

6. bantu

..................................................................

7. sapu

..................................................................

8. dengar

..................................................................

Lesson 40

Latihan 10―

Teka Teki Silang (TTS) : The Prefx “ber-”

So far we have encountered two verb-forming prefxes, me- and ber-. The main diference is that ber- verbs are always intransitive. They cannot take an object. If you want to say “I visit Bali” you can NOT say “saya berkunjung Bali”. Instead you have to use a preposition: “Saya berkunjung ke Bali”. Now, “Bali” is no longer the grammatical object but has become part of a prepositional phrase. Mendatar: 1. 3. 5. 7. 8. 9. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

to chat to ask a question to go to school to swim ____ coloured to play to work out to speak to pray to stand to originate (from) to visit (a place)

Menurun: 1. to meet 2. to go shopping 3. to work 4. to be such-andsuch an age.. 6. to go for a stroll 7. to rest; to take a break 10. to run

Lesson 40

Latihan 11―Teka Teki Silang (TTS): The Prefx “meN-” In contrast to ber- verbs, me- verbs are usually transitive meaning that they can take a grammatical object: Ibu mencuci pakaian. Dia membantu saya. Of course you can also use many of the me- verbs without an object. You can say, for instance: “Saya menulis” (I write), but you can also say “Saya menulis surat” (I write a letter). Mendatar: 1. 5. 6. 8. 9. 10.

to help someone; to assist someone to write to wash to call out to someone; to summon someone to listen to have something; to own something

Menurun: 2. to clean something 3. to open something 4. to see something; to look at something 7. to read 8. to watch

Lesson 41

41 Talking at Length

Bercakap-cakap

Aims • To take the frst steps towards stringing sentences together into an extended narrative. • To do a quick check on your progress through a Quick Quiz.

Vocabulary Review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings. berangkat

to depart

mendengarkan

to listen

dulu

frst

menonton

to watch

jagung

corn

piring

a plate

Lesson 41 kue

a cake

pulang

to go home

lalu

then

ruang keluarga

living room

majalah

magazine

sarapan

breakfast

melihat

to see

sesudah

after

membaca

to read

surat kabar

newspaper

membersihkan

to clean something

tadi malam

last night

mencari

to look for

tempat

a place

mencuci

to wash

uang

money

Before and After You have already met the words belum and sudah. (Review Lesson 22 if you need to refresh your memory about belum and sudah.) With the prefx se- glued to them they mean respectively “before” and “after”. Study these model sentences. Sesudah Adri pulang dia menonton televisi. After Adri came home he watched television. Sebelum berangkat ke kampus Anda harus bersiap-siap dulu! Before leaving for the campus you’ve got to get ready frst! Sesudah pulang dari kantor kepala desa Bapak Suwignyo beristirahat. After coming home from the village ofce, Mr Suwignyo took a rest. These two words also form the useful phrases sebelum itu (before that) and sesudah itu (after that). Yohannes mencuci piring. Sesudah itu dia membersihkan dapur. Yohannes washed the dishes. After that he cleaned the kitchen. Ratna bersisir, tetapi sebelum itu dia menggosok gigi. Ratna combed her hair, but before that she brushed her teeth. Sesudah makan pagi ia menggosok gigi, tetapi sebelum itu ia mencuci piring. After having breakfast she brushed her teeth, but before that she washed the dishes. Saya akan berbelanja di mal, tetapi sebelum itu saya harus mengambil uang. I’m going to go shopping at the mall, but before that I’ve got to get some money.

Exercise 41-01 In each of the incomplete sentences in this exercise you will fnd one of these words: sebelum (before), sesudah (after) or pada (on/at/in, followed by an expression of time). Write a conclusion to each sentence that fts sensibly with sebelum, sesudah or pada. Study this example frst. Cue sentence: Saya harus mencuci piring sesudah... You write: Saya harus mencuci piring sesudah makan malam.

Lesson 41 1. Saya harus membaca buku ini sebelum... 2. Biasanya saya bangun sebelum... 3. Anda harus ke mana sesudah... ? 4. Sesudah makan siang, apakah Anda... ? 5. Biasanya saya berangkat ke kantor kira-kira jam tujuh pagi, tetapi sebelum berangkat saya... 6. Kadang-kadang saya pergi ke gedung olahraga pada... 7. Pada hari Rabu yang lalu mereka pergi ke pesta sesudah mereka... 8. Ada kuliah bahasa Inggris pada hari Senin, tetapi tidak ada pada... 9. Bersiap-siap dulu sebelum... 10. Apakah Anda mau bermain bulu tangkis sebelum atau sesudah... ?

Getting a Narrative Going You now have most of the basic resources you need to make a simple narrative about what you do in the course of a day. Let’s review some of the all-important adverbs and connectors that help you stitch a narrative together. To talk about what you habitually do you can used these expressions: biasanya usually

tetapi biasanya but usually

kadang-kadang sometimes

tetapi kadang-kadang but sometimes

Awas !! English-speaking learners sometimes mispronounce biasanya and kadang-kadang by putting stress on the wrong syllables. Practise pronouncing them as follows (and fnetune your pronunciation by accurately imitating the models you hear in the audio exercises). biasanya kadang-kadang

/bee.yā.SĀN.yā/ KĀ.dāng.KĀ.dāng/

As we have seen, to help you talk about what you do on a particular day or at a particular time, you can use phrases starting with pada meaning “on”, “at”, “in” when you are talking about the time when something happens. (Note that when you are talking rapidly or colloquially, pada is often dropped in these expressions.) pada hari Sabtu malam on Saturday night(s)

pada pagi hari in the morning

pada hari Minggu on Sunday(s)

pada siang hari in the (early) afternoon

pada hari Selasa pagi on Tuesday morning(s)

pada sore hari in the (late) afternoon

pada jam delapan at eight o’clock

pada malam hari at night

Lesson 41 To make the narrative fow smoothly, you should make as much use as possible of connectors: words and phrases that help you link one part of a narrative to the next. Let’s review the connect ors that have appeared so far. sebelum before sesudah after dan and

sebelum itu before that sesudah itu after that juga also

tetapi sebelum itu but before that tetapi sesudah itu but after that atau or

Another very common connector is lalu (which made a brief debut in Lesson 27). Lalu is synonymous with kemudian. Both mean “then” when you are talking about what comes after a certain event. Saya bangun, lalu saya mandi I get up, then I have a bath. Saya makan siang, kemudian saya masuk kuliah I have lunch, then I go to lectures.

Daily Routine: Memorisation Exercise Now, let’s get talking. Cover up the middle and right hand columns in the narrative below. Read the sentences in the left hand column, saying them out loud, making sure that you understand everything and trying to remember as much of the narrative as you can. Check this lesson’s vocabulary cards when you see a new word you don’t know. Then cover up the left and right columns and read the middle column flling in the empty spaces from memory. If you can’t remember the word that should go in an empty space take a peek at the left hand column. When you can correctly read the narrative in the middle column cover up the left and middle columns and read the right hand column in the same way. After you have memorised the narrative, go through it again thinking of how you could vary it so that it refects your own daily routine. Pada pagi hari biasanya saya bangun pada jam enam. Sesudah bangun saya mendengarkan berita di radio.

Pada ____ hari, biasanya saya bangun pada ____ enam. Sesudah ____, saya mendengarkan berita di ____.

Kadang-kadang saya menonton televisi atau duduk di kebun. Lalu saya makan pagi. Biasanya saya makan roti dan buahbuahan, dan saya minum kopi manis. Sesudah makan saya membersihkan meja dan mencuci piring. Sebelum pergi ke kampus, biasanya saya membeli surat kabar, dan kadang-kadang saya membeli majalah.

Kadang-kadang saya menonton ____ atau duduk di ____.

Pada ____ hari, biasanya ____ ____ pada ____ enam Sesudah ____ saya ____ berita di ____. Kadang-____ saya menonton ____ atau ____ di ____.

Lalu saya makan ____. Biasanya saya makan roti dan buah____, dan saya ____ kopi manis. Sesudah ____ saya membersihkan meja dan mencuci ____.

____ saya makan ____. Biasanya saya makan ____ dan buah-____, dan saya ____ kopi ____. Sesudah ____ saya ____ meja dan ____ ____.

Sebelum ____ ke kampus, biasanya saya membeli ____ ____, dan kadang-kadang saya membeli ____.

Sebelum ____ ke ____, biasanya saya membeli ____ ____, dan kadang-____ saya membeli ____ .

Lesson 41 Sesudah itu saya naik bus ke kampus. Biasanya saya membaca surat kabar atau majalah di bus, tetapi kadang-kadang saya duduk saja melihat orang dan pemandangan. Di perpustakaan saya mencari tempat yang tenang untuk belajar. Pada siang hari, kira-kira jam 12, saya mengambil uang di bank dan membeli makanan. Biasanya saya makan dengan teman-teman, tetapi kadang-kadang saya makan sendiri.

Sesudah itu saya naik bus ke ____. Biasanya saya membaca surat kabar atau ____ di bus, tetapi kadang-kadang saya ____ saja melihat orang dan pemandangan. Di ____ saya mencari tempat yang ____ untuk belajar

Sesudah itu saya ____ bus ke ____. Biasanya saya ____ surat kabar atau ____ di bus, tetapi kadang-kadang saya ____ saja melihat ____ dan ____.

Pada siang ____, kira-kira jam 12, saya mengambil uang di ____ dan membeli ____. Biasanya saya makan dengan ____-____, tetapi kadang-kadang saya ____ sendiri.

Pada siang ____, kira-____ jam 12, saya ____ uang di ____ dan membeli ____. Biasanya saya ____ dengan ____-____, tetapi kadang-kadang saya ____ ____.

Di ____ saya mencari tempat yang ____ untuk ____

Now listen to Sound File 041-01 and then complete Exercise 06.

Fleshing Out And Fine-Tuning Your Narrative The narrative below is an example of how you can fesh out an account of daily activities using the words and grammar you have studied so far. Read the narrative carefully, checking that you know all the words (especially the new verbs) in it. Note also how sebelum, sesudah, lalu and kemudian can be used.

B

iasanya Yakob bangun jam setengah enam pagi. Sesudah bangun dia pergi ke kebun. Dia suka melihat burung-burung di kebun pada pagi hari. Sebelum sarapan dia mandi, menggosok gigi, berpakaian dan bersisir. Kira-kira jam setengah tujuh dia sarapan. Yakob biasanya makan nasi goreng, tetapi kadang-kadang dia makan roti dengan telur. Biasanya dia minum kopi, tetapi kadang-kadang dia minum susu. Yakob tinggal dengan ayah, ibu dan adik. Mereka juga makan dengan Yakob. Sesudah makan, Yakob mencuci piring dan membersihkan dapur. Sesudah itu dia pergi ke toko di dekat rumahnya. Di sana dia membeli surat kabar. Kadang-kadang dia juga membeli makanan untuk siang hari. Lalu dia kembali ke rumahnya dan duduk di ruang keluarga. Di sana dia membaca surat kabar. Jam delapan biasanya Yakob mendengarkan berita di radio. Kemudian dia mengambil buku-bukunya dan naik bus ke kampus. Biasanya Yakob berangkat dari rumah kira-kira jam delapan lewat seperempat. After having listened to Sound File 041-02, do Latihan 8.

Exercise 41-02 Copying most of the passage above, write a short account of what you usually do every morning. Make changes to the passage where appropriate so that what you write more or less fts the reality of what you yourself do every morning. For example, you will, of course, change Yakob and dia to saya. Most likely you will also change the times of events as well as their order. You will probably change (or at least modify) some of the events themselves too. You will have to leave out a few of the sentences in the model passage, and add one or two new ones, but basically what you write will be recognisable as a transformation of the model passage.

Lesson 41

Role Play: Reviewing Your Plans for the Day This is a solo role play. In the morning, as you stand in front of the bathroom mirror, take a few minutes to look intently into your own eyes and review your plans for the coming day in Indonesian. If it doesn’t disturb members of your household or fellow asrama inmates you should speak out loud. Perhaps you might begin: Sesudah mandi saya berpakaian. Lalu saya makan pagi. Saya makan jagung dengan susu, dan saya minum kopi manis. Sesudah itu, saya harus... Try to be as detailed as possible, but remember, don’t try to say more than your current vocabulary and command of grammar permit you to say. Although your vocabulary is still relatively small, you can surprise yourself with the length and detail of your narrative. Mention times and places. Mention real people. At every step in your planned schedule, try to add details. You might say... Lalu saya minum kopi dengan Julia. Kemudian saya akan... but it would be much better if you said, for example... Kira-kira jam setengah tiga sore, sesudah kuliah bahasa Indonesia, saya bertemu dengan Julia. Kami bercakap-cakap dan minum kopi di kantin mahasiswa. Saya suka sekali makan kue di warung kopi itu. Kopinya juga enak sekali – kopi asli dari pulau Jawa! Saya suka sekali bercakap-cakap dengan Julia. Dia belajar ilmu kimia, saya belajar bahasa Indonesia dan ilmu politik. Etc. etc. etc. You can also practise this narrative in the the classroom, with a classmate or your teacher/tutor taking the role of the “mirror”. Your partner – the “mirror” – can put questions to you, for example questions beginning: Apakah Anda ... ? Anda ____ dengan siapa? Di mana Anda... ? Jam berapa Anda... ? Berapa lama Anda... ? and many more.

Reviewing the pronunciation of /h/ Let’s sum up the main features of the pronunciation of /h/. • The /h/ sound is audibly breathed when it occurs at the end of a syllable, even when that syllable is in the middle of a word and followed immediately by a consonant. It is also audibly breathed when it appears between two vowels that are the same. • When /h/ appears between two vowels that are diferent it is only lightly sounded or not audible at all. Listen to the following words in Sound File 041-03. After each word there is a pause for you to repeat the word. sesudah

latihan

tambah

membersihkan

majalah

melihat

olahraga

Rupiah

Lesson 41 In the speech of some Indonesians, especially Javanese, the /h/ at the beginning of a syllable may disappear, or can be very weak. But in the following examples initial /h/ is audibly pro nounced: hari

hijau

harus

Latihan 1―Kosa Kata Lalu Jodohkanlah kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. berangkat

a long time ago

berenang

money

dulu

a newspaper

beristirahat

what time?

jagung

a plate; dishes

bersenam

to prefer

kue

cake

besok

to rest

lalu

corn, maize

hari Jumat

to work out

majalah

to wash

hari Sabtu

defnitely

melihat

magazine

jam berapa?

to believe

membaca

place

lapangan

tomorrow

membersihkan

then

lebih suka

Saturday

mencuci

to clean

mendengarkan

to swim

tempat

to depart

pasti

to listen

menonton

to watch

percaya

to go home

piring

to read

pulang

a quarter

surat kabar

to see

seperempat

a feld

uang

Friday

tadi malam

last night

Latihan 2―Menjodohkan Jodohkan waktu di kolom kiri dengan artinya di kolom kanan. 17.00

a. jam sebelas siang

11.00

b. jam setengah dua siang

13.30

c. jam setengah sebelas malam

22.30

d. jam lima sore

19.15

e. jam lima kurang lima sore

05.25

f. jam setengah enam kurang lima pagi

16.55

g. jam dua belas lewat sepuluh malam

00.10

h. jam tujuh seperempat malam

Lesson 41

Latihan 3―Menjodohkan As we have seen, to help you talk about what you do on a particular day or at a particular time, you can use phrases starting with pada meaning ‘on’, ‘at’, ‘in’ when you are talking about the time when something happens (note that when you are talking rapidly or colloquially, pada is often dropped in these expressions). 1. pada malam Minggu

a. in the (early) afternoon

2. pada hari Minggu

b. in the morning

3. pada hari Selasa pagi

c. in the (late) afternoon

4. pada jam delapan

d. at eight o’clock

5. pada jam dua siang

e. on Saturday night(s)

6. pada pagi hari

f. on Tuesday morning(s)

7. pada siang hari

g. on Sunday(s)

8. pada sore hari

h. at night

9. pada malam hari

i. at two in the afternoon

Latihan 4―Menjodohkan: Kata Penghubung Jodohkan kata penghubung di kolom kiri dengan artinya di kolom kanan. 1. sebelum

a. after

2. sebelum itu

b. after that

3. tetapi sebelum itu

c. also

4. sesudah

d. and

5. sesudah itu

e. before

6. tetapi sesudah itu

f. before that

7. dan

g. but after that

8. juga

h. but before that

9. atau

i. or

Latihan 5―Rangkai Kata Reorder the Indonesian words below to say : 1. “Before leaving for the campus, you’ve got to get ready frst!” Sebelum―Anda―kampus―ke―bersiap-siap―berangkat―harus―dulu! 2. “Ratna combed her hair, but before that she brushed her teeth.” Ratna―dia―bersisir,―tetapi―menggosok―itu―sebelum―gigi.

Lesson 41 3. “I’m going to go shopping at the mall, but before that I’ve got to get some money.” Saya―sebelum―akan berbelanja―tetapi―saya harus mengambil.―di mal,―itu―uang

Latihan 6―Isian Dengarkanlah Rekaman 041-01 lalu lengkapilah bacaan di bawah ini. Pada __________ hari biasanya __________ __________ pada __________ enam. Sesudah __________ saya __________ berita di __________. Kadang-__________ saya menonton __________ atau __________ di __________. __________ saya makan __________. Biasanya saya makan __________ dan buah-__________, dan saya __________ kopi __________. Sesudah __________ saya __________ meja dan __________ __________. Sebelum __________ ke __________, biasanya saya membeli __________, dan kadang__________ saya membeli __________. Sesudah itu saya __________ bus ke __________. Biasanya saya __________ surat kabar atau __________ di bus, tetapi kadang-kadang saya __________ saja melihat __________ dan __________. Di __________ saya mencari tempat yang __________ untuk __________. Pada siang __________, kira-__________ jam 12, saya __________ uang di __________ dan membeli __________. Biasanya saya __________ dengan __________, tetapi kadangkadang saya __________ __________.

Latihan 7―Pemahaman Bacalah bacaan berikut ini dan jawablah pertanyaan di bawah ini.

Makan Malam Bersama

jam enam sore. Sinta sedang bersiap-siap untuk makan malam dengan keluargaSdanekarang nya. Sesudah berpakaian, Sinta pergi ke ruang keluarga. Di sana sudah ada ayah, ibu, kakak Sinta karena mereka mau makan di luar.

Mereka naik mobil ke Restoran Samudra. Mereka tiba di sana jam tujuh malam. Restoran Samudra restoran besar dan ramai. Mereka makan makanan Sunda yang enak sekali! Sesudah makan dan bercakap-cakap di restoran mereka pulang. Jam setengah sepuluh malam mereka tiba di rumah. Sinta masuk ke kamarnya karena sudah capai lalu dia menggosok gigi sebelum tidur. 1. Sinta ... pada jam 18.00. A. menggosok gigi B. bersiap-siap untuk makan malam C. tiba di Restoran Samudra D. memasak makan malam

Lesson 41 2. Sesudah berpakaian Sinta ke mana? A. ke ruang keluarga, lalu keluar untuk makan malam B. ke ruang keluarga untuk bercakap-cakap dengan keluarganya C. ke kamarnya, menggosok gigi, lalu tidur D. ke kamar mandi untuk menggosok gigi 3. Bagaimana Restoran Samudra? A. tidak besar dan makanannya tidak enak B. besar tetapi makanannya tidak enak C. besar dan makanannya enak D. tidak besar tetapi makanannya enak 4. Jam berapa mereka tiba di rumah? A. 21.00 B. 21.30 C. 22.00 D. 22.30 5. Sesudah pulang dari restoran, Sinta ... A. ke ruang keluarga untuk bercakap-cakap dengan keluarganya. B. ke masuk ke kamarnya. C. ke kamar mandi. D. ke kamarnya untuk membaca buku. 6. Sebelum tidur Sinta ...... A. menggosok gigi B. bercakap-cakap dengan keluarganya C. memasak makan malam D. naik mobil

Latihan 8―Pemahaman Dengarkanlah rekaman 041-02 berikut ini dan jawablah pertanyaan di bawah ini. 1. Jam berapa Yakob bangun tidur? A. 04.00 B. 05.00 C. 06.00 D. 06.30 2. Yakob pergi ke kebun sebelum sarapan. A. Benar B. Salah 3. Yakob sarapan sebelum mandi. A. Benar B. Salah 4. Jam berapa Yakob sarapan? A. 06.00 B. 06.30 C. 07.00 D. 07.30

Lesson 41 5. Yakob biasanya makan ayam goreng dan minum teh untuk sarapan. A. Benar B. Salah 6. Yakob tinggal dengan siapa? (more than one answers) A. Ayah dan ibunya B. kakaknya C. adiknya D. neneknya 7. Yakob pergi ke toko sesudah mencuci piring dan membersihkan dapur. A. Benar B. Salah 8. Yakob biasanya membaca surat kabar di ruang tamu. A. Benar B. Salah 9. Jam berapa Yakob mendengarkan radio? A. 07.00 B. 07.30 C. 08.00 D. 08.15 10. Jam berapa Yakob pergi ke kampus? A. 07.00 B. 07.30 C. 08.00 D. 08.15

Latihan 9―Teka Teki Silang (TTS) Mendatar: 1. before 5. a view; a scene 6. to look for; to seek 10. then (after that) 11. to brush (your teeth) 12. after (a certain time) 13. to get dressed Menurun: 2. to go & get something 3. news 4. to get up 7. to comb your hair 8. to buy something 9. by yourself, alone

Lesson 42

42 More Practice Building A Narrative

Aims • To learn how say “in order to...” and talk about “we” and “us”. • To get more practice talking about everyday activities.

Vocabulary Review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings. (ber)belanja

to go shopping

macam

kind, sort

berangkat

to leave, depart

main

to play

beres

all fne, in order

melihat

to see

berwarna

to have a colour

menonton

to watch

cari

to look for, to seek

membeli

to buy

harganya

its price, the price

membersihkan

to clean

HP

mobile phone

pakaian

clothes

kemarin

yesterday

sarapan

breakfast

kentang

potatoe

sebelum

before

kereta api

train

sesudah

after

“In Order To ........” In Lesson 24 you met the word untuk meaning “for”, “intended for”. For example: Kamar ini untuk anak-anak. This room is for the children. Untuk can also come before a verb, in which case it means “in order to” or simply “to”. Note that the use of untuk in these cases is always optional. Nanti malam saya ke bioskop untuk menonton flm Laskar Pelangi. Tonight I’m going to the cinema (in order) to see the flm “The Rainbow Troops”. Kemarin dia ke kantor untuk bertemu dengan Bapak Kepala Desa. Yesterday she went to the ofce (in order) to see the Village Head.

Lesson 42 Study this substitution table and practise producing sentences from it. As always, try to put yourself in the picture by imagining situations in which you might use the sentences. Make additions to the columns where you can. Besok sore Besok pagi Nanti sore Nanti siang Nanti malam Besok Besok malam Besok siang

saya

ke

Surabaya pasar kota toko mal Jalan Irian

untuk

membeli mencari

pakaian makanan majalah surat kabar sepeda

Exercise 42-01 Answer each of the questions in this exercise with a sentence explaining why you did something or why you usually do something or what you intend to do. Use untuk followed by a verb. Don’t forget to mention a place in your sentence. A selection of useful ber- and me- verbs is provided. Study these examples frst. Pertanyaan: Hai, Yulius! Mau ke mana nanti malam? Jawaban: Nanti malam saya ke perpustakaan untuk belajar. Pertanyaan: Pada hari Sabtu malam biasanya ada acara apa? Jawaban: Biasanya saya ke warung kopi untuk minum dan bercakap-cakap dengan teman-teman. Choose from among these verbs: mencuci, membaca, menonton, menulis, mencari, membeli, membersihkan, mendengarkan, melihat, belajar, bekerja, berjalan-jalan, berbelanja, bermain (tenis, bulu tangkis, sepak bola, ...), berbicara, bercakap-cakap, bertemu, bersenam, bersembahyang 1. Anda pergi ke mana tadi malam? 2. Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan pada sore hari? 3. Pada hari Senin biasanya ada acara apa? 4. Anda sedang apa sekarang? 5. Pada jam setengah enam sore biasanya Anda di mana? 6. Teman Anda sedang apa sekarang? 7. Apa yang Anda lakukan kemarin siang sesudah makan? 8. Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan pada hari Rabu sebelum pergi dari rumah? 9. Pada hari Minggu pagi Anda ke mana? 10. Frans sedang apa?

Lesson 42

We (kami / kita) “We” is a small word and it can sometimes be a small problem for English speaking students of Indonesian. The problem is that there are two words for “we” in Indonesian: kami and kita. Kami means “we” but excludes the person or persons you are talking to. It could be translated “we (but not you)”. Depending on where it appears in a clause it might also mean “us (but not you)”. Kita, on the other hand, includes the person or persons you are talking to. It could be translated “we (and that means you too)”. Again, depending on where it appears in a clause it might also mean “us (and that includes you too)”. Study these two pictures. Observe how kita and kami are used where in English we use just one word: “we”.

KITA

Kita ke mana sekarang? Ke bioskop? Ke toko musik? Ayo, ke mana kita?

KAMI

Kami mau menonton flm. Mau ikut?

Where shall we go now? To the cinema? To We are of to see a movie. Would you like to the music shop? Come on, where are we of come? to?

Bacaan—Reading Listen to Sound File 042-01 and pay special attention to how kami and kita are used. Notice also that in the direct-speech parts of the narrative the speakers drop into a more colloquial style of Indonesian, using aku, kamu, ketemu, beres, gitu, sih, tapi, gimana and other informal words or short forms that friends might use when talking among themselves.

K

Jalan-jalan dengan Teman

emarin pagi, saya, Hetty dan Piet pergi ke kota. Kami ingin berbelanja dan menonton flm. Sesudah makan dan membersihkan rumah kami berangkat naik bemo kira-kira jam setengah sepuluh. Kami sampai di kota jam sepuluh dan masuk Toko Matahari untuk membeli pakaian. Saya ingin membeli baju baru. Hetty juga mencari baju baru. Kami mencoba beberapa macam baju. Saya membeli baju berwarna putih. Harganya seratus delapan puluh lima ribu rupiah. Hetty membeli baju berwarna merah yang cukup mahal. Harganya dua ratus sembilan puluh empat ribu lima ratus rupiah. Sesudah itu kami minum kopi di warung. Tetapi kami tidak jadi minum kopi karena kopinya tidak enak. Jadi kami minum teh saja.

Lesson 42

“Sekarang ke mana kita?” tanya Piet. “Ke toko buku dan toko alat-alat elektronik, dan sesudah itu kita nonton flm,” kata Hetty. “Beres,” kata Piet. “Tapi kalau kita nonton flm nanti siang, kita nggak bisa pulang sebelum jam lima sore.” “Nanti sore ada acara apa sih?” tanya Hetty. “Aku harus ketemu sama Pak Benyamin jam empat. Kami mau main bulu tangkis.” “Kalau gitu,” kata Hetty, “habis minum kamu pulang saja, Piet. Kami masih akan belanja lagi.” “Baiklah,” jawab Piet. “Kita ketemu lagi nanti malam di rumah.” Sesudah kami keluar dari warung, Piet pulang naik taksi. Saya dan Hetty ke toko buku. Kami suka sekali membaca majalah dan buku. Saya mencari majalah berita Tempo. Hetty mencari novel Laskar Pelangi. Kami melihat banyak sekali buku dan majalah, tetapi kami hanya membeli satu majalah dan satu buku. Sesudah itu kami masuk toko alat-alat elektronik. Saya ingin sekali membeli HP baru. Di toko itu ada bermacam-macam HP yang keren, tetapi harganya cukup mahal. “Gimana kalau kita pergi ke pasar besok untuk cari HP,” kata Hetty. “HP di pasar murah sekali.” Sesudah keluar dari toko alat-alat elektronik kami pergi ke bioskop. Ada flm bagus. Mel Gibson bermain dalam flm Braveheart. Kami suka sekali menonton flm Mel Gibson. Mel Gibson orang Australia, tetapi dia bermain dalam flm Amerika. “Minum lagi sebelum pulang, yuk” kata Hetty sesudah kami keluar dari bioskop. Kami minum teh manis. Kami juga makan roti dan kue. Sesudah itu kami pulang naik bis. Kami sampai di rumah kira-kira jam setengah enam sore.

Exercise 42-02 Imagine that you are the narrator (the saya) in the story above. Answer these questions about what you and your two friends did. Write complete sentences in simple but correct formal Indonesian. Feel free to copy phrases and sentences from the passage but try to introduce some vari ations of your own into your answers. Don’t forget that Anda in these questions is like the English “you”: it can refer to just one person, but it can also refer to more than one person. In the questions below it refers to the three (or two) of you, so all your answers should have the word kami (i.e. “we, but not you the listener”) in them. 1. Jam berapa Anda pergi dari rumah? 2. Apakah Anda membersihkan rumah sebelum berangkat? 3. Anda pergi ke kota naik apa? 4. Apa yang Anda lakukan sesudah sampai di kota? 5. Di toko alat-alat elektronik Anda mencari apa? 6. Anda menonton flm apa? 7. Apakah Anda minum lagi sesudah menonton? 8. Apakah Anda suka membaca? 9. Anda pulang naik apa? 10. Jam berapa Anda sampai di rumah pada sore hari?

Lesson 42

Ago (...yang lalu) In the previous lesson you met the word lalu where it was used as a connecting word meaning something like “then”, i.e. “moving on (to the next thing/event)”. The basic broad meaning of lalu is “to go by, to pass by, to move on”. The useful phrase yang lalu means literally “what has gone/passed by” but it can be better translated “...ago” or in some contexts “last...”. Study these examples: tiga hari yang lalu three days ago

hari Sabtu yang lalu last Saturday

sepuluh tahun yang lalu ten years ago

minggu yang lalu last week

Dua tahun yang lalu saya ke Roma. Two years ago I went to Rome.

Hari Minggu yang lalu ada acara apa? What did you do last Sunday?

Exercise 42-03 Write a narrative giving an account of what Hendro did last Wednesday. Your account should mention activities and times, and these should square with the pictures and the times on clocks. To connect the pieces of your narrative, copy the connecting phrases given above the pictures. Apart from following these instructions, you can (and should) introduce your own variations. Hari Rabu yang lalu Hendro …

Sesudah itu, ia keluar untuk …

Lalu Hendro ...

Dia masuk rumah lagi untuk ...

Lesson 42 Sesudah itu dia ...

Lalu dia ...

Kira-kira jam .... dia sarapan dengan...

Sesudah makan dia...

Lalu dia ....

Lalu Hendro …

Pada jam .... dia …

Lesson 42

Exercise 42-04 Ask Hendro some questions about what he did last Wednesday morning. The beginning of each question is given. 1. Hendro, jam berapa kamu ... 2. Apakah kamu ... 3. Apa yang kamu lakukan ... 4. Apakah kamu ... sebelum atau sesudah ... 5. Jam berapa kamu ... 6. Sesudah ..., apakah kamu ... 7. ... ada kegiatan apa? 8. Jam berapa kamu ... 9. Hendro, saya mau bertanya, apakah kamu ... 10. Sebelum ..., apakah kamu ...

Role Play: Kami Berkunjung ke... Imagine that a few days ago you visited a certain place, perhaps in company with a friend, husband/wife or a member of your family, or perhaps with a work colleague (Bapak Bupati, Ibu Guru, Bapak Kepala Desa, Ibu Dosen). Having returned from the visit you report to another friend or to another member of your family, or a work colleague (played by another member of the class or by your teacher/tutor) on what you did while you were away. As you speak you will have to use the pronoun kami (we, but not including the person you are talking to). You should also mention the day of the week and the hour of the day that you did certain things. You should express your judgement about the place(s) that you visited, and give reasons for your likes and dislikes. Your narrative should make as much use as possible of: • • • • • • • •

... yang lalu e.g. minggu yang lalu, hari Jumat yang lalu kami e.g. kami pergi ke sana naik kereta api berkunjung ke e.g. kami berkunjung ke Taman Kota days of the week e.g. (pada) hari Minggu kami beristirahat hours of the day e.g. jam setengah delapan pagi kami berangkat dari hotel daily routine e.g. kami bangun, mandi dan makan pagi connector words e.g. lalu, kemudian, sesudah itu preferences e.g. suka, tidak suka, tetapi kami lebih suka...

Perhaps your narrative report might begin something like this (you can substitute other words for the underlined ones): Minggu yang lalu saya dan teman saya berkunjung ke Sydney. Kami naik kereta api ke Sydney dan kami tinggal di hotel kecil di pusat kota. Kami ingin menonton pertandingan sepak bola. Pada hari Sabtu kami ke lapangan olahraga untuk menonton pertandingan. Kemudian, kira-kira jam enam sore, kami makan di rumah makan. Aduh, makanannya enak sekali, dan juga murah! Ada ayam goreng dan kentang. Tetapi tidak ada nasi. Sesudah makan, pada jam tujuh malam, kami pergi ke... As always, don’t try to say more than your current Indonesian vocabulary permits you to say. This may mean that your narrative lacks detail – that you cannot say all that you want to say – but for the moment you should concentrate on developing fuency within the constraints of the vocab-

Lesson 42 ulary and grammar you have already mastered. Make this vocabulary and grammar work very hard to express what you want to say as closely as possible (but probably not as perfectly as you would like). Your partner should interrupt frequently, perhaps beginning each interruption with Permisi (Excuse me), and asking questions like those back in Exercise 42-04. Repeat the role play several times swapping roles with your partner and striving for more variation, better correctness and smoother fuency with each repetition.

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu Jodohkanlah kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. berangkat

...in colour

main

a competition

beres

a sort; a kind

melihat

clothes

berwarna

all okay

menonton

to buy sth

harga

mobile phone

membeli

to clean sth

HP (“ha-pe”)

potato

membersihkan

to play (coll)

kemarin

price

mencari

to see

kentang

to depart, leave

pakaian

to seek

kereta api

train

pertandingan

to watch sth

macam

yesterday

Latihan 2—Ago (...yang lalu) Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1. tiga hari yang lalu

a. last Saturday

2. sepuluh tahun yang lalu

b. last Sunday

3. tiga bulan yang lalu

c. last week

4. hari Sabtu yang lalu

d. ten years ago

5. minggu yang lalu

e. three days ago

6. hari Minggu yang lalu

f. three months ago

Latihan 3—Sentences with untuk Listen to the sound fle carefully and choose the correct response. 1.

a. Hari Sabtu biasanya saya ke toko untuk membeli pakaian.

2.

b. Kamar ini untuk anak-anak.

3.

c. Kemarin dia ke kantor untuk bertemu Bapak Kepala Desa.

4.

d. Kemarin saya pergi ke perpustakaan untuk belajar.

Lesson 42 5.

e. Nanti sore saya mau ke toko buku untuk membeli surat kabar untuk ayah saya.

6.

f. Saya ke bioskop nanti malam untuk menonton flm Ayat-Ayat Cinta.

7.

g. Saya mau ke pasar besok pagi untuk membeli makanan.

Latihan 4—Untuk Read each sentence. Decide which definition of untuk is being used in the sentence’s context: for or in order to. 1. Kamar ini untuk anak-anak. A. for B. in order to 2. Nanti malam saya ke bioskop untuk menonton flm Ayat-Ayat Cinta. A. for B. in order to 3. Kemarin dia ke kantor untuk bertemu dengan Bapak Kepala Desa. A. for B. in order to 4. Besok sore saya ke pasar untuk membeli majalah untuk kakak saya. A. for B. in order to 5. Besok sore saya ke pasar untuk membeli majalah untuk kakak saya. A. for B. in order to

Latihan 5—Rangkai Kata Urutkan kata-kata berikut ini menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti: 1. “What time did you depart from home?” Jam—dari—berapa—Anda—berangkat—rumah? 2. “Did you clean the house before you departed?” Apakah—rumah—Anda—membersihkan—sebelum—berangkat? 3. “How did you go downtown?” Anda—pergi—naik—kota—ke—apa? 4. “What are you looking for at the electronic shop?” Di—mencari—Anda—alat-alat—toko—elektronik—apa? 5. “What time did you arrive at home in the late afternoon?” Anda—sampai—berapa—sore—rumah—Jam—di—pada—hari?

Lesson 42

Latihan 6—Menjodohkan: Kosa Kata Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1. alat

a. we (inclusive)

2. cari

b. week

3. baju

c. we (excl.)

4. yang lalu

d. (in order) to

5. mencoba

e. arrive in/at

6. untuk

f. stylish; cool

7. minggu

g. watch (coll.)

8. kita

h. look for

9. nonton

i. device; tool

10. kami

j. shirt

k. try

12. keren

l. ...ago; last

11. sampai di

Latihan 7—Pilihan Ganda Bacalah bacaan “Jalan-Jalan dengan Teman” dan jawablah pertanyaan di bawah ini. 1. What did the three do before going to town? A. They shopped B. They watched a flm C. They cleaned the house D. They went to church 2. Why did they go to town? A. to go shopping and eating out B. to see a movie and eating out C. to go shopping and see a movie D. just to see a movie 3. How did they go to town? A. by a three-wheeled minibus B. by car C. by bus D. by motorcycle 4. The narrator bought a white t-shirt in a store. How much did it cost? A. Rp. 158,000.00 B. Rp. 185,000.00 C. Rp. 815,000.00 D. Rp. 518.000.00 5. Which one is more expensive, the narrator’s shirt or Hetty’s? A. The narrator’s B. Hetty’s C. Their shirts cost the same

Lesson 42 6. Where did Piet go after drinking tea? A. to the electronic store B. go home C. to the cinema D. to the book store 7. Where did the narrator and Hetty go after drinking tea? A. to the electronic store B. go home C. to the cinema D. to the book store 8. The narrator didn’t buy the mobile phone he was looking for. Why not? A. because he did not have any money at all B. because he didn’t like the mobile phone C. because the mobile phones in the shop were too expensive D. because the specifcation of the mobile phone was not as expected 9. Who watched a movie before going home? A. The narrator and Hetty B. Only the narrator C. All of them (the writer, Hetty, and Piet) D. Only Hetty 10. What time did they arrive at home? A. at 17:30 B. around 17:30 C. before 17:30 D. after 17:30

Latihan 8—Isian Dengarkanlah rekaman dan lengkapilah bacaan di bawah ini.—Listen to Sound File 042-03 to fll in the blanks. Kemarin __________, saya, Hetty dan Piet pergi ke __________. Kami ingin berbelanja dan __________ flm. Sesudah makan dan __________ rumah kami berangkat naik bemo __________ jam setengah sepuluh. Kami sampai di kota jam sepuluh dan masuk Toko Matahari untuk membeli pakaian. Saya ingin __________ baju baru. Hetty juga __________ baju baru. Kami __________ beberapa macam baju. Saya membeli baju berwarna putih. __________ seratus delapan puluh lima ribu rupiah. Hetty membeli baju berwarna __________ yang cukup mahal. Harganya dua ratus sembilan puluh empat ribu lima ratus rupiah. Sesudah itu kami minum kopi di warung. Tetapi kami tidak jadi minum kopi __________ kopinya tidak enak. Jadi kami minum teh saja.

Lesson 42

Latihan 9—Menjodohkan: Informal & Formal Match the informal items with formal items. 1. nggak

a. bagaimana

2. belanja

b. begitu

3. nonton

c. berbelanja

4. cari

d. bermain

5. main

e. bertemu

6. ketemu

f. sesudah

7. gimana

g. menonton

8. habis

h. mencari

9. gitu

i. tidak

Latihan 10—Isian: Kita vs. Kami Review the conversation below. Remember that kita is the ‘we’ form that includes the person or persons you are talking to whereas kami is the ‘we’ form that excludes the person or persons you are talking to. Fill in each blank with the correct form of ‘we’: kita or kami. ‘Sekarang ke mana kita?’ tanya Piet. ‘Ke toko buku dan toko alat-alat elektronik, dan sesudah itu kita nonton flm,’ kata Hetty. ‘Beres,’ kata Piet. ‘Tapi kalau ________ nonton flm nanti siang, ________ nggak bisa pulang sebelum jam lima sore.’ ‘Nanti sore ada acara apa sih?’ tanya Hetty. ‘Aku harus ketemu sama Pak Benyamin jam empat. ________ mau main bulu tangkis.’ ‘Kalau gitu,’ kata Hetty, ‘habis minum kamu pulang saja, Piet. ________ masih akan belanja lagi.’ ‘Bagus,’ jawab Piet. ‘________ ketemu lagi nanti malam di rumah.’

Latihan 11—Isian: Informal vs Formal Replace all informal and slangy words with formal Indonesian words. ‘Sekarang ke mana kita?’ tanya Piet. ‘Ke toko buku dan toko alat-alat elektronik, dan (1) habis itu kita (2) nonton flm,’ kata Hetty. (3) ‘Beres,’ kata Piet. ‘Tapi kalau kita nonton flm nanti siang, kita (4) nggak bisa pulang sebelum jam lima sore.’ ‘Nanti sore ada acara apa sih?’ tanya Hetty. (5) ‘Aku harus (6) ketemu (7) sama Pak Benyamin jam empat. Kami mau (8) main bulu tangkis.’

Lesson 42 ‘Kalau (9) gitu,’ kata Hetty, (10) ‘habis minum (11) kamu pulang saja, Piet. Kami masih akan (12) belanja lagi.’ ‘Bagus,’ jawab Piet. ‘Kita (13) ketemu lagi nanti malam di rumah.’ [...] (14) ‘Gimana kalau kita pergi ke pasar besok untuk (15) cari HP,’ kata Hetty. ‘HP di pasar murah sekali.’

Latihan 12 Me- Verbs Match the following meN- verbs with their translations. Note that all of these verbs are transitive. This means that they can take an object—in the translation indicated with ‘something’. Some of the following verbs do not necessarily take an object. You can say, for instance, “Ibu sedang mencuci” (Mother is doing the laundry”). But at least they can take an object: “Ibu mencuci baju saya” (Mother washes my shirt). Other meN- verbs, especially those with the sufx -kan, must take an object. You can not say: *“Ibu membeli” if you want to say that mother is shopping! You can also not say *”Ibu membersihkan” when you want to say that mother does the cleaning. You can only use these verbs transitively: “Ibu membeli roti” (Mother buys bread), “Ibu membersihkan dapur” (Mother cleans the kitchen). Transitive verbs can be distinguished from intransitive verbs in that they can take an object, and that they can be converted into passive voice (the kitchen was cleaned by mother). 1. melihat

a. to wash (something)

2. membaca

b. to read (something)

3. membeli

c. to watch (something)

4. membersihkan

d. to write (something)

5. mencari

e. to search; to look for (something)

6. mencuci

f. to see; to look at (something)

7. mendengarkan

g. to clean something

8. menonton

h. to open something

9. menulis

i. to buy something

10. membuka

j. to listen to something

Latihan 13 Ber- Verbs Ber- verbs are intransitive. They can never take an object. A limited number of ber- verbs, however, can take a compliment: “Saya bermain tenis”, “Dia belajar bahasa Indonesia”. As ber- verbs are intransitive, they cannot be converted into passive voice. 1. belajar

a. to ask a question

2. bekerja

b. to be such-and-such an age..

3. berjalan-jalan

c. to chat

4. berbelanja

d. to do gymnastics; to work out

Lesson 42 5. bermain

e. to go for a walk/stroll

6. bercakap-cakap

f. to go shopping

7. bertemu

g. to meet

8. bersenam

h. to play

9. bersembahyang

i. to take a break, relax

10. bertanya

j. to stand, stand up

11. berumur

k. to study, learn

12. berenang

l. to swim, to go swimming

13. berbicara

m. to talk

14. berdiri

n. to work

15. beristirahat

o. to pray

Latihan 14—Teka Teki Silang (TTS) Mendatar: 3. to try to do something 4. price 6. to go shopping (coll) 7. to go through, happen, so therefore, thus 8. we (inclusive) 11. to want (to...) 12. to watch something 13. to look for; to seek 14. for; in order to 16. electronic 18. all okay; no worries 19. to watch sth (coll) 20. to look for sth (coll) Menurun: 1. clothes; clothing 2. after (coll) 3. to see; to look at 5. device; tool 9. a week 10. to leave 15. stylish; trendy 17. we (exclusive)) 18. shirt

Lesson 43

43 Asking Why

Aims • To practise asking and answering mengapa and kenapa (why) questions. • To practise using dulu and tadi.

Vocabulary review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings. bangun

to wake up

mengambil

to fetch something

dosen

lecturer

sampai

until

kalo

colloquial for kalau

sembahyang

to pray

kotor

dirty

sulit

difcult

melihat

to see, to look at

tua

old

mencari

to look for

terkenal

famous

Asking “Why?” and Answering “Because”... Listen to Sound File 043-01. You may read the transcription and the translation if this helps you to understand the dialogue better.

Eka

Besok pagi saya akan bangun jam enam.

Tomorrow morning I’m going to get up at six o’clock.

Mengapa?

Why?

Karena ada kuliah jam delapan.

Because there’s a lecture at eight o’clock.

Jam delapan? Pagi sekali! Mengapa Anda harus kuliah jam delapan pagi?

Eight o’clock? That’s very early! Why do you go to lectures at 8 o’clock in the morning?

Karena Ibu Dosen lebih suka memberikan kuliah pagi-pagi.

Because our lecturer (“Madam Lecturer”) prefers to give lectures early in the morning.

Dian

Lesson 43 Mengapa (why) and karena (because) go together. Questions with mengapa in them usually demand an answer with karena. You can also use mengapa in conjunction with tidak, like the English “why not?” and “why don’t you ...?” Study these examples. Saya minta teh. I’ll have tea, thanks. Mengapa Anda tidak minum kopi? Why don’t you have cofee? Karena saya tidak suka kopi. Because I don’t like cofee Mengapa tidak? Why not? Karena, kalau saya minum kopi, saya tidak bisa tidur. Because if I drink cofee I can’t sleep.

Exercise 43-01 Answer the following questions with a complete sentence. Use your imagination: don’t answer Saya tidak tahu. Each of your answers should have karena in it somewhere. If you get stuck you may fnd some of the following verbs and verbal phrases useful in writing your answers. harus, ingin, ingin sekali, tidak dapat, tidak bisa, tidak boleh, mau, tidak mau, suka, suka sekali, tidak suka, ada, tidak ada, tidak punya 1. Kenapa Anda bangun jam setengah lima pagi? 2. Kenapa Anda tidak suka berjalan-jalan pada pagi hari? 3. Mengapa biasanya Anda mendengarkan radio pada pagi hari? 4. Mengapa Anda tidak makan tadi pagi? 5. Mengapa Anda pergi ke kampus naik taksi? 6. Mengapa Gatot tidak mau menonton flm dengan kita? 7. Mengapa Anda tidak bermain tenis tadi siang? 8. Mengapa Anda membeli baju itu? 9. Kenapa Anda belajar di Universitas Gadjah Mada? 10. Kenapa Anda tidak suka tinggal di New York?

Exercise 43-02 Imagine that you have made a negative judgement about something. Justify your opinion with a sentence beginning with karena, and containing the word or phrase given in brackets. Study the example frst. Makanan di restoran Padaran Luhur tidak enak! Tidak enak? Kenapa? [tidak ada] Karena di restoran Padaran Luhur tidak ada ayam goreng.

Lesson 43 1. Saya tidak suka berkunjung ke kota Surabaya. Mengapa? Surabaya indah sekali! [tidak ada] Karena .............................................................................. 2. Kasman bukan teman yang baik. Hah!? Kenapa? [tidak mau] Karena .............................................................................. 3. Saya tidak mau kuliah di Universitas Widya Buana. Mengapa? Universitas Widya Buana terkenal. [tidak banyak] Karena .............................................................................. 4. Saya tidak suka makan kue coklat. Aduh! Kenapa? [manis sekali] Karena .............................................................................. 5. Saya kira Melbourne bukan kota yang indah. Mengapa? [tidak banyak] Karena ..............................................................................

Dulu and Tadi Dulu and tadi are two useful words that help you talk more precisely about the sequence of events in time. Neither word has an exact one-on-one equivalent in English so to master them you will have to observe them carefully and remember how they are used. They are both very common words, so you will come across plenty of examples to help you get a feel for what they mean and how they are used. As you learned in Lesson 29, dulu can mean “frst” referring to something done before something else happens, or before you do something else. When dulu is used in this sense it follows the verb in a clause, or it follows a noun or adverb. Saya mau mandi dulu. I’d like to take a bath frst (before doing anything else) Dulu can also mean something like “for the time being”, or “for the moment”. Saya mau tinggal di sini dulu. I want to stay here for the moment. Duduk dulu. Take a seat for the time being. Dulu also means something like “in former times”, “a long time ago” and also “used to”. When it is used in this sense it usually comes at the beginning of a clause. Dulu saya tinggal di Surabaya. I used to live in Surabaya (a long time ago). Dulu ada bioskop di sini, sekarang tidak ada! Formerly there was a cinema here, now there isn’t! Tadi means something like “earlier today”, “a short time ago”, “just now”.

Lesson 43 Tadi saya melihat Ibu Simandjuntak di pasar. I saw Mrs Simandjuntak at the market earlier today. Ke mana tadi? Where did you get to just now? Tadi is also very often used in phrases that refer to the immediate past periods or divisions of the current day (including the evening of the previous day, i.e. tadi malam ‘last night’), when you are “looking back” to earlier parts of the day. Tadi siang This (late morning and early) afternoon Tadi malam Last night, yesterday night

Cara Indonesia: A New Day Begins at Sundown Interestingly, the phrase tadi malam, which is usually translated “last night” or “yesterday night”, actually refers to an earlier part of the current day, like tadi siang and tadi pagi. The reason for this is that traditionally Indonesians perceived a new day as beginning at sunset, not sunrise as we usually do. For Indonesians in former times (and to a large extent still today), a new “day” began with malam, and continued with pagi, siang and sore. So in the context of Indonesian culture it is perfectly logical to say tadi malam as if yesterday night were a previous part of the current day.

Ari in Conversation with Ibu Gah at her Boarding House Listen to Sound File 043-02 – a conversation between Ibu Gah, the landlady at a student boarding house (rumah kos), and Ari, one of her student lodgers. Listen to Sound File and read the transcription until you have memorised the dialogue. Without looking at the transcription, try to say the Indonesian text out loud making sure that you understand everything and trying to remember as much of the narrative as you can. Keep practising until you can say the Indonesian without error. Check this lesson’s vocabulary cards when you see a new word you don’t know. Observe (among other things) how dulu and tadi are used, as well as mengapa and karena. Notice too that Ibu Gah “speaks down” to Ari using the second-person pronoun kamu, but Ari “speaks up” to Ibu Gah, addressing her with the more formal and respectful Ibu (shortened to Bu in the vocative). ARI

BU GAH

Selamat pagi, Bu. Sudah bangun, ya?

Sudah, Ari. Sudah lama. Saya bangun tadi sebelum kamu. Biasanya saya bangun jam lima.

Aduh, pagi-pagi sekali, Bu. Mengapa Ibu bangun pagi-pagi?

Karena saya sembahyang dulu, lalu saya keluar untuk berjalan-jalan.

O begitu. Ibu suka berjalan-jalan pada pagi hari?

Suka sekali. Biasanya saya berjalan sekeliling taman. Saya suka duduk-duduk di taman untuk mendengarkan burung-burung.

Apakah banyak burung di taman?

Banyak dan bermacam-macam. Ramai sekali mereka. O ya, Ari, tadi malam kamu pergi ke mana?

Lesson 43 Saya pergi ke perpustakaan untuk belajar, Bu. Lalu, saya pulang dan belajar lagi di kamar. Tadi malam saya belajar sampai jam dua belas.

Aduh! Sampai jam dua belas? Kenapa kamu belajar sampai tengah malam?

Karena saya mengambil mata kuliah hukum, Bu. Hukum cukup sulit.

Sulit? Mengapa?

Karena kami harus membaca banyak buku. Juga kami harus belajar bahasa Belanda.

Harus belajar bahasa Belanda? Mengapa?

Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di Indonesia, dan mereka membuat undang-undang. Kami harus tahu tentang undang-undang itu.

O begitu. Permisi dulu, ya Ari. Saya mau ke dapur sekarang untuk masak. Kamu mau makan apa?

Nasi putih dan ikan saja, Bu, seperti biasa.

Baik. Biasanya kamu minum apa, Ari?

Kopi, Bu. Saya suka sekali minum kopi pada pagi hari.

O ya, Ari, apakah kamu mau membantu saya? Halaman rumah cukup kotor. Apakah kamu bisa membersihkan halaman untuk saya?

Tentu saja bisa, Bu. Tetapi nanti siang saja, ki- Baik. Terima kasih banyak, Ari. ra-kira jam sebelas. Saya mau mandi dan makan dulu. After having listened to the sound fle and read the transcription, do the memorization exercise for vocabulary practice below. Read the dialogue out loud several times until the words come smoothly of your tongue in a relaxed, idiomatic way. Then cover up the left and right columns and read the middle column flling in the empty spaces from memory. If you can’t remember the word that should go in an empty space take a peek at the left hand column. When you can correctly read the narrative in the middle column cover up the left and middle columns and read the right hand column in the same way. Selamat pagi, Bu. Sudah ba- Selamat _____, Bu. Sudah ngun, ya? bangun, ya?

Selamat _____, Bu. Sudah ______, ya?

Sudah, Ari. Sudah lama. Saya bangun tadi sebelum kamu. Biasanya saya bangun jam lima.

Sudah, Ari. Sudah ____. Saya Sudah, Ari. Sudah ____. Saya bangun tadi sebelum ____. ______ tadi sebelum ____. BiBiasanya saya _____ jam asanya saya _____ jam ____. lima.

Aduh, pagi-pagi sekali, Bu. Mengapa Ibu bangun pagi-pagi?

Aduh, pagi-pagi sekali, Bu. Aduh, pagi-_____ sekali, Bu. Mengapa Ibu _____ pagi-pa- _______ Ibu _____ pagi-pagi? gi?

Karena saya sembahyang dulu, lalu saya keluar untuk berjalan-jalan.

Karena saya _______ dulu, lalu saya keluar untuk berjalan-______.

O begitu. Ibu suka berjalan-jalan pada pagi hari?

O _____. Ibu suka berO _____. Ibu _______ berjalan-jalan pada pagi _____? jalan-jalan pada pagi _____?

Karena saya _______ dulu, lalu saya _______ untuk berjalan-______.

Lesson 43 Suka sekali. Biasanya saya berjalan sekeliling taman. Saya suka duduk-duduk di taman untuk mendengarkan burung-burung.

____ sekali. Biasanya saya berjalan sekeliling taman. Saya suka duduk-duduk di ___ untuk mendengarkan burung-______.

Apakah banyak burung di ta- Apakah banyak burung di man? _____?

____ sekali. Biasanya saya berjalan sekeliling ______. Saya suka duduk-duduk di ___ untuk _______ burung______. Apakah banyak _______ di _____?

Banyak dan bermacam-macam. Ramai sekali mereka. O ya, Ari, tadi malam kamu pergi ke mana?

Banyak dan bermacam_____. Ramai sekali mereka. O ya, Ari, ____ malam kamu pergi ke mana?

Banyak dan bermacam_____. ______ sekali mereka. O ya, Ari, ____ malam kamu pergi ke _______?

Saya pergi ke perpustakaan untuk belajar, Bu. Lalu, saya pulang dan belajar lagi di kamar. Tadi malam saya belajar sampai jam dua belas.

Saya ____ ke perpustakaan untuk belajar, Bu. Lalu, saya pulang dan belajar lagi di kamar. Tadi _____ saya belajar sampai jam dua belas.

Saya ____ ke perpustakaan untuk ______, Bu. Lalu, saya ______ dan belajar lagi di kamar. Tadi _____ saya belajar sampai jam dua belas.

Aduh! Sampai jam dua belas? Kenapa kamu belajar sampai tengah malam?

Aduh! Sampai jam dua belas? Kenapa kamu ______ sampai tengah malam?

Aduh! _______ jam dua belas? Kenapa kamu ______ sampai tengah ________?

Karena saya mengambil mata kuliah hukum, Bu. Hukum cukup sulit.

Karena saya mengambil mata kuliah ______, Bu. Hukum cukup sulit.

Karena saya ________ mata kuliah ______, Bu. Hukum cukup ________.

Sulit? Mengapa?

Sulit? Mengapa?

Sulit? ________?

Karena kami harus membaca Karena kami harus _______ ________ kami harus _______ banyak buku. Juga kami ha- banyak buku. Juga kami ha- banyak buku. Juga kami harus belajar bahasa Belanda. rus _____ bahasa Belanda. rus _____ bahasa _________. Harus belajar bahasa Belan- Harus belajar bahasa Belan- Harus belajar bahasa da? Mengapa? da? ________? ________? ________? Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di Indonesia, dan mereka membuat undang-undang. Kami harus tahu tentang undang-undang itu.

Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di _______, dan mereka membuat undang-undang. Kami harus _____ tentang undang-undang itu.

Karena ____ orang Belanda berkuasa di _______, dan mereka _______ undang-undang. Kami harus _____ tentang undang-undang itu.

O begitu. Permisi dulu, ya Ari. Saya mau ke dapur sekarang untuk masak. Kamu mau makan apa?

O begitu. Permisi dulu, ya Ari. Saya mau ke ______ sekarang _____ masak. Kamu mau makan apa?

O begitu. _______ dulu, ya Ari. Saya mau ke ______ sekarang _____ masak. Kamu mau _______ apa?

Nasi putih dan ikan saja, Bu, Nasi putih dan ikan saja, Bu, Nasi ______ dan ____ saja, seperti biasa. seperti ______. Bu, seperti ______. Baik. Biasanya kamu minum Baik. Biasanya _____ minum _______. Biasanya _____ miapa, Ari? apa, Ari? num apa, Ari? Kopi, Bu. Saya suka sekali minum kopi pada pagi hari.

Kopi, Bu. Saya suka sekali minum kopi _____ pagi hari.

Kopi, Bu. Saya ____ sekali minum kopi ______ pagi hari.

Lesson 43 O ya, Ari, apakah kamu mau membantu saya? Halaman rumah cukup kotor. Apakah kamu bisa membersihkan halaman untuk saya?

O ya, Ari, apakah kamu mau _______ saya? Halaman rumah cukup kotor. Apakah kamu bisa membersihkan _______ untuk saya?

O ya, Ari, apakah kamu mau _______ saya? Halaman rumah cukup ______. Apakah kamu bisa membersihkan _______ untuk _______?

Tentu saja bisa, Bu. Tetapi nanti siang saja, kira-kira jam sebelas. Saya mau mandi dan makan dulu.

Tentu saja bisa, Bu. Tetapi nanti ______ saja, kira-kira jam sebelas. Saya mau mandi dan _______ dulu.

Tentu saja ______, Bu. Tetapi nanti ______ saja, kira-kira jam sebelas. Saya mau ________ dan _______ dulu.

Baik. Terima kasih banyak, Ari.

Baik. Terima _____ banyak, Ari.

Baik. Terima _____ _____, Ari.

Role Play: An Ibu Kos Interrogates her Lodgers Back in Lesson 37 you acted out a role play titled “What Time Did You Get Home Last Night?” Now repeat this role play with a few variations and refnements. This time, the landlady (ibu kos) at a student boarding house (rumah kos) interrogates two or more of her lodgers about where they went and what they got up to the previous night. In many rumah kos there is a curfew and the ibu kos takes a motherly and often severe interest in her lodgers. So make her strict and implacably inquisitive. Go back to Lesson 37 and refresh your memory on the vocabulary and sentences that you can use to talk about what someone did “last night”. In addition to these resources, you should make intensive use of the words kami, tadi malam, mengapa, kenapa and karena that you have practised in this lesson and the previous one. For example, the ibu kos may ask: Kenapa kamu pulang jam dua belas tadi malam? Why did you come home at 12 o’clock last night? Kenapa kamu pulang naik sepeda motor? Kenapa kamu tidak pulang naik bus? Why did you come home by motorbike? Why didn’t you come home by bus? The cornered lodgers will answer with explanations, excuses or “unlikely stories” beginning with karena and will refer to themselves collectively with the pronoun kami. Karena kami pergi ke gereja, dan sesudah itu kami pergi ke perpustakaan. Because we went to church, and after that we went to the library. Karena tadi malam tidak ada bus. Kami tidak punya uang dan tidak ada taksi. Because last night there were no buses. We had no money and there were no taxis. You have to concentrate on two main tasks in acting this (and any other) role play. First, you must concentrate very carefully on speaking smoothly and absolutely correctly. Second, you must let your own creativity loose on the situation, bringing your command of Indonesian to life by embellishing the role play with variation, humour and your own personality.

Kamu masih ngorok aku udah bangun You are about to read a conversation somewhat like the conversation between Ari and Ibu Gah. But this time Ari is talking to Nuning, another student who lives in the same rumah kos and who is about the same age as Ari. They speak to each other politely, but in the relaxed, occasion ally slangy, idiom of young people in Central Java. To highlight the special features of their colloquial style let’s put their conversation side-by-side with a version of the conversation in formal In-

Lesson 43 donesian. Note the diferences in vocabulary. The pronouns saya and Anda are replaced by aku and kamu and the formal terms sekali, mengapa, membuat, and dengan are replaced respectively by banget, kenapa, bikin, and sama. Notice too how colloquial Indonesian uses shortened forms, especially by dropping the ber- and me- prefxes on verbs. Other words are shortened too, or deleted: apakah becomes apa or disappears altogether, saja becomes aja, sudah becomes udah, and terima kasih becomes makasih. Enjoy! Listen to Sound File 043-03. Informal

Formal

Pagi, Ri. Udah bangun, ya?

Selamat pagi, Ari. Sudah bangun, ya?

Udah. Udah lama. Kamu masih ngorok aku udah bangun. Tapi aku keluar untuk jalan-jalan dulu.

Sudah. Sudah lama. Saya bangun tadi sebelum Anda. Tetapi saya keluar untuk berjalan-jalan dulu.

Kalo pagi, kamu suka jalan-jalan?

Apakah Anda suka berjalan-jalan pada pagi hari?

Suka banget. Biasanya aku jalan sekeliling taman. Kalo pagi aku suka duduk-duduk di taman untuk mendengarkan burung-burung.

Suka sekali. Biasanya saya berjalan sekeliling taman. Saya suka duduk-duduk di taman pada pagi hari untuk mendengarkan burung-burung.

Apa banyak burung di taman?

Apakah banyak burung di taman?

Banyak dan macam-macam. Ramai banget.

Banyak dan bermacam-macam. Ramai sekali.

Jam berapa kamu bangun?

Jam berapa Anda bangun?

Biasanya aku bangun jam lima. Tapi tadi aku bangun jam setengah enam.

Biasanya saya bangun jam lima. Tetapi tadi saya bangun jam setengah enam.

O, aku masih tidur tadi jam setengah enam. Tadi malam aku belajar sampai jam dua belas.

O, saya masih tidur tadi jam setengah enam. Tadi malam saya belajar sampai jam dua belas.

Aduh! Sampai jam dua belas? Kenapa kamu belajar sampai jam dua belas?

Aduh! Sampai jam dua belas? Mengapa Anda belajar sampai jam dua belas?

Karena aku ambil mata kuliah hukum. Hukum cukup sulit.

Karena saya mengambil mata kuliah hukum. Hukum cukup sulit.

Sulit? Kenapa?

Sulit? Mengapa?

Karena kami harus baca banyak buku. Kami juga harus belajar bahasa Belanda.

Karena kami harus membaca banyak buku. Kami juga harus belajar bahasa Belanda.

Harus belajar bahasa Belanda? Kenapa?

Harus belajar bahasa Belanda? Mengapa?

Lesson 43 Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di Indonesia, dan mereka bikin undangundang.

Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di Indonesia, dan mereka membuat undangundang.

O gitu. Eh, Ning, kamu udah mandi, belum? Aku boleh pakai kamar mandi sekarang?

O begitu. Eh, Nuning, Anda sudah mandi atau belum? Apakah saya boleh pakai kamar mandi sekarang?

Boleh. Aku udah mandi tadi. Kamar mandi udah kosong.

Silakan. Saya sudah mandi tadi. Kamar mandi sudah kosong.

Makasih. Kamu mau masak hari ini?

Terima kasih. Apakah Anda akan masak hari ini?

Ya. Aku mau ke dapur sekarang untuk masak. Kamu mau makan apa?

Ya. Saya mau ke dapur sekarang untuk masak. Anda mau makan apa?

Nasi putih sama ikan aja, seperti biasa.

Nasi putih dan ikan saja, seperti biasa.

Beres. Biasanya kamu minum apa, Ri?

Baik. Biasanya Anda minum apa, Ari?

Kopi. Kamu udah bersihkan halaman tadi?

Kopi. O ya, apakah Anda sudah membersihkan halaman tadi?

Belum. Apa kamu mau bersihkan halaman untuk aku?

Belum. Apakah Anda mau membersihkan halaman untuk saya?

Bisa. Tapi aku mau mandi dan makan dulu.

Boleh. Tetapi saya mau mandi dan makan dulu.

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. kami

to watch

sampai

to take

untuk

to wake up

melihat

until

bangun

university teacher

menonton

to see

dosen

we (excl.)

membeli

dirty

kotor

for; in order to

membersihkan

all okay

beres

festivity

mencari

famous

tua

to look for

mengambil

to clean

pesta

to buy

terkenal

old

Lesson 43

Latihan 2—Menjodohkan Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1. ingin

a. can

2. ingin sekali

b. will

3. mau

c. to really like, to love (doing something)

4. suka

d. must, have to

5. suka sekali

e. to really wish/want (to...)

6. akan

f. to like (someone or something)

7. harus

g. to wish/want (to...)

8. bisa

h. to want (something), to want (to do something)

Latihan 3—Rangkai Kata Urutkan kata-kata berikut menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti di bawah ini: 1. “Why do you wake up at 4:30?” Mengapa—lima—Anda—setengah—jam—bangun—pagi? 2. “Why don’t you like to go for a walk in the morning?” Mengapa—suka—pada—tidak—pagi—Anda—berjalan-jalan—hari? 3. “Why doesn’t Gatot want to watch a flm with us?” Mengapa—Gatot—mau—flm—dengan—tidak—menonton—kita? 4. “Why do you usually listen to the radio in the morning?” Mengapa—biasanya—mendengarkan—pagi—Anda—radio—pada—hari? 5. “Why don’t you like to live in New York?” Mengapa—tinggal—Anda—tidak—di—suka—New York?

Latihan 4—Isian Mengapa (why) and karena (because) go together. Questions with mengapa usually demand an answer with karena. You can also use mengapa in conjunction with tidak, like the English ‘why not?’ and ‘why don’t you ...?’ Complete the following dialogue using six of the following eight words: bangun—dosen— harus—karena—memberikan—kenapa—pergi—saya A: Besok pagi saya akan ______ jam enam. B: ______? A: ______ ada kuliah jam delapan.

Lesson 43 B: Jam delapan? Pagi sekali! Mengapa Anda ______ kuliah jam delapan pagi? A: Karena Ibu ______ lebih suka ______ kuliah pagi-pagi.

Latihan 5—Buat Kalimat: dulu As you learned in Lesson 29, dulu can mean ‘frst’ referring to something done before something else happens, or before you do something else. When dulu is used in this sense it follows the verb in a clause, or it follows a noun or adverb. Dulu can also mean something like ‘for the time being’, or ‘for the moment’. Dulu also means something like ‘in former times’, ‘a long time ago’ and also ‘used to’. When it is used in this sense it usually comes at the beginning of a clause. Translate the following sentences into good Indonesian using “dulu”. 1. I want to stay here for the moment. 2. I used to live here (a long time ago). 3. Take a seat for the time being. 4. I’d like to take a bath frst (before doing anything else). 5. Formerly there was a cinema here.

Latihan 6—Pilihan Ganda: dulu vs tadi Complete the following sentences using either dulu or tadi. Remember that dulu means “in former times”, “a long time ago” and “used to” whereas tadi means “earlier today”, and “a short time ago”. 1. ......... saya suka bersenam, tetapi sekarang saya tidak bisa. Saya sudah tua! A. Dulu B. Tadi 2. Aduh! Saya kotor sekali! Saya mau mandi .... A. dulu B. tadi 3. ......... malam mereka pergi ke pesta di rumah teman. A. Dulu B. Tadi 4. Katanya, ada orang yang mencari saya ......... pagi. A. dulu B. tadi 5. Maaf, saya tidak bisa ikut. Saya harus belajar ......... A. dulu B. tadi

Lesson 43 6. Sekarang saya tinggal di Jakarta, tetapi ......... saya tinggal di Prancis. A. dulu B. tadi 7. ......... siang mereka membersihkan halaman rumah. A. Dulu B. Tadi 8. Saya harus mengambil uang ......... sebelum berangkat. A. dulu B. tadi 9. Mereka datang ......... malam. A. dulu B. tadi 10. ........., kira-kira jam sembilan, saya melihat Yudi minum kopi di warung. A. Dulu B. Tadi

Latihan 7—Menjodohkan Dengarkanlah rekaman 043-04 dan pilihlah arti pertanyaan-pertanyaan itu. 1.

a. Are there many fowers in the yard?

2.

b. Ari, will you cook today?

3.

c. Can you help washing the dishes?

4.

d. Do you like to do sports in the late afternoon?

5.

e. Good morning, Ari. You’ve already eaten, haven’t you?

6.

f. What do you usually cook, Ari?

7.

g. What time do you go to bed?

8.

h. Why do you have to study Dutch?

9.

i. Why do you work until 21:30?

10.

j. Why is the political science lecture so hard?

Latihan 8—Menjodohkan: Informal & Formal Match the informal items with formal items. 1. udah

a. membuat

2. kalo pagi

b. saja

3. banget

c. membersihkan

4. bersihkan

d. berjalan-jalan

5. kenapa

e. terima kasih

6. sama

f. mengapa

Lesson 43 7. makasih

g. membaca

8. bikin

h. sekali

9. jalan-jalan

i. pada pagi hari

10. aja

j. dan, dengan

11. baca

k. bermacam-macam

12. ambil

l. sudah

13. macam-macam

m. begitu

14. gitu

n. mengambil

Latihan 9—Isian: Informal vs Formal Replace all informal and slangy words with formal Indonesian words. For example: the word aku is replaced with saya; and the word kamu is replaced with Anda. Listen to Sound File 043-05 to check your answers. Percakapan Ari dan Nuning I Ari

Pagi, Ri. Udah bangun, ya?

Selamat pagi, Ari. ______ bangun, ya?

Nuning

Udah. Udah lama. Kamu masih ngorok ______. ______ lama. Saya bangun tadi sebeaku udah bangun. Tapi aku keluar un- lum Anda. Tetapi saya keluar untuk ______ tuk jalan-jalan dulu. dulu.

Ari

Kalo pagi, kamu suka jalan-jalan?

Nuning

Suka banget. Biasanya aku jalan seke- Suka ______. Biasanya saya ______ sekeliling liling taman. Kalo pagi aku suka dutaman. Saya suka duduk-duduk di taman duk-duduk di taman untuk mende______ untuk mendengarkan burung-burung. ngarkan burung-burung.

Ari

Apa banyak burung di taman?

Apakah banyak burung di taman?

Nuning

Banyak dan macam-macam. Ramai banget.

Banyak dan ______. Ramai ______.

Ari

Jam berapa kamu bangun?

Jam berapa Anda bangun?

Nuning

Biasanya aku bangun jam lima. Tapi tadi aku bangun jam setengah enam.

Biasanya saya bangun jam lima. Tetapi tadi saya bangun jam setengah enam.

Ari

O, aku masih tidur tadi jam setengah enam. Tadi malam aku belajar sampai jam dua belas.

O, saya masih tidur tadi jam setengah enam. Tadi malam saya belajar sampai jam dua belas.

Nuning

Aduh! Sampai jam dua belas? Kenapa kamu belajar sampai jam dua belas?

Aduh! Sampai jam dua belas? ______ Anda belajar sampai jam dua belas?

Ari

Karena aku ambil mata kuliah hukum. Hukum cukup sulit.

Karena saya ______ mata kuliah hukum. Hukum cukup sulit.

Apakah Anda suka ______ ______?

Lesson 43

Latihan 10—Isian: Informal vs Formal Replace all informal and slangy words with formal Indonesian words; then listen to Sound File 043-06 to check your answers. Percakapan Ari dan Nuning II Ari

Sulit? Kenapa?

Sulit? ______?

Nuning

Karena kami harus baca banyak buku. Karena kami harus ______ banyak buku. Kami Juga kami harus belajar bahasa Belan- juga harus belajar bahasa Belanda. da.

Ari

Harus belajar bahasa Belanda? Kenapa?

Harus belajar bahasa Belanda? ______?

Nuning

Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di Indonesia, dan mereka bikin undang-undang.

Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di Indonesia, dan mereka ______ undang-undang.

Ari

O gitu. Eh, Ning, kamu udah mandi, belum? Aku boleh pakai kamar mandi sekarang?

O ______. Eh, Nuning, Anda ______ mandi atau belum? Apakah saya boleh pakai kamar mandi sekarang?

Nuning

Silakan. Aku udah mandi tadi. Kamar mandi udah kosong.

Silakan. Saya ______ mandi tadi. Kamar mandi ______ kosong.

Ari

Makasih. Kamu mau masak hari ini?

______. Apakah Anda akan masak hari ini?

Nuning

Ya. Aku mau ke dapur sekarang untuk masak. Kamu mau makan apa?

Ya. Saya mau ke dapur sekarang untuk masak. Anda mau makan apa?

Ari

Nasi putih sama ikan aja, seperti biasa. Nasi putih ______ ikan saja, seperti biasa.

Nuning

Beres. Biasanya kamu minum apa, Ri? ______. Biasanya Anda minum apa, Ari?

Ari

Kopi. Kamu udah bersihkan halaman tadi?

Nuning

Belum. Apa kamu mau bersihkan hala- Belum. Apakah Anda mau membersihkan haman untuk aku? laman untuk saya?

Ari

Bisa. Tapi aku mau mandi dan makan dulu.

Kopi. O ya, apakah Anda ______ ______ halaman tadi?

Boleh. Tetapi saya mau mandi dan makan dulu.

Latihan 11—Menjodohkan Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1. pagi-pagi

a. earlier this afternoon

2. tadi pagi

b. a subject of study at a university

3. bahasa Belanda

c. the Dutch language

4. mata kuliah

d. last night

5. tadi siang

e. earlier this morning

Lesson 43

6. duduk-duduk

f. the landlady of a boarding house

7. ibu kos

g. very early in the morning

8. tadi malam

h. to sit around leisurely

Latihan 12—Teka Teki Silang (TTS) Mendatar: 2. used to; in former times 6. to reign, rule 7. the law 8. to make sth (informal) 12. old 13. morning 14. why (formal) 15. to give (something to someone) Menurun: 1. because 2. a lecturer (at a university) 3. difcult 4. famous 5. to make sth (formal) 6. to visit 9. to study at a university 10. to look for; to search 11. to get up (out of bed)

Lesson 44

44 Tertawa Di Pasar Burung

Aims • To practise using the word pandai. • To comprehend the subtle diference between pandai and pintar • To read a story and perform a role play in which mengapa, karena and pandai are used and the words for colours revised.

Vocabulary review

Kandang burung di Pasar Burung. © Eric Lafforgue

Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings. berlari

to run

menulis

to write

berenang

to swim

mulai

to begin, to start

bertanya

to ask a question

pakaian

clothes, clothing

betul

correct

pasti

sure, defnite

cantik

pretty, beautiful

pegawai

employee

cukup

enough

pembantu

assistant, helper

hanya

only

pulau

island

lebih

more

sayuran

vegetable

mahal

expensive

tentang

about

majalah

magazine

tertawa

laugh

mempunyai

to have

To Be Good At... The word pandai means “to be good at”, or “skilled at (doing something)”. Study how pandai is used in these sentences. Dia pandai bermain bulu tangkis. She’s good at playing badminton. Dulu saya pandai menyanyi. I used to be good at singing.

Lesson 44 Siapa yang pandai membaca bahasa Arab? Who’s good at reading Arabic? Pandai can be “tweaked” in various ways to express variations on the idea of being good at something. pandai sekali very good at

Dia pandai sekali membuat pakaian. She’s very good at making clothes.

cukup pandai quite good at

Dia cukup pandai menyanyi seperti Madonna. She’s quite good at singing like Madonna.

kurang pandai not much good at

Kami kurang pandai bermain bulu tangkis. We’re not much good at (playing) badminton.

tidak begitu pandai not really very good at

Saya tidak begitu pandai masak sayuran. I’m not really very good at cooking vegetables.

tidak pandai no good at

Saya tidak pandai menulis dalam bahasa Jepang. I’m no good at writing in Japanese.

sama sekali tidak pandai to be totally hopeless at

Saya sama sekali tidak pandai masak. I’m a hopeless cook.

lebih pandai to be better at

Mereka lebih pandai bermain sepak bola. They are better at soccer.

Cara Indonesia: “Clever” in English and in Indonesian Pandai often means “to be good at” but in certain contexts it can also be translated by the English terms “clever”, “bright”, “smart”, “intelligent” etc. even “knowledgeable”. If pandai is used in that meaning then it is synonym with pintar ’smart’. Sarah anak pandai/pintar. Sarah is a bright child. Saya kira Bupati kita kurang pandai/pintar. Tetapi pembantunya pandai/pintar sekali. I don’t think our Bupati is that clever. But his assistant is very clever. The Indonesian pandai difers in a very fundamental respect from English words like “clever”, “bright”, “smart”, “intelligent”, “knowledgeable” etc., which, in Indonesian, are better translated as pintar. In English “clever” describes an innate attribute – something that is always with you. But the Indonesian pandai is more a skill or a capacity that can come and go. You can get a feel for this in these sentences. Anak kami sudah bersekolah, sudah mulai pintar. Our daughter goes to school now, she’s beginning to show signs of intelligence. Dulu saya pandai bermain piano, tetapi sekarang tidak lagi. I used to be good at playing the piano, but not any more. To illustrate how pandai can be used, here is a description of the skills and talents of a group of people (Sound File 044-01)

A

yah saya cukup istimewa. Ia pandai menulis. Dia menulis tentang politik dan ekonomi di majalah dan surat kabar. Dia pernah menulis buku tentang ekonomi desa di pulau Timor. Ibu saya juga istimewa. Dia pandai sekali berdagang. Dia membeli biji kopi di desa,

Lesson 44

lalu ia menjual biji itu ke pabrik kopi di kota. Adik saya Ningsih cukup pandai bermain gitar dan menyanyi. Ia pandai menyanyikan lagu-lagu pop. Katanya dia ingin sekali ikut acara Indonesian Idol di televisi. Saya sama sekali tidak pandai menulis, berdagang atau bermain musik. Tetapi saya cukup pandai berolahraga. Saya bermain bulu tangkis dan bola voli. Saya juga cukup pandai berenang dan bersenam. Saya ingin menjadi guru olahraga di sekolah menengah pertama. Teman saya Sari juga pandai berolahraga. Kadang-kadang kami bermain bulu tangkis di gedung olahraga di dekat rumah keluarga. Biasanya saya menang tetapi kadang-kadang saya kalah. Sari memang pandai sekali bermain bulu tangkis. Tetapi dia ingin menjadi pegawai negeri, bukan guru seperti saya.

Exercise 44-01 Taking the passage on the previous page as your beginning point, write a description of the skills and talents of a group of family and/or friends. Lift sentences and phrases from the passage, but change them so that they refect the profle of the group you are describing. Listed below are some of the verbs you can use to do this, grouped into eight categories of important skills. Each of the items in the list will be preceded by pandai, tidak pandai, cukup pandai etc. Write at least twenty sentences. • Music menyanyi bermain musik / gitar menyanyikan lagu... • Sport berolahraga bermain tenis / bulu tangkis / sepak bola / bola voli bersenam berenang berlari • Writing menulis menulis surat / buku / novel / ... menulis tentang politik / ekonomi / flm / musik / olahraga / masakan Prancis / .. • Speaking foreign languages berbicara dalam bahasa Belanda / bahasa Indonesia / bahasa Jepang / ... bercakap-cakap / menulis / membaca dalam bahasa ... • Cooking masak masak nasi goreng / ayam goreng / sayuran / tempe dan tahu / makanan Cina / ... membuat sate / roti / kue / ... • Working with your hands membuat alat-alat rumah tangga / meja / kursi / pakaian / baju / ... memperbaiki rumah / komputer / mobil / sepeda / sepeda motor / ... • Shopping berbelanja mencari pakaian yang indah / restoran yang enak / toko yang murah / ... membeli pakaian yang keren / makanan yang enak /

Lesson 44 • Doing business berdagang membeli dan menjual rumah / buah-buahan / mobil / alat-alat rumah tangga / ... Don’t forget to make your narrative interesting by (i) referring to some of the accomplishments and ambitions of your group, and (ii) by describing what members of the group don’t do particularly well.

Tertawa di Pasar Burung Indonesia is burdened with a huge government bureaucracy. Many of the country’s bureaucrats are hard working and not paid nearly enough for the good work they do. But quite a few are probably paid more than is justifed by the work they do. Plenty of sarcastic and scurrilous stories circulate about self-important, lazy ofcials who don’t deserve the money they are paid. The following story was told by the Rektor (President or Vice-Chancellor) of an Indonesian university. He happens to be a particularly efcient and hard working Rektor, but nevertheless he told this anti-bureaucracy joke against himself. It was intended to explain in a self-deprecating way that, as a bureaucrat with an impressive job description, he gets the top money at his university while (so he modestly said) there are many other people on his staf who are cleverer and who do the real work. Read The Rektor’s Joke below and check the vocabulary for this lesson if you come across words you don’t know yet.

D

The Rektor’s Joke

ulu ada orang yang suka burung. Dia ingin mempunyai burung yang bagus. Satu hari dia pergi ke pasar burung. Banyak sekali burung di sana. Ada yang besar, ada yang ke cil. Ada yang merah, ada juga yang putih. Ada yang hijau, ada juga yang hitam. Ada juga burung yang bermacam-macam warnanya. Orang itu bertanya kepada orang yang menjual burung di pasar itu. “Saya suka burung itu. Burung yang merah itu. Burung itu bagus sekali. Berapa harganya?” “Harganya? Hanya seratus ribu dolar,” jawab orang itu. “Hah!!?? Seratus ribu dolar? Untuk satu burung? Aduh! Mahal sekali! Mengapa burung itu mahal sekali?” “Karena burung itu pandai menyanyi.” “Memang biasanya burung pandai menyanyi.” “Betul. Tetapi burung ini istimewa. Dia pandai menyanyikan lagu opera Wagner.” “Opera Wagner? Seperti Tannhäuser, Te Twilight of the Gods dan Te Flying Dutchman?” “Betul. Burung ini pandai menyanyikan lagu opera-opera itu.” “Hmmm. Lalu burung yang lain itu, yang di sana, yang hijau. Burung itu juga cantik. Berapa harganya?” “Wah, burung itu cukup mahal. Harganya dua ratus ribu dolar.” “Haaaah!?! Dua ratus ribu??? Mengapa burung yang hijau itu mahal sekali?” “Karena burung itu pandai bermain tenis.” “Burung itu pandai bermain tenis?”

Lesson 44

“Ya. Ia pernah bermain dengan Roger Federer. Federer kalah. Banyak orang menonton pertandingan itu. Keluar dalam acara olahraga di televisi. Apakah Anda juga melihat pertandingan itu?” “Hmmm, tidak. Dan burung yang lain itu? Yang warnanya biru. Burung itu bagus sekali. Berapa harganya?” “Wah. Burung itu mahal harganya. Empat ratus ribu dolar.” “Haaah!!?? Empat ratus ribu? Mengapa? Mengapa burung itu mahal sekali?” “Karena burung itu ahli flsafat. Dia pandai berpikir. Dia pintar seperti Sokrates, Descartes, Konghucu, Bertrand Russell dan Ki Ageng Suryomentaram. Dulu dia kuliah di Universitas Nasional Australia di kota Canberra.” “Burung itu dulu belajar di Universitas Nasional Australia? Universitas Nasional Australia itu universitas yang bagus sekali. Burung itu pasti pintar sekali. Tetapi empat ratus ribu dolar? Mahal sekali. Saya tidak mungkin dapat membeli burung yang harganya empat ratus ribu dolar. Lalu, yang lain lagi itu, yang di sana, yang berwarna hitam. Berapa harga burung itu?” “Wah, burung itu istimewa. Burung itu satu juta dolar.” “Haah?? Satu juta? Mengapa?” “Karena burung itu pandai menulis novel. Apakah Anda sudah pernah membaca novel Perang dan Damai?” “Sudah. Tolstoy yang menulis novel itu.” “Maaf, Anda salah. Bukan Tolstoy yang menulis novel itu. Burung yang hitam itu yang menulis novel Perang dan Damai. Burung itu juga menulis A Tale of Two Cities, Te Count of Monte Cristo, Pride and Prejudice, Harry Potter, Desperate Housewives dan banyak lagi.” “Aduh. Burung itu pintar juga. Masih ada satu burung lagi. Yang di sana. Yang berwarna putih. Berapa harga burung itu?” “Yang putih? Harganya sepuluh juta dolar.” “Aduh!!! Sepuluh juta? Apakah burung itu pandai menyanyi?” “Tidak” “Apakah burung itu pandai bermain tenis?” “Tidak.” “Apakah burung itu ahli flsafat?” “Bukan.” “Apakah burung itu pandai menulis novel?” “Tidak juga.” “Lalu mengapa burung itu mahal sekali? Mengapa harganya sepuluh juta dolar?” “Karena burung itu koordinatornya!”

Exercise 44-02 Every time a joke like the one above is told it is a little diferent from its previous telling. Retain ing the punch line, and using simple Indonesian, rewrite this joke. Make it a bit shorter if you like. Stick close to the format, vocabulary and sentences of the joke as it appears above but use your imagination to make changes. Change the colours of the birds and their prices. Change the accomplishments of the birds (except the last one). Perhaps you can think of other accomplishments and skills that your current Indonesian vocabulary allows you to mention. But whatever you write don’t forget: keep it funny.

Lesson 44

Role Play: Mencari Burung di Pasar Burung Taking the model conversation above as your beginning point, act out the events of the bird fancier’s visit to the Bird Market. Try to memorise as much as you can of the model, but change the colours of the birds and their prices. Use your imagination to change their accomplishments too. Change the order of the components in the model conversation. In short, concentrate on speaking correctly by memorising the model, but add your own variations and humour. Make cutouts of diferent coloured birds as props for you to point at. Perhaps members of your class can play the roles of the spectacularly clever birds by crouching on chairs or desks and describing their talents (in good Indonesian, of course). Above all remember: no English, only lively, correct Indonesian – and if possible, a few laughs.

Forum Diskusi 44-03 Share with everyone else in the class what your hobbies and favourite activities are. Make deliberate use of “Saya pandai” or “saya lumayan pandai” (I am pretty good at...), and “saya suka”.

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu Jodohkanlah kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. berlari

beautiful

mempunyai

vegetables

berenang

correct

menulis

assistant

bertanya

expensive

mulai

clothing

betul

magazine

pakaian

defnitely

cantik

more, -er

pasti

employee

majalah

only

pegawai

island

hanya

to swim

pembantu

to begin

lebih

to ask a question

pulau

to have

mahal

to run

sayuran

to write

Latihan 2—Menjodohkan I Pandai can be ‘tweaked’ in various ways: 1. pandai sekali

a. no good at

2. cukup pandai

b. not much good at

3. kurang pandai

c. not really very good at

4. tidak begitu pandai

d. quite good at

5. tidak pandai

e. to be better at

6. sama sekali tidak pandai

f. to be totally hopeless at

7. lebih pandai

g. very good at

Lesson 44

Latihan 3—Menjodohkan II Jodohkan rekaman dengan artinya di sebelah kanan.—Listen to the ten sentences in Sound File 044-01 and order them correctly. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

I used to be good at singing. I’m a hopeless cook. I’m no good at writing in Japanese. I’m not really very good at cooking vegetables. She’s good at playing badminton. She’s quite good at singing like Madonna. She’s very good at making clothes. They are better at soccer. We’re not much good at (playing) badminton. Who’s good at reading Arabic?

Latihan 4—Menjodohkan III Although pandai also occurs in the meaning “smart, clever, intelligent” it is more often associ ated with certain skills rather than with innate attributes—something that is always with you— which are more likely to be expressed by pintar. Match the Indonesian sentence with its equivalent in English. 1. Sarah anak yang pintar sekali.

a. I don’t think the Bupati is smart.

2. Saya kira Bupati tidak pintar.

b. I used to sing well, but not any more.

3. Anak kami sudah bersekolah, sudah mulai pintar.

c. I’m not a good gardener.

4. Dulu saya pandai menyanyi, tetapi sekarang tidak lagi.

d. Our daughter goes to school now, she’s beginning to show signs of intelligence.

5. Saya tidak pandai berkebun.

e. Sarah is a very bright child.

Latihan 5—Rangkai Kata Urutkanlah kata-kata di bawah ini menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai arti di bawah ini: 1. “I don’t think that man is smart.” Saya—itu—laki-laki—tidak—kira—pintar. 2. “I used to be good at playing the piano, but not any more.” Dulu—tidak—saya—sekarang—main—pandai—tetapi—piano,—lagi. 3. “I’m a hopeless cook.” Saya—pandai—sekali—sama—tidak—memasak.

Lesson 44

Latihan 6—Pemahaman Read The Rektor’s Joke and answer the following questions: 1. What kinds of birds are NOT mentioned at the bird market? A. big & small B. red & white C. green & black D. purple & pink 2. How much does the red bird cost? A. $1,000 B. $10,000 C. $100,000 D. $1,000,000 3. Why is the red bird so expensive? A. Because it is good at singing. B. Because of its beatiful colour. C. Because it is very young. D. Because it is smart. 4. How much does the green bird cost? A. $2,000 B. $20,000 C. $200,000 D. $2,000,000 5. Why is the green bird so expensive? A. Because that bird is good at playing tennis. B. Because that bird is good at playing music. C. Because that bird is very funny. D. Because that bird enjoys playing tennis. 6. How much did the blue bird cost? A. $4,000 B. $40,000 C. $400,000 D. $4,000,000 7. Why is the blue bird so expensive? A. Because that bird is good at singing. B. Because that bird is good at thinking. C. Because that bird is good at playing tennis. D. Because that bird has a nice blue colour. 8. How much does the black bird cost? A. $1,000 B. $10,000 C. $100,000 D. $1,000,000

Lesson 44 9. Why is the black bird so expensive? A. Because that bird is good at singing. B. Because that bird is good at playing tennis. C. Because that bird has a nice black colour. D. Because that bird is good at writing novels. 10. How much did the white bird cost? A. $10,000 B. $100,000 C. $1,000,000 D. $10,000,000 11. Why is the white bird so expensive? A. Because that bird is good at writing novels. B. Because that bird is the coordinator. C. Because that bird is good at playing tennis. D. Because that bird is good at thinking.

Latihan 7—Isian Translate English in parentheses. Choose from the following words: yang—bertanya—betul— biasanya—hanya—harganya—istimewa—jawab—karena—mahal—mempunyai—menjual— menyanyi—menyanyikan—merah—ribu—suka Dulu ada orang yang (likes) burung. Dia ingin (to own) burung yang bagus. Satu hari dia pergi ke pasar burung. Banyak sekali burung di sana. Ada yang besar, ada (that are) kecil. [...] Orang itu (asked) kepada orang yang (sells) burung di pasar itu. ‘Saya suka burung itu. Burung yang (red) itu. Burung itu bagus sekali. Berapa (does it cost)?’ ‘Harganya? (Only) seratus ribu dolar,’ (answered) orang itu. ‘Hah!!? Seratus (thousand) dolar? Untuk satu burung? Aduh! (expensive) sekali! Mengapa burung itu mahal sekali?’ ‘(Because) burung itu pandai (sing).’ ‘Memang (usually) burung pandai menyanyi.’ ‘(That’s right). Tetapi burung ini (special). Dia pandai (sing) lagu opera Wagner.’

Lesson 44

Latihan 8—Teka Teki Silang (TTS) Mendatar: 4. to sing 6. to be good at; clever 10. to sell something 11. special, exceptional 12. not really, lacking, less 14. a guitar 15. once, ever in the past 16. vegetables 17. to think, to ruminate 18. million Menurun: 1. a seed, small item 2. to lose 3. to trade 4. to become; to be 5. to swim 7. correct 8. to repair 9. a song 10. to win 13. to laugh

Lesson 45

45 Asking Who

Aims • To practise using siapa to ask questions about who is doing something. • To revise the use of some verbs with me- prefxes. • To review the use of common kinship terms.

Vocabulary review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings. anjing

dog

pembantu

assistant

baju

shirt, clothes

rumah tangga

household

berangkat

to depart, leave

semua

all, everyone

bertemu

to meet

surat

letter

garasi

garage

surat kabar

newspaper

kemarin

yesterday

tadi malam

last night

kembali

to go back, to return

tidur

to sleep

membuat

to make (something)

permisi dulu

excuse me (when taking leave)

mencuci

to wash

Asking Who Does/Did Something You have already met the word siapa several times. You have practised using it to ask about a person’s name. Siapa nama Anda? What is your name?

Lesson 45 Siapa nama ayah Anda? What is your father’s name? Siapa nama teman Mita? What is Mita’s friend’s name? You can also use siapa before a verb to ask who does/did something. When siapa is used in this way, usually the connector yang appears between siapa and the verb. Study these examples: Siapa yang datang ke rumah Anda tadi malam? Who came to your place last night? Siapa yang menolong Anda menulis surat ini? Who helped you to write this letter? Siapa yang biasanya berbelanja dalam keluarga Anda? Who usually does the shopping in your family? Remember that when a question has siapa in it, it usually invites or expects an answer with the name of a person. But sometimes you can also answer a “siapa yang” question with something that is a substitute for a name, for example a pronoun like saya, Anda etc., or a kinship term like ibu, adik etc., or a title like Bapak Presiden, Ibu guru etc., or sometimes a term indicating a relationship like teman saya, suaminya etc. Study these examples: Siapa yang memakai komputer tadi malam? Who used the computer last night? Pak Siwabessy. Mr Siwabessy. Siapa yang mau tidur di hotel? Who wants to sleep at a hotel? Saya! Me! Siapa yang memakai baju bagus itu? Who is wearing that great shirt? Teman saya. My friend. Siapa yang suka minum kopi pada sore hari? Who enjoys a cofee in the late afternoon? Ayah. Father. And if you answer the question with a long answer that repeats the verb that occurred in the question you must place yang in front of the verb, just as yang was in front of the verb in the question. Study these examples. Wah! Kue ini enak sekali! Siapa yang membuatnya? Wow. This cake is really nice! Who made it? Ibu Mariana yang membuat kue itu. Mrs Mariana made the cake. Siapa yang biasanya mencuci piring di rumah Anda? Who usually washes the dishes at your place? Saya yang biasanya mencuci piring, tetapi kakak saya yang mencuci pakaian. I’m the one who usually washes the dishes, but my (elder) brother washes the clothes.

Lesson 45

Selalu and Tidak Pernah You have already met and practised the adverbs of frequency biasanya (usually) and kadang-kadang (sometimes). To these can now be added selalu (always) and its opposite tidak pernah (never). Selalu and tidak pernah almost never come right at the beginning of a sentence / clause (unlike biasanya and kadang-kadang which often do). Usually selalu and tidak pernah come right after the subject of a sentence or clause. Bapak Tubagus selalu menyanyi pada waktu mandi. Mr Tubagus always sings while taking a bath. Dia tidak pernah menolong orang yang minta tolong. He never helps people who ask for help. Study these substitution tables. Practise generating questions and answers from them. Make your own entries in the columns marked with a dash or dots. Pertanyaan

tidak pernah biasanya selalu

berbelanja masak mencuci piring bangun pagi-pagi menonton televisi membersihkan garasi mencuci pakaian bercakap-cakap

dalam keluarga di rumah

Pak Lim Anda Ibu Sutoyo

yang

tidak pernah selalu biasanya

....................

.

bermain tenis belajar bercakap-cakap bekerja makan minum membaca menonton televisi menunggu

di

...................

?

yang

..................

Siapa yang

Jawaban Pak Lim sendiri Isteri Pak Lim Saya sendiri Ibu Sutoyo sendiri Pembantu Ibu Sutoyo Pertanyaan

Siapa yang

Jawaban Ayah Ibu Kandouw Saya dan Ani Kepala Kantor Teman saya Ketut Kakak saya Suami Susanti

.

?

Lesson 45

Exercise 45-01 Answer each of the following questions, then answer the follow-up question. Study the example frst. Pertanyaan: Siapa yang berjalan kaki di sana? Jawaban: Pak Panjaitan yang berjalan kaki di sana. Pertanyaan: Dengan siapa? Jawaban: Sendirian. 1(a) Siapa yang biasanya memelihara anjing-anjing Anda? 1(b) Mengapa? 2(a) Siapa yang bekerja di kantor sampai jam sebelas tadi malam? 2(b) Dengan siapa? 3(a) Siapa yang mendengarkan radio di ruang keluarga? 3(b) Dengan siapa? 4(a) Siapa yang mau bertemu dengan Pak Nainggolan? 4(b) Mengapa? 5(a) Siapa yang akan ikut dengan Anda? 5(b) Mengapa? 6(a) Siapa yang mengajar sejarah? 6(b) Bagaimana dia? 7(a) Siapa yang selalu duduk bercakap-cakap di warung Ibu Katrina? 7(b) Dengan siapa? 8(a) Siapa yang pandai masak di sini? 8(b) Dia pandai masak apa? 9(a) Siapa yang kuliah di Universitas Airlangga di Surabaya? 9(b) Mengapa? 10(a) Siapa yang belum mandi? 10(b) Mengapa?

Exercise 45-02: Teka-Teki This is a puzzle. Read the clues carefully then answer the fnal question in Indonesian.

A

Teka-Teki

da empat orang, Ibu Betty, Pak Nurdin, Pak Poli dan Ibu Lina. Mereka semua suka berjalan-jalan pada pagi hari. Ibu Betty selalu bangun pagi-pagi. Ia berangkat dari rumahnya pada jam enam pagi. Ia berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam. Sesudah berjalan-jalan ia suka minum kopi di warung Sudi Mampir sebelum kembali ke rumahnya. Ia selalu pulang pada jam tujuh pagi.

Lesson 45

Pak Nurdin bangun jam setengah tujuh pagi. Ia keluar dari rumahnya untuk berjalan-jalan. Sesudah berjalan-jalan selama satu jam ia minum kopi di warung Sudi Mampir. Biasanya ia duduk di warung Sudi Mampir selama sepuluh menit, lalu ia pulang. Pak Poli selalu bangun jam lima. Ia minum kopi dulu di rumahnya. Sesudah setengah jam ia keluar untuk berjalan-jalan. Ia berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam, lalu ia masuk ke warung Sudi Mampir untuk membeli surat kabar. Biasanya ia duduk di warung membaca surat kabar selama setengah jam. Lalu ia pulang. Biasanya Ibu Lina bangun pada jam enam. Selama satu jam ia bekerja di kebunnya. Lalu ia berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam. Sesudah berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam ia masuk ke warung Sudi Mampir untuk minum kopi. Biasanya ia duduk di warung selama setengah jam. Pertanyaan: Siapa yang biasanya bertemu di warung Sudi Mampir? Refer to Latihan 10 for the solution of this problem.

Role Play: A Sociologist Investigates Your Household In this role play a university researcher comes to the front door of your house. He/She is investigating who does the housework in local households. Men or women? Parents or children? Always or just sometimes (or never)? The researcher will begin by introducing himself/herself. Here is one possible introduction which you should learn by heart. Selamat pagi (or siang/sore/malam) Bu (or Pak). Saya dari Universitas Widya Buana. Boleh saya bertanya tentang rumah tangga Anda? Saya ingin tahu siapa yang bekerja dan siapa yang tidak bekerja dalam rumah tangga Anda. As the role play develops you should make as much use as possible of what you learned act ing the role play “A Visit from a Census Ofcial” in Lesson 30. They include greetings, introductions, smalltalk, inviting the visitor to eat/drink, asking how many people there are in the house, getting/giving the personal details of residents and much more. In Module 2 you also practised the common kinship terms of Indonesian and these should be “recycled” too. So review Module 2, then learn by heart and add the following key question shell.

Siapa yang

selalu biasanya

mencuci piring mencuci pakaian membersihkan rumah membersihkan kamar mandi dan WC membersihkan jendela mencuci mobil masak bekerja di kebun membersihkan halaman berbelanja untuk membeli makanan

dalam rumah tangga ini?

These question can be answered in several diferent ways. For example you can begin with biasanya:

Biasanya

saya anak saya ibu saya kakak saya pacar saya

yang

membersihkan......... mencuci......... masak.........

.

Lesson 45 Or you can use selalu in your answer. Bearing in mind that selalu comes after the subject of a sentence, you might answer like this: Saya Teman saya Orang tua saya Istri saya Adik saya

membersihkan......... mencuci......... masak.........

yang selalu

.

You should look for every possible chance to add follow-up information. For example you can use tetapi to begin a sentence that modifes the information you frst gave. Tetapi

suami saya teman saya ayah saya

kadang-kadang pada hari Sabtu pada pagi hari

membersihkan..... mencuci..... masak

yang

.

The researcher should look for every opportunity to ask follow-up questions, especially followup questions beginning with mengapa. For example: Anda anak Anda pacar Anda

Mengapa

membersihkan......... mencuci......... masak

tidak mau

?

An answer to this question will begin with karena and may have pronouns like dia, mereka and kami in it. saya dia mereka kami

Karena

lebih suka tidak suka harus tidak pandai

pergi ke......... bekerja di......... membersihkan.........

.

To fnish the role play, don’t forget to say thank you and to politely take your leave. Learn this leave-taking formula by heart. Terima kasih Pak/Bu. Saya kira sudah cukup. Saya permisi dulu.

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. anjing

to meet

mencuci

household

baju

to depart/leave

pembantu

yesterday

berangkat

dog

rumah tangga

to wash

bertemu

shirt; clothes

semua

last night

garasi

letter

surat

you’re welcome

kemarin

assistant

surat kabar

to sleep

kembali

newspaper

tadi malam

to make sth

membuat

garage

tidur

all; everyone

Lesson 45

Latihan 2—Menjodohkan These are all verbs that do not take a prefx, neither meN- nor ber-. Most are intransitive but a small number are transitive: minum, makan, and minta. Match the Indonesian word to its equivalent in English. masuk

to live

hidup

go; leave

minum

to sleep

datang

to bathe

makan

to sit

pergi

follow, join

minta

to enter

ikut

to come

bangun

to get up

mandi

to know

duduk

to request

kembali

to eat

tidur

to drink

tahu

to return

Latihan 3—Menjodohkan: berBer- verbs are allways intransitive. Some can take a compliment such as bermain tenis, or berbicara bahasa Indonesia. But they can never take an object. berbelanja

to stand

berasal

to chat

berumur

go shopping

berdiri

to be aged

bermain

to depart

beristirahat

to talk

belajar

to originate

bercakap-cakap

to rest

bekerja

to work

berbicara

to play

berangkat

to learn

berpikir

to think

Latihan 4—Siapa, Asking Who Does/Did Something You have already met the word siapa several times. You have practiced using it to ask about a person’s name. You can also use siapa before a verb to ask who does/did something. When siapa is used in this way, usually the connector ‘yang’ appears between siapa and the verb. 1. Siapa nama Anda?

a. What is your father’s name?

2. Siapa nama ayah Anda?

b. What is Mita’s friend’s name?

3. Siapa nama teman Mita?

c. What is your name?

4. Siapa yang datang ke rumah Anda tadi malam?

d. Who usually does the shopping in your family?

5. Siapa yang menolong Anda menulis surat ini?

e. Who helped you write this letter?

6. Siapa yang biasanya berbelanja dalam keluarga Anda?

f. Who came to your house last night?

Lesson 45

Latihan 5—Menjodohkan: Pertanyaan dan Jawaban Jodohkan pertanyaan di sebelah kiri dengan jawaban di sebelah kanan. 1. Siapa yang belajar di perpustakaan kemarin?

a. Teman saya Ketut yang membaca novel di perpustakaan hari Sabtu yang lalu.

2. Siapa yang makan di warung tadi b. Pembantunya yang tidak pernah siang? membersihkan garasi. 3. Siapa yang menonton televisi di rumah tadi pagi?

c. Adik saya yang menonton televisi di rumah tadi pagi.

4. Siapa yang membaca novel di perpustakaan hari Sabtu yang lalu?

d. Suami Susanti yang makan di warung tadi siang.

5. Siapa yang tidak pernah membersihkan garasi?

e. Saya yang belajar di perpustakaan kemarin.

6. Siapa yang bercakap-cakap di ruang keluarga?

f. Kakak saya dan pacarnya yang bercakap-cakap di ruang keluarga.

Latihan 6—Menyimak: Siapa, Asking Who Does/Did Something Remember that when a question has siapa in it, it usually invites or expects an answer with the name of a person. But sometimes you can also answer a ìsiapa yangî question with something that is a substitute for a name, for example a pronoun like saya, Anda etc., or a kinship term like ibu, adik etc., or a title like Bapak Presiden, Ibu guru etc., or sometimes a term indicating a relationship like teman saya, suaminya etc. Listen to Sound File 045-02 and choose the correct answer. 1.

a. Tidak ada. Kami lebih suka tidur di rumah.

2.

b. Sinta. Dia suka baju itu.

3.

c. Saya yang biasanya mencuci pakaian keluarga saya.

4.

d. Pak Bambang. Biasanya dia minum kopi jam empat sore.

5.

e. Nenek saya yang selalu bangun jam setengah lima pagi.

6.

f. Mbak Parni yang selalu menolong kami.

7.

g. Kakak dan teman-teman kakak saya yang biasanya bercakap-cakap di rumah Ibu Sutoyo.

8.

h. Ibu yang biasanya berbelanja dalam keluarga kami.

9.

i. Adik yang memakainya tadi malam.

10.

j. Adik saya yang tidak pernah masak dalam keluarga saya.

Lesson 45

Latihan 7—Isian: Kata Dasar & Imbuhan Add the prefx me- plus the corresponding nasal sound if applicable, i.e. mem-, meng-, men-, or meny-, to the following roots. Please note that initial p, t, k, and s are dropped. Most meNverbs are transitive. Many meN- verbs, especially those with sufx -kan) require an object; other meN- verbs may take an object, but can also be used without an object. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

tolong ajar pelihara tunggu pakai dengar baca cuci buka buat sapu bersihkan masak beli

...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ......................................

to help someone to teach (something) to take care of something to wait (for someone/something) to use something to hear (something) to read (something) to wash (something) to open something to make something to sweep (something) to clean something to cook (something) to buy something

Latihan 8—Rangkai Kata Urutkanlah kata-kata di bawah ini menjadi kalimat yang benar, yang artinya : 1. “Mrs. Mariana made the cake.” Ibu—Mariana—yang—kue—membuat—itu. 2. “I’m the one who usually washes the dishes, but my (elder) brother washes the clothes.” Saya—biasanya—yang—tetapi—yang—mencuci—mencuci piring,—kakak saya pakaian. 3. “Mr Tubagus always sings while taking a bath.” Bapak—waktu—selalu—menyanyi—pada—Tubagus—mandi. 4. “He never helps people who ask for help.” Dia—tidak—yang—menolong—orang—pernah—minta—tolong. 5. “Thank you, Mrs. Lia, I think this is sufcient.” Terima—sudah—kasih,—saya—Bu Lia,—kira—cukup. 6. “Who is the lady that usually wears red shirts?” Siapa—selalu—baju merah—yang—perempuan—memakai—itu?

Lesson 45

Latihan 9—Isian: Teka-Teki Dengarkanlah rekaman 045-01 dan lengkapilah bacaan teka-teki di bawah ini. Ada empat orang, Ibu Betty, Pak Nurdin, Pak Poli dan Ibu Lina. Mereka __________ suka berjalan-jalan pada __________ hari. Ibu Betty __________ bangun pagi-pagi. Ia __________ dari rumahnya pada jam enam pagi. Ia berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam. Sesudah berjalan-jalan ia suka minum kopi di __________ Sudi Mampir sebelum kembali ke rumahnya. Ia selalu pulang pada jam tujuh pagi. Pak Nurdin __________ jam setengah tujuh pagi. Ia keluar dari rumahnya untuk berjalan-jalan. __________ berjalan-jalan selama satu jam ia minum kopi di warung Sudi Mampir. __________ ia duduk di warung Sudi Mampir __________ sepuluh menit, lalu ia pulang. Pak Poli selalu bangun jam lima. Ia minum __________ dulu di rumahnya. Sesudah setengah jam ia keluar untuk berjalan-jalan. Ia berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam, lalu ia masuk ke warung Sudi Mampir untuk __________ surat kabar. Biasanya ia duduk di warung __________ surat kabar selama setengah jam. Lalu ia pulang. Biasanya Ibu Lina bangun pada jam enam. Selama satu jam ia __________ di kebunnya. Lalu ia berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam. Sesudah berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam ia masuk ke warung Sudi Mampir __________ minum kopi. Biasanya ia __________ di warung selama setengah jam.

Latihan 10—Pemahaman Bacalah Teka-Teki di atas dan jawablah pertanyaan-pertanyaan di bawah ini. 1. Sebelum berjalan-jalan, Ibu Betty minum kopi dulu. A. Benar B. Salah 2. Pada jam 7.45, Pak Nurdin minum kopi di warung Sudi Mampir. A. Benar B. Salah 3. Pak Poli selalu minum kopi di warung Sudi Mampir. A. Benar B. Salah 4. Sesudah berjalan-jalan, Ibu Lina berkebun. A. Benar B. Salah 5. Ibu Lina dan Ibu Betty suka minum kopi di warung Sudi Mampir. A. Benar B. Salah

Lesson 45 6. Siapa yang biasanya bertemu di warung Sudi Mampir? A. Pak Poli dan Pak Nurdin B. Ibu Lina dan Ibu Betty C. Pak Poli dan Ibu Betty D. Pak Nurdin dan Ibu Lina

Latihan 11—Teka Teki Silang (TTS) Mendatar 1. to wash 3. to meet 4. all; everyone 6. assistant 8. dog 9. yesterday 10. always 11. history 14. to wait; to wait for 15. to keep (as a pet) 16. letter 17. time, at the time when 18. to sleep Menurun: 1. to make (something) 2. for (a certain period of time) 5. to help someone 7. to teach 12. alone; on your own 13. to leave/depart 14. to use/wear something

Lesson 46

46 Pak Yusuf Under Surveillance

Aims • To get more practise talking about daily routine. • To role play a dialogue that revolves around a person’s daily activities.

Vocabulary Review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings.

Shutterstock

beberapa

some, several

menunggu

to wait for someone

berdiri

to stand up

nanti dulu

just a moment

jam

o’clock

sampai di...

to arrive in

kapan

when

sarapan

to have breakfast

kepada

to

selama

for (a period of time)

memanggil

to call out someone

telur

an egg

mencoba

to try to do something

ternyata

apparently, it seems

How Long? In Lesson 23 you practised asking and answering questions with the phrase Sudah berapa lama...? (How long have you...?). A question with berapa lama (how long) in it usually demands an answer with a number in it. To introduce this number you can use the prepositions selama (for such-and-such a period of time) and sampai (until). Berapa lama Anda bekerja di kantor tadi? How long did you work at the ofce (earlier) today? Selama tiga jam. For three hours.

OR

Berapa lama mereka tinggal di Sulawesi?

Sampai jam dua belas Until 12 o’clock.

Lesson 46 How long did they live in Sulawesi? Selama lima tahun. For fve years

OR

Sampai tahun dua ribu sepuluh. Until 2010.

Exercise 46-01 Use each of the verbs below to form a question beginning with Berapa lama, then write an answer to the question beginning with selama or sampai. Study the example frst. berjalan-jalan: Berapa lama mereka berjalan-jalan di pusat kota? sampai: Sampai jam empat. OR (for example) Sampai sore. 1 2. 3. 4.

tinggal selama duduk sampai menunggu selama belajar sampai

5. menonton selama 6. mendengarkan selama 7. bermain sampai 8. berbicara selama

9.

berdansa selama 10. bercakap-cakap sampai 11. berolahraga sampai 12. bekerja selama

“What Did _____ Do?” You have already practised asking questions in the form Apa yang Anda lakukan...? (What do you do... ? / What did you do... ?) We have mentioned earlier in Lesson 35 that this form is actually a passive form meaning literally “What (is it) that (by) you (is) done?”. You can also use the verb lakukan (to do) to ask about what a third person (he, she) or persons (they) did, but the question usually has somewhat diferent forms. If you are asking what a person did and you mention that person by name, you usually say dilakukan oleh... Apa yang dilakukan oleh Bapak Yusuf? What did Mr Yusuf do? literally What (is it) that was done by Mr Yusuf? If you are asking what he or she did, you usually use the form dia lakukan: Apa yang dia lakukan? What did he/she do? literally What (is it) that (by) him/her was done? If you are asking what they did, you usually use the form mereka lakukan: Apa yang mereka lakukan? What did they do? literally What (is it) that (by) them was done?

Mohon Perhatian! Try to distinguish in your mind the various functions and meanings of jam. Here they are in summary. ✗ Jam is used to ask and answer questions about the time of day. It appears in the question jam berapa? (what time?) and it appears in front of a number when you say the time of day e.g. jam dua (two o’clock), jam setengah empat (half past three) etc. ✗ Jam also means “hour” and it appears after a number when you want to say how many hours an event lasted, e.g. tiga jam (three hours), tujuh belas jam (seventeen hours). ✗ Jam also means “a clock”, “a watch”, e.g. jam dinding (a wall clock) and jam tangan (a wrist watch). Don’t forget that jam is pronounced like “jumm”!!

Lesson 46 You should learn these variant forms, and the example sentences, by heart, just as you learned the question Apa yang Anda lakukan by heart back in Lesson 35. Apa yang Anda lakukan? What did you do? Study these question shells and practise generating a variety of questions from them. If you can, add other phrases to the column on the right. After each question imagine how you would succinctly and correctly answer it.

 Apa yang

 Apa yang

dilakukan oleh Pak Alni mereka lakukan dia lakukan

dilakukan oleh Pak Alni mereka lakukan dia lakukan

tadi malam tadi pagi tadi siang pada pagi hari pada siang hari ? pada sore hari pada malam hari jam delapan malam

sesudah sebelum

itu pulang makan malam pergi ke kantor membeli pakaian kembali dari toko mandi

?

Passive Voice As we mentioned above, you should learn the above sentences by heart. Since we already told you that the above sentences are in passive voice, we have added this section, which gives additional information on the subject. This section is for your information only, and is not required. As you will learn more about the diferences between active and passive voice later, you can safely skip this section if the following is over your head. A clause in which the subject is the recipient of an action by the doer is said to be in passive voice (if you have no knowledge of what active and passive voices are, it may be helpful to read the Wikipedia article on English passive voice). Indonesian has two types of passive verbs: Verbs in Passive Type 1 have the di- prefx. Passive Type 1 is used when the the doer is a 3rd person (he/she) or a noun. The doer is optionally marked by oleh (by): Apa yang dilakukan (oleh) Pak Ali? The third person pronoun dia/ia is rendered -nya: Apa yang dilakukannya? Verbs in Passive Type 2 do not take any prefx. Passive Type 2 is only used when the doer is a pronoun. It is compulsory for 1st and 2nd person pronouns (aku, saya, kita, kami, kamu, Anda), but optional for 3rd person pronouns (ia, dia, mereka). Apa yang kamu lakukan hari ini? Apa yang dia lakukan? Thus for third person pronouns we can either use PT 1 or PT 2: Apa yang dilakukannya? OR Apa yang dia lakukan? (What does he do?) Apa yang dilakukan (oleh) mereka? OR Apa yang mereka lakukan?

Lesson 46 But for the 1st or 2nd person we can only use PT 2: Apa yang kamu lakukan? (What do you do?) Apa yang kita lakukan? (What do we do?) And for nouns we can only use PT 1: Apa yang dilakukan (oleh) orang itu? (What does that person do?) Of course, the three above sentences translate literately as “what is done by him”, “what is done by you” and “what is done by that person”, but in English active voice is often preferred. In Indonesian, however, passive voice is frequently used to focus on the object, rather than on the subject. In addition, Indonesian has certain structures that require passive voice. As a rule, any relative clauses in which the doer (agent) is included, requires passive voice. The sentence Apa yang kamu lakukan, for instance, contains the head noun apa, and the relative clause yang kamu lakukan, in which yang is the relative pronoun, kamu the agent, and lakukan the passive verb. In short, sentences beginning with “apa yang”, “siapa yang” or “(noun) yang” and where the agent is included, must be rendered in passive voice.

Exercise 46-01 Translate the following questions into good, simple, correct Indonesian. If you are in doubt about how to translate “do”, review the examples above. Here are some examples to study frst. Question: What did she do this morning? You write: Apa yang dia lakukan tadi pagi? Question: What did Mr Alni do after breakfast? You write: Apa yang dilakukan oleh Pak Alni sesudah sarapan? Question: What did they do after going shopping? You write: Apa yang mereka lakukan sesudah berbelanja? Question: What did he do last night? You write: Apa yang dia lakukan tadi malam? Now begin... 1. What did Mr Alni do before having breakfast? 2. What did they do in the afternoon? 3. What did Mr Alni do at fve o’clock in the afternoon? 4. What did she do after taking a bath? 5. What did they do after meeting at the restaurant? 6. What did Mr Alni do after getting up? 7. What did he do at night? 8. What did they do in the hotel? 9. What did she do after buying fowers? 10. What did they do after watching the movie?

Lesson 46

Pak Yusuf Under Surveillance Ibu Yusuf is a middle-class lady, the wife of a prosperous businessman. She is suspicious of her husband. She thinks he is up to no good, but she has no hard evidence. She fears that maybe, just maybe, he is meeting another woman. She needs to have detailed information on everything that her husband does in the course of a full day. So she hires a private detective (detektif) to report on what her husband does in the course of a day. Using a secret camera the detective took the following eight pictures, which, unfortunately, got out of order. Can you help the private detective putting them into the right chronological order? What did Pak Yusuf do during that day? Narrate the story to your class mate or jot it down on a piece of paper.

A

B

C

D

E

F

Lesson 46

G

H

Bacaan: Pak Yusuf Under Surveillance Here is a transcript of the briefng given to Ibu Yusuf by the private detective. Read it through carefully and compare it to your own story. Is it the same? What is diferent?

K

emarin pagi Pak Yusuf bangun jam enam. Sesudah bangun dia duduk di kebun di belakang rumahnya selama kira-kira satu jam. Di sana dia minum kopi dan membaca surat kabar. Jam tujuh pagi ia masuk ke rumah untuk mandi, menggosok gigi dan bersisir. Pak Yusuf berpakaian di kamar tidur. Lalu dia sarapan di ruang makan. Pak Yusuf makan roti dengan telur dan minum kopi manis. Sambil makan dia juga mendengarkan musik di radio. Lalu dia membuka komputer untuk membaca berita. Kira-kira jam delapan dia naik mobil ke kantor. Dia sampai di kantor jam sembilan kurang seperempat. Pak Yusuf bekerja di kantor selama dua jam. Kira-kira jam sebelas siang ia keluar dari kantornya dan berjalan kaki ke toko makanan. Di toko itu ia membeli sebotol anggur yang mahal sekali. Lalu ia berjalan ke toko bunga. Di toko bunga dia membeli bunga mawar yang merah dan putih. Kemudian Pak Yusuf memanggil taksi. Ia naik taksi ke Hotel Sheraton – hotel mewah yang tidak jauh dari pusat kota. Ia masuk ke hotel dan duduk di lobi. Jam dua belas siang seorang perempuan datang. Dia cantik sekali dan masih muda. Umurnya kira-kira sembilan belas tahun. Ia memakai pakaian yang mewah. Ia duduk di samping Pak Yusuf. Pak Yusuf memberikan bunga mawar kepada perempuan itu. Mereka bercakapcakap selama setengah jam. Lalu mereka duduk di restoran. Restoran di Sheraton itu mewah dan mahal. Masakannya masakan Prancis! Mereka makan roti dengan telur kaviar. Pak Yusuf membuka botol yang dibelinya. Ternyata bukan anggur tetapi sampanye! Selama satu jam mereka makan dan bercakap-cakap, tertawa sambil minum sampanye. Pak Yusuf ternyata senang sekali. Kira-kira jam setengah dua mereka keluar dari restoran. Di Hotel Sheraton ada banyak toko, di antaranya toko pakaian wanita. Mereka kira-kira satu jam di toko itu. Perempuan yang cantik itu mencoba beberapa baju yang mewah dan mahal. Akhirnya dia memilih baju bagus dari Italia. Pak Yusuf yang membayar. Pada waktu mereka keluar dari toko perempuan itu mencium pipi Pak Yusuf.

Lesson 46

Sesudah itu Pak Yusuf kembali ke kantornya. Tetapi ia tidak bekerja. Ia hanya duduk saja di mejanya dan melihat ke luar jendela. Kira-kira jam setengah enam ia berdiri dan berjalan ke luar. Ia memanggil taksi, tetapi saya tidak tahu ke mana ia pergi. Pak Yusuf pulang ke rumahnya kira-kira jam sebelas malam. Sesudah mandi ia tidur. Here is an English summary of what Pak Yusuf does in this narrative: • gets up early in the morning • sits in the garden reading a newspaper and drinking cofee • has a bath etc. and gets dressed • has breakfast while listening to the radio • goes to the ofce by car • works at the ofce for two hours • leaves the ofce and walks to a liquor shop: buys a bottle of wine • goes to a fower shop and buys fowers • calls a taxi and goes to a luxury hotel • meets a pretty, well-dressed young woman in the lobby • has an expensive lunch with the young woman: they drink champagne • goes to a fashion shop: buys an expensive dress for his young friend • returns to his ofce, but doesn’t do any work • leaves the ofce, calls a taxi and goes somewhere • comes home late at night Do Latihan 4–6 to check your understanding of this narration. After that, without looking at the Indonesian-language report on Pak Yusuf’s day, and glancing only occasionally at the English summary of the day’s events above, look up from the book re-tell in your own (Indonesian) words what Pak Yusuf did in the course of the day. After this frst attempt, read the Indonesian report and the English summary again. Try not to look at the summary and once more tell the story of Pak Yusuf’s day, improving on your previous attempt. Keep repeating this process until you feel you can produce a narrative that is close to (though not necessarily exactly the same as) the sound fle you listened to. Then fesh out the events of Pak Yusuf’s day with details that you make up yourself. For each dot point above, it should be possible to add at least one sentence (hopefully more than one) of extra detail. Make sure your sentences are in good, correct Indonesian, and make them interesting.

Hati-Hati! The basic meaning of the word waktu is ‘time’: Ada waktu? Do you have time? Maaf, saya tidak ada waktu. Sorry, I don’t have time. Pada waktu itu saya masih di SD. At that time I still went to primary school.

Lesson 46 Waktu is also used to narrate events in the past, and translates as “when”: Waktu mereka di restoran, mereka makan kaviar. When they were in the restaurant, they eat caviar. You need to be aware that waktu is NEVER used to narrate events occurring in the future (as we will lean in Lesson 46, the word kalau is reserved for this function). Waktu is also NEVER used an an interrogative! The word kapan is reserved for this function: Kapan dia datang? When will she come?

Perempuan vs. Wanita Pak Yusuf’s invites his illicit girlfriend to shop at a boutique specializing in expensive fashionable clothing for women. Women’s clothing is here named as pakaian wanita instead of pakaian perempuan. Whole articles have been written about the complex relationship of perempuan versus wanita and laki-laki versus pria. Wanita and pria are loan words from Sanskrit whereas perempuan and laki-laki are original Malay words. Laki-laki and pria are fully interchangeable and so are perempuan and wanita. Nor is the one used more often than the other. The word wanita is (just like its counterpart pria) supposed to be more elevated and refned, and hence it is widely used in the media and virtually all governmental women organisations use wanita rather than perempuan. On the other hand, the word perempuan is far more frequently used in spoken language. It is interesting to note that governmental organisations make consistent use of wanita and avoid the word perempuan wherever they can, whereas grassroot organisations tend to give preference to perempuan. Governmental/Military Organisation Grassroot Organisation Dharma Wanita Yayasan Perempuan Mardika Persatuan Wanita Republik Indonesia Asosiasi Perempuan Indonesia untuk Keadilan Lembaga Studi Pengembangan Perempuan dan Korps Wanita Angkatan Darat Anak Polisi Wanita Kelompok Perempuan untuk Kebebasan Pers Lembaga Pemasyarakatan Wanita Solidaritas Perempuan But the dichotomy of governmental wanita versus non-governmental perempuan is waning, especially since Indonesia became a democracy in 1998. In 1999, Presiden Abdurahman Wahid established the “Ministry of Women Empowerment and Child Protection” naming it Kementrian Negara Pemberdayaan Perempuan dan Perlindungan Anak.

Role Play: Ibu Yusuf Quizzes a Private Detective With a classmate, or with your teacher/tutor, role play a conversation between Ibu Yusuf and the detektif. The detective will provide a detailed verbal report describing in full what he or she observed Pak Yusuf doing in the course of the day. Remember, as a professional the detective will have to be thorough, accurate and detailed. Report all that Pak Yusuf was observed doing and state the time of day that each event happened. The detective’s report should begin early in the

Lesson 46 morning and describe what Pak Yusuf did right through the day, whether or not the events are immediately relevant to his supposed misdemeanour. Ibu Yusuf will interrupt the “report” with numerous questions about the details of her husband’s day. Here are some of the kinds of question she might ask together with an example of each. You practised the frst two question-patterns in the earlier part of this lesson. The others have all appeared in previous lessons. Apa yang dia / mereka lakukan....? Apa yang mereka lakukan sesudah berbelanja di toko pakaian? Berapa lama dia / mereka .... ? Berapa lama mereka bercakap-cakap di restoran? Di mana dia / mereka ..... ? Di mana mereka bertemu? Ke mana dia / mereka ..... ? Ke mana mereka pergi? Jam berapa dia / mereka .... ? Jam berapa dia (Pak Yusuf) kembali ke kantor? Siapa yang .... ? Siapa yang membeli bunga di toko? Mengapa dia / mereka / Anda .... ? Mengapa dia tidak pulang sesudah bekerja di kantor? Apakah dia / mereka .... ? Di samping minum sampanye, apakah mereka juga tertawa? Keep the dialogue lively. If your vocabulary is not yet big enough to express all you would like to say, make maximum use of the words you do know to ensure the conversation doesn’t “die”. Make sure your language is simple and your sentences short. And most important, use your imagination to describe in detail the evidence that confrms Ibu Yusuf’s suspicions. The role play can be varied by having Pak Yusuf investigate his wife’s suspicious activities, or by having a businessman or businesswoman investigate the activities of an associate or competitor, or by having Pak Yusuf and Bu Yusuf quiz each other face-to-face etc.

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. beberapa

o’clock, hour

menunggu

year

berdiri

to, towards

nanti dulu

just a moment

jam

apparently

sampai di

an egg

kapan

to stand up

sarapan

to wait (for)

kepada

some, several

tahun

to arrive in/at

memanggil

when?

telur

to call someone

mencoba

breakfast

ternyata

to try

Lesson 46

Latihan 2—Menjodohkan: Berapa lama? Jodohkan kata atau frase di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1. Selama tiga jam

a. For fve years

2. Sampai jam dua belas

b. Until 4 o’clock

3. Selama lima tahun

c. Until 2010

4. Sampai tahun dua ribu sepuluh

d. For three hours

5. Sampai jam empat

e. Until 12 o’clock

Latihan 3—Rangkai Kata Urutkan kata-kata berikut sehingga menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti: 1. “How long did they live in Sulawesi?” Berapa—mereka—di—tinggal—lama—Sulawesi? 2. “How long did you work at the ofce (earlier) today?” Berapa—kantor—lama—bekerja—di—Anda—tadi? 3. “How long did they walk to the city center?” Berapa—mereka—di—pusat—berjalan-jalan—lama—kota? 4. “What did Mr Yusuf do?” Apa—oleh—Bapak—yang—dilakukan—Yusuf? 5. “What did they do?” Apa—mereka—yang—lakukan?

Latihan 4—Jawaban Lengkap Translate the following questions into good Indonesian. For example: What did she do this morning? You write: Apa yang dia lakukan tadi pagi? or Apa yang dilakukannya tadi pagi? 1. What did Mr Alni do after breakfast? 2. What did the woman do at night? 3. What did they do after going shopping? 4. What did he do last night? 5. What did she do before taking a bath? 6. What did Mrs. Alni do after watching the movie? 7. What did they do after meeting at the restaurant? 8. What did Mr Alni do after getting up? 9. What did her husband do before buying fowers? 10. What did his wife do at fve o’clock in the afternoon?

Lesson 46

Latihan 5—Menjodohkan: Pertanyaan dan Jawaban Jodohkan pertanyaan di sebelah kiri dengan jawabannya di sebelah kanan. 1.

a. Karena dia mau bertemu seseorang di restoran.

2.

b. Tadi malam ia pergi ke gedung olahraga.

3.

c. Pak Alni yang membeli bunga itu.

4.

d. Mereka pergi ke bioskop sesudah berbelanja.

5.

e. Dia berjalan-jalan di sekeliling rumahnya pada sore hari.

6.

f. Ya, mereka juga makan dan bercakap-cakap.

7.

g. Ia pergi ke sekolah tadi pagi.

8.

h. Pak Yusuf pergi ke kantor sesudah makan pagi.

Latihan 6—Menjodohkan: Vocabulary Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. lobi

hour

akhirnya

happy

oleh

rose

telur goreng

to pay

berapa lama

how long

membayar

including

jam

by

di antaranya

fried egg

masakan

lobby

senang

to kiss

mawar

to choose

waktu

fnally

seorang

a person

mencium

while

memilih

luxurious

pipi

time, when

mewah

cooked food

sambil

cheeks

Latihan 7—Put in Order Refer to the reading text “Pak Yusuf Under Surveillance II” and number the events in order of how they appear in the passage. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

____ works at the ofce for two hours _1__ gets up early in the morning ____ has breakfast while listening to the radio ____ meets a pretty, well-dressed young woman in the lobby ____ goes to the ofce by car ____ has a bath etc. and gets dressed ____ goes to a fower shop and buys fowers ____ has an expensive lunch with the young woman: they drink champagne ____ sits in the garden reading a newspaper and drinking cofee

Lesson 46 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

____ goes to a fashion shop: buys an expensive dress for his young friend ____ leaves the ofce and walks to a liquor shop: buys a bottle of wine ____ returns to his ofce, but doesn’t do any work ____ leaves the ofce, calls a taxi and goes somewhere ____ comes home late at night ____ calls a taxi and goes to a luxury hotel

Latihan 8—Isian: Pak Yusuf Under Surveillance Dengarkanlah Rekaman 046-01 ini dan lengkapilah bacaan di bawah ini. Kemarin pagi Pak Yusuf bangun jam enam. Sesudah bangun dia duduk di kebun di belakang rumahnya selama kira-kira satu jam. Di sana dia minum kopi dan __________ surat kabar. Jam tujuh pagi ia masuk ke rumah untuk mandi, __________ gigi dan bersisir. Pak Yusuf __________ di kamar tidur. Lalu dia sarapan di ruang makan. Pak Yusuf makan roti dengan telur goreng dan minum kopi manis. Sambil makan dia juga __________ musik di radio. Lalu dia __________ komputer untuk membaca berita. Kira-kira jam delapan dia naik mobil ke kantor. Dia sampai di kantor jam sembilan kurang seperempat. Pak Yusuf __________ di kantor selama dua jam. Kira-kira jam sebelas siang ia keluar dari kantornya dan __________ kaki ke toko makanan. Di toko itu ia membeli sebotol anggur yang mahal sekali. Lalu ia berjalan ke toko bunga. Di toko bunga dia __________ bunga mawar yang merah dan putih. Kemudian Pak Yusuf __________ taksi. Ia naik taksi ke Hotel Sheraton ‒ hotel mewah yang tidak jauh dari pusat kota. Ia masuk ke hotel dan duduk di lobi. Jam dua belas siang seorang perempuan datang. Dia cantik sekali dan masih muda. Umurnya kira-kira sembilan belas tahun. Ia __________ pakaian yang mewah. Ia duduk di samping Pak Yusuf. Pak Yusuf __________ bunga mawar kepada perempuan itu. Mereka __________ selama setengah jam. Lalu mereka __________ di restoran. Restoran di Sheraton itu mewah dan __________. Masakannya masakan Prancis! Mereka makan roti dengan telur kaviar. Pak Yusuf membuka botol yang dibelinya. Ternyata bukan anggur tetapi sampanye! Selama satu jam mereka makan dan to __________, tertawa sambil minum sampanye. Pak Yusuf __________ __________ sekali. Kira-kira jam setengah dua mereka __________ dari restoran. Di Hotel Sheraton ada __________ toko, di antaranya toko pakaian wanita. Mereka kira-kira satu jam di toko itu.

Lesson 46 Perempuan yang cantik itu __________ beberapa baju yang __________ dan mahal. Akhirnya dia __________ baju bagus dari Italia. Pak Yusuf yang __________. Pada waktu mereka keluar dari toko perempuan itu __________ pipi Pak Yusuf. Sesudah itu Pak Yusuf __________ ke kantornya. Tetapi ia tidak __________. Ia hanya duduk saja di mejanya dan melihat ke luar jendela. Kira-kira jam setengah enam ia __________ dan __________ ke luar. Ia __________ taksi, tetapi saya tidak tahu ke mana ia pergi. Pak Yusuf __________ ke rumahnya kira-kira jam sebelas malam. __________ mandi ia tidur.

Latihan 9—Teka Teki Silang (TTS) Mendatar: 1. some; several 3. a; one (person) 5. fnally; in the end 6. to kiss, smell, snif 8. to choose 11. while 16. happy; to like sth. 17. to try (to do sth.) 18. to pay 19. cheeks Menurun: 1. to stand; to stand up 2. when; at the time when 4. detective 7. to wait (for) 8. a rose 9. cooked food 10. by 12. breakfast 13. luxurious 14. lobby (of a hotel) 15. hour

Lesson 47

47 During and After the Muslim Fast

Aims • To practise talking about daily routine with focus on the Fast and Idul Fitri.

Vocabulary Review Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings. bersiap-siap

to get ready

menurut

according to, says

kue

cake

penting

important

membeli

to buy something

sambil

while

memperbaiki

to repair sth broken

sembahyang

to pray

mencoba

to try to do something

tertawa

to laugh

menunggu

to wait for s.o. or sth.

lantai

foor

Ramadhan—The Holiest Month for Muslims

Ketupat (Shutterstock)

demands of the Fast.

By most counts almost 90% of Indonesians are Muslims. This adds up to over 200 million people making Indonesia the largest Muslim country in the world. Probably the most important religious event for this huge community is the annual Bulan Puasa (Fasting Month) in the Muslim month of Ramadhan. During Ramadhan Muslims are required to abstain from food and drink (and other indulgences like cigarettes and sex) during daylight hours. It is – or should be – a time of special piety. People strive in a more focussed way to implement the teachings of Islam. They recite and study the Qur’an. They assemble for special prayers. They try to create an atmosphere of Islamic order and community. In many places schools close and ofces reduce their workload so that staf can more fully meet the

During Ramadhan people have to get up very early to have breakfast before dawn. This early breakfast is called sahur. After a long, often very trying, day in the tropical heat without eating or drinking, at nightfall people break their fast. This is called buka puasa, and often simply buka or berbuka. In households, neighbourhoods, work places and mosques across Indonesia, Muslims assemble to pray, hear verses from the Qur’an and perhaps listen to good advice on how to understand Islam better and live a more fully Islamic life. As the sky darkens people sip a drink to

Lesson 47 break their fast, then eat in groups with family, neighbours, friends and work colleagues. Families and communities – even very poor people – strive to prepare special foods for the buka puasa meal. It is a memorable time, a time when people try to put the highest ideals of Islam at the fore front of daily living. The end of the Fast is celebrated in a festival called Idul Fitri (a variant of the Arabic ʻĪd al-Fiṭr – in English sometimes rendered as "Eid al-Fitr"). Many Javanese people call the celebration Lebaran which means something like “the time after the fast is over”. Many millions of those who live in big cities head back to their home villages (known as mudik or pulang kampung) to celebrate with their families. For two weeks it seems the whole country is on the move. Roads are clogged, inter-city trafc slows to a crawl, trains and buses are jam-packed, air bookings are impossible to get. City people on their way to their ancestral homes in the countryside are weighed down with food, new clothes and oleh-oleh gifts for family and neighbours. In the nation’s villages, as people await family from the city, houses are spruced up and yards swept clean. Beds and sleeping platforms are rearranged to accommodate the infux, and mysterious presents lie wrapped and stacked in cupboards. Tables groan under the burden of bottled drinks and packets of biscuits. Special cakes and savouries are cooked. Almost synonymous with Idul Fitri are the rice dumplings called ketupat (see picture). Rice is wrapped in small cube-like packets woven from coconut leaves or palm-tree fronds. These are boiled, and individual grains disappear as the cooked rice expands to tightly fll its leaf casing. The dense lumps of rice are eaten with rendang (beef chunks cooked until dry in a spicy sauce with coconut) or gulai ayam (spicy chicken stew). At sunset on the last day of the Fast exuberant celebrations break out. Mosques are packed. Through the night there are prayers of thanksgiving. Many people gather to chant devotional phrases over and over in Arabic, like Allahu akbar (God is great) and La illaha ilallah (There is no god but God). People walk the streets in groups, or crisscross their neighbourhoods on the backs of trucks, chanting these phrases in chorus, very often to the accompaniment of noisy displays of freworks. In the quiet of the following morning many people attend mass morning prayers. They put on their very best clothes, usually brand new. Men greet one another with a handshake and the Arabic phrase Assalam alaikum (Peace be upon you) to which the answer is Wa alaikum as-salam (And peace be upon you too). This is followed by Selamat Hari Raya (Happy Feast Day). Women greet one another with a traditional cium (cheek pressed against cheek, right and left, accompanied by a snif). Back home children greet their parents and grandparents with special displays of gratitude and respect. Children (including the adult children of elderly parents) kneel before their seated parents, place their head on their parents’ lap or kiss their parents’ hands and ask for their blessings. The mother and father will place their hands on their children, kiss them and murmur words of love and encouragement. It is a moment of great tenderness. Occasionally it is very emotional. Some people go to family graves, tidy them up and pray for the repose of the dead. People also try to “make a new start” with family, friends, neighbours and work colleagues by saying Saya minta maaf lahir dan batin, very often shortened to Maaf lahir batin. This means literally “I ask for forgiveness outwardly and inwardly”, although this is the most minimal of translations. More fully the sentence might be rendered “If I have given you any ofence, please forgive me, not just as a matter of polite etiquette, but from the heart... and I too plead for your forgiveness not just as an outward gesture, but from the bottom of my heart.” Then everyone sets of to visit relatives, neighbours and friends. The ritual of making and receiving visits, serving drinks and special foods, catching up on personal news, and of course, asking for forgiveness lahir dan batin is repeated a thousand times in the two days of the Idul Fitri holiday. It is a very special time for children. Decked out in their new clothes, and often with new toys, children gambol around their parents and stuf themselves with the special goodies of Hari

Lesson 47 Raya. As always in Indonesia (or almost always), children are treated with remarkable public afection and tolerance.

Test Yourself: Ramadhan – The Holiest Month for Muslims Refer to the text above to answer the following questions. 1. What is the largest Muslim country in the world? a. Egypt b. Saudi Arabia c. Indonesia d. Bangladesh 2. What is the early breakfast the people have during Ramadhan called? a. makan pagi b. sahur c. puasa d. buka 3. What is it called when people break fast at nightfall? a. buka puasa b. buka makan c. sahur d. puasa 4. What is the name of the festival celebrated at the end of the Fast? a. puasa b. buka puasa c. Idul Fitri d. sahur 5. What is the name for the small gifts when one has returned home? a. oleh-oleh b. makanan c. puasa d. kampung 6. What is the name of the rice dumplings synonymous with Idul Fitri? a. oleh-oleh b. makanan c. ketupat d. rendang 7. What are ketupat often eaten with? a. makanan b. air putih c. rendang d. oleh-oleh 8. What is the Indonesian phrase for “Happy Feast Day”? a. Selamat Buka Puasa. b. Selamat Ramadhan. c. Selamat Hari Raya. d. Selamat Makan. 9. What is one way to ask for forgiveness and to “start fresh” during Idul Fitri? a. Saya orang yang baik b. Saya suka Anda

Lesson 47 c. Saya sayang Anda d. Saya minta maaf lahir dan batin 10.What is the shortened form of Saya minta maaf lahir dan batin? a. Saya lahir batin b. Saya maaf batin c. Maaf lahir batin d. Minta maaf lahir

Celebrating the End of the Fast Here is an account of how an average family observes the Muslim Fast and celebrates its end by returning to their home village at Idul Fitri. Most words in the narrative have appeared in previous lessons, so you should recognise them and be able to read the narrative reasonably fuently. But there are a number of new high-frequency words like setiap (each, every), menurut (according to), haus (thirsty) and several more. In addition there are a number of new words that are not so frequent in general conversation, but are very frequent when you are talking about Islam, and about the annual Fast in particular. Here is a list of these more “specialised” terms. Study them frst before you start reading. (They are also in the vocabulary cards for this lesson.) Allah Allahu Akbar ayat beragama ...

God God is great a verse (from a holy book) to be a follower of such-and-such a religion, thus beragama Islam a Muslim, a follower of Islam, adhering to Islam (also: buka puasa) to have a meal at the end of a day’s fasting berbuka puasa to fast berpuasa to thank God bersyukur the fasting month bulan puasa a prayer (usually a personal, meditative prayer) doa an Islamic feast day Hari Raya the (usually) two days of celebrations and festivities at the end of the Idul Fitri fasting month of Ramadhan dense lumps of rice cooked in packets woven from leaves and served at ketupat meals during Idul Fitri outwardly and inwardly lahir dan batin the Javanese term for Idul Fitri, the celebration at the end of the annual Lebaran Fast mohon maaf lahir dan to ask for forgiveness. This phrase is only used during the Idul Fitri celebrations. In this particular phrase mohon maaf is always used instead batin of minta maaf to go back to one’s hometown (to celebrate Idul Fitri). mudik a prophet nabi the prophet Muhammad Nabi Muhammad to make the pilgrimage to the Islamic holy land centred on Mecca in naik haji modern Saudi Arabia a fast, the Muslim Fast puasa

Lesson 47 sahur takbiran ulama

to have a meal before sunrise during the fasting month to chant Allahu Akbar! (God is great!) over and over a pious and learned Muslim

Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran Listen to Sound File 047-01 and read the transcription about Mr. Ridwan’s family celebrating Aidl Fitr. After that, check your understanding by doing Latihan 4 and 5.

B

apak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah berasal dari Kebumen di Jawa Tengah, tetapi sekarang mereka tinggal di Jakarta. Keluarga Bapak Ridwan beragama Islam. Selama bulan Ramadan orang Islam harus berpuasa dari pagi sampai sore. Mereka hanya makan dua kali sehari. Setiap hari Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah harus bangun pagi-pagi untuk sahur. Sesudah itu mereka mandi dan bersembahyang subuh. Lalu mereka bersiap-siap berangkat ke tempat kerja. Bapak Ridwan bekerja di pabrik perabot dan Ibu Hamidah berdagang batik di pasar. Kira-kira jam enam pagi Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah berangkat. Ibu Hamidah biasanya pulang pada pukul empat sore dan menyiapkan makanan untuk berbuka puasa. Kira-kira jam enam sore Bapak Ridwan sampai di rumah. Karena berpuasa mereka tidak hanya lapar dan haus, tetapi juga capai sekali. Sekitar jam setengah tujuh malam, saat hari mulai gelap, mereka berbuka. Biasanya mereka berbuka dengan minuman dan makanan yang manis sambil duduk di lantai. “Hari Raya Idul Fitri nanti, apakah kita akan mudik ke Kebumen, Pak?” tanya Ibu Hamidah. “Iya, seperti biasanya kita kan mudik Lebaran,” jawab Bapak Ridwan. “Ibu dan bapak pasti menunggu kita. Mereka sudah tua. Selama satu tahun mereka tidak bertemu dengan kita.” Menurut Bapak Ridwan, berkumpul di rumah orang tua saat Lebaran penting sekali. Dua hari sebelum Idul Fitri keluarga Ridwan berangkat ke stasiun kereta Jatinegara dari rumah mereka. Stasiun Jatinegara sangat ramai karena banyak orang yang mau pulang kampung. Semua orang membawa bermacam-macam barang untuk oleh-oleh. Perjalanan selama sebelas jam membuat mereka capai. Sebelum Bapak Ridwan datang, orang tuanya sudah bersiap-siap. Ayah Bapak Ridwan, Bapak Subarkat, memperbaiki pagar dan atap rumah. Ibu Bapak Ridwan membersihkan rumah dan masak. Dia membuat bermacam-macam masakan Idul Fitri, di antaranya ketupat dan rendang. Mereka juga membeli baju baru untuk anak-anak, dan banyak minuman. Orang tua Bapak Ridwan senang sekali karena keluarga mereka dapat berkumpul. Seperti biasa, malam sebelum Hari Raya Bapak Ridwan dan Bapak Subarkat ikut takbiran. Bapak Subarkat memimpin orang sekampung untuk berkeliling desa pada malam hari Lebaran. Besoknya semua bangun pagi-pagi untuk sembahyang Idul Fitri. Semua berdoa kepada Allah karena mereka dapat berpuasa dengan baik selama satu bulan. Sesudah kembali ke rumah Bapak Ridwan sekeluarga memohon maaf kepada orang tuanya. Besoknya Bapak Ridwan dan keluarganya berkunjung ke rumah teman-temannya. Mereka makan, minum, bercakap-cakap, tertawa dan mengucapkan “Selamat Hari Raya. Mohon

Lesson 47

maaf lahir dan batin.” Anak-anak kecil juga senang. Mereka bisa bermain dengan teman-teman. Di mana-mana orang bersalaman mohon maaf dengan mengucapkan “Selamat Hari Raya. Mohon maaf lahir dan batin.”

Exercise 47-01 The statements in this exercise are based on the narrative Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran but each of them is wrong. None of them fts exactly with the narrative you have read. Write a response to each of the incorrect statements. Begin with the phrase Maaf, saya kira... and state what the correct statement should be based on the narrative. Feel free to copy words and phrases from the narrative to complete your response. Study this example frst. Wrong statement: Fatimah kuliah di Fakultas Ilmu Bumi, Universitas Indonesia. You write: Maaf, saya kira Fatimah kuliah di Fakultas Ekonomi Universitas Widya Buana. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Bapak Ridwan berasal dari Padang di Sumatra. Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah berangkat ke tempat kerja jam setengah delapan pagi. Setiap malam keluarga Bapak Ridwan berbuka puasa di rumah makan. Bapak Ridwan dan keluarganya naik pesawat terbang ke Kebumen. Adik Bapak Ridwan datang ke Kebumen dari Bali dengan dua anaknya. Ayah Bapak Ridwan pandai masak. Dia membuat kue. Bapak Ridwan dan adiknya Bapak Subarkat tidur di lantai dapur. Sesudah bersembahyang di alun-alun Fatimah dan Khadijah menonton flm. Di alun-alun kira-kira ada tiga ratus orang yang berkumpul untuk bersembahyang. Ibu Hamidah guru sekolah menengah. Dia mengajar sejarah.

Exercise 47-02 Answer these questions using the data given in the narrative Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran. Make sure you choose the right negator! 1. Apakah Ibu Hamidah guru sekolah menengah? A. Bukan. Ibu Hamidah berdagang batik di pasar. B. Bukan. Ibu Hamidah guru sekolah dasar. C. Tidak. Ibu Hamidah berdagang batik di sekolah. D. Tidak. Ibu Hamidah bekerja di pabrik perabot. 2. Apakah Bapak Ridwan bekerja di kantor pemerintah? A. Tidak. Bapak Ridwan bekerja di toko buku. B. Tidak. Bapak Ridwan bekerja di pabrik perabot. C. Bukan. Bapak Ridwan berdagang batik di pasar. D. Bukan. Bapak Ridwan itu berdagang buah di pasar. 3. Apakah Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah sahur sesudah jam lima pagi? A. Bukan. Mereka sahur pada jam tiga pagi. B. Tidak. Mereka sahur sebelum jam lima pagi. C. Bapak Subarkat berasal dari Bali.

Lesson 47 4. Apakah dia beragama Hindu? A. Bukan. Ia beragama Islam. B. Tidak. Ia beragama Islam. 5. Apakah Bapak Ridwan berbicara tentang olahraga pada waktu berbuka puasa? A. Tidak. Ia tidak berbicara tentang olahraga. B. Bukan. Ia bukan berbicara tentang olahraga. 6. Apakah rumah orang tua Bapak Ridwan di Rejomulyo itu baru? A. Tidak. Rumahnya lama. B. Bukan. Rumahnya lama. 7. Apakah Bapak Ridwan pegawai pemerintah? A. Tidak. Ia seorang pengusaha. B. Tidak. Ia seorang pedagang perabot. C. Bukan. Ia seorang pegawai pabrik perabot. 8. Apakah ayah Bapak Ridwan punya anjing? A. Tidak. Ia tidak punya anjing. B. Bukan. Ia bukan punya anjing. 9. Apakah Fatimah itu laki-laki? A. Tidak. Fatimah tidak laki-laki. B. Bukan. Fatimah bukan laki-laki. 10. Apakah anak-anak kecil hanya bermain di dalam rumah saja? A. Tidak. Mereka juga bermain ke rumah teman-temannya. B. Bukan. Mereka juga bermain ke rumah teman-temannya.

Retelling the Narrative of Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran The narrative Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran brings together most of the themes, vocabulary and grammar that you have practised in Module 3 and also recycles much of what you studied in previous modules. Here is a list of the most important of these elements. ➢ personal details (place of origin, age, marital status, work and study) ➢ place of residence (components of house and garden) ➢ family and kinship ➢ daily routine (including time of day at which events happen) ➢ vehicles and travel ➢ food and drink ➢ shopping ➢ me- verbs (like memilih, membaca, menulis etc.) ➢ the events and vocabulary of the Muslim Fast and Idul Fitri Using these resources you can take the story of Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran as a kind of beginning

Rambu di Jalan Raya Bahasa Sekitar, Kira-Kira, and Kurang Lebih In the above narrative “Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran” we encounter the phrases: “Kira-kira jam enam pagi Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah berangkat.” and “Sekitar jam setengah tujuh malam mereka berbuka."” Sekitar, kira-kira, and kurang lebih are adverbs that function as modifiers for cardinal numbers. They all have the same meaning: approximately, about, more or less. Sekitar can also function as a noun with the meaning “surroundings” or “environs"”. Jakarta dan sekitarnya. Jakarta and its environs. Anak-anak bermain di sekitar rumah. The children play around the house.

Lesson 47 point and re-tell it – with changes – in your own words. Sticking (in broad terms) with the events and vocabulary of Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran, change the names and characteristics of people and places. For example, you can compile a narrative about bulan puasa and mudik Lebaran involving, say, Umi, a 19 year old shop assistant. Here are Umi’s details: Nama: Umi Keterangan diri: perempuan berumur 19 tahun, belum kawin Agama: beragama Islam Alamat: Wonokromo di kota Surabaya Tempat kerja: Toko pakaian Busana Baru di pusat kota Surabaya Ayah: Abdullah Sayuti, berumur 45 tahun, bekerja di kantor pemerintah Ibu: Siti Maryam, berumur 40 tahun, tukang masak restoran Adik: Nur, perempuan, berumur 15 tahun, bersekolah di kelas 3 sekolah menengah pertama Rumah kakek & nenek: di desa Kemiri, 60 kilometer dari Malang, Jawa Timur Kendaraan: punya sepeda motor kecil Makanan: suka ikan goreng etc. etc. With these basic details, and making creative use of the descriptions and events in Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran, construct your own extended narrative describing what Umi and her family do during the Fast and when they pulang kampung to her grandparents’ home in Kemiri at Idul Fitri. Make your narrative as detailed as you can with as many digressions as your current command of Indonesian permits you to make. Make liberal use of phrases and vocabulary from Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran but feel free to change details or add new events and people. With a fellow student, or with your tutor/instructor, ask and answer questions about the narrative, perhaps taking the questions in Exercise 47-02 as your beginning point. Repeat your narrative over and over, each time adding or changing details, improving correctness, responding better to questions and smoothing out your fuency. When you can do this well, put yourself in Umi’s place, turning your narrative into a frst-person account using saya and kami.

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. bersiap-siap

to repair sth

menunggu

while

kue

to buy sth

penting

to laugh

membeli

cake

sambil

to wait (for)

memperbaiki

to try to do sth

tertawa

foor

mencoba

to get ready

lantai

important

Latihan 2—Menjodohkan: Terms of Ramadhan Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1. Allah

a. to fast

2. Allahu Akbar

b. to break fast

3. beragama

c. thirsty

Lesson 47 4. berbuka puasa

d. God (used by Christians and Muslims alike)

5. berpuasa

e. God is great

6. bulan puasa

f. times, a time

7. Idul Fitri

g. the Eid al-Fitr holiday at end of Ramadhan

8. puasa

h. the fasting month

9. gelap

i. dark

10. haus

j. hungry

11. kali

k. a fast

12. lapar

l. to lead

13. libur

m. to be a follower of such-and-such a religion

14. memimpin

n. to ask for forgiveness

15. mengucapkan

o. a present brought back for family or friends

16. minta maaf

p. to say something, to utter something

17. oleh-oleh

q. a holiday, a day of

Latihan 3—Isian: Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran Dengarkanlah Rekaman 047-01 dan lengkapilah bacaan di bawah ini. Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah __________ dari Kebumen di Jawa Tengah, tetapi sekarang mereka tinggal di Jakarta. Keluarga Bapak Ridwan beragama Islam. Selama bulan Ramadan orang Islam harus __________ dari pagi sampai sore. Mereka hanya makan dua kali __________. Setiap hari Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah harus bangun pagi-pagi __________ sahur. Sesudah itu mereka mandi dan __________ subuh. Lalu mereka bersiap-siap berangkat ke __________ kerja. Bapak Ridwan bekerja di pabrik __________ dan Ibu Hamidah berdagang batik di pasar. __________ jam enam pagi Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah berangkat. Ibu Hamidah biasanya pulang pada pukul empat sore dan menyiapkan makanan untuk berbuka puasa. Kira-kira jam enam sore Bapak Ridwan sampai di rumah. Karena berpuasa mereka tidak hanya __________ dan haus, tetapi juga __________ sekali. Sekitar jam setengah tujuh malam, saat hari mulai __________, mereka berbuka. Biasanya mereka berbuka dengan minuman dan makanan yang __________ sambil duduk di lantai. ‘Hari Raya Idul Fitri nanti, apakah kita akan __________ ke Kebumen, Pak?’ tanya Ibu Hamidah. ‘Iya, seperti biasanya kita kan mudik Lebaran,’ jawab Bapak Ridwan. ‘Ibu dan bapak pasti menunggu kita. Mereka sudah tua. Selama satu tahun mereka tidak bertemu de-

Lesson 47 ngan kita.’ Menurut Bapak Ridwan, berkumpul di rumah orang tua __________ Lebaran penting sekali. Dua hari sebelum Idul Fitri keluarga Ridwan berangkat ke stasiun kereta Jatinegara dari rumah mereka. Stasiun Jatinegara sangat __________ karena banyak orang yang mau pulang kampung. Semua orang membawa __________ barang untuk oleh-oleh. Perjalanan selama sebelas jam membuat mereka capai. Sebelum Bapak Ridwan datang, orang tuanya sudah bersiap-siap. Ayah Bapak Ridwan, Bapak Subarkat, __________ pagar dan atap rumah. Ibu Bapak Ridwan __________ rumah dan masak. Dia membuat bermacam-macam masakan Idul Fitri, di antaranya ketupat dan rendang. Mereka juga membeli baju baru untuk anak-anak, dan banyak minuman. Orang tua Bapak Ridwan senang __________ karena keluarga mereka dapat __________. Seperti biasa, malam sebelum Hari Raya Bapak Ridwan dan Bapak Subarkat ikut takbiran. Bapak Subarkat __________ orang sekampung untuk berkeliling desa pada malam hari Lebaran. Besoknya semua bangun pagi-pagi untuk sembahyang Idul Fitri. Semua berdoa kepada __________ karena mereka dapat berpuasa dengan baik selama satu bulan. Sesudah kembali ke rumah Bapak Ridwan sekeluarga memohon __________ kepada orang tuanya. Besoknya Bapak Ridwan dan keluarganya berkunjung ke rumah teman-temannya. Mereka makan, minum, bercakap-cakap, __________ dan mengucapkan ‘Selamat Hari Raya. __________ maaf lahir dan batin.’ Anak-anak kecil juga senang. Mereka bisa __________ dengan teman-teman. Di mana-mana orang bersalaman mohon maaf dengan mengucapkan ‘Selamat Hari Raya. Mohon maaf lahir dan batin.’

Latihan 4—Pemahaman (1) Jawablah pertanyaan-pertanyaan di bawah ini. 1. Keluarga Bapak Ridwan berasal dari... A. Jakarta B. Jawa Timur C. Jawa Tengah D. Yogyakarta 2. Apa pekerjaan Bapak Ridwan? A. Berdagang perabot B. Pegawai pabrik perabot C. Berdagang batik D. Pegawai toko batik

...........................................................................

Lesson 47 3. Siapa yang menyiapkan makanan untuk berbuka puasa?

.......................................

4. Pak Ridwan dan Bu Hamidah biasanya berbuka puasa sambil duduk di... A. kursi B. lantai C. sofa D. halaman 5. Mereka naik apa ke Kebumen?

................................................................................

6. Apa yang dibawa orang pada saat mudik?

.............................................................

7. Berapa lama perjalanan dari Jakarta ke Kebumen?

..............................................

8. Kapan mereka takbiran? A. Sebelum berbuka puasa B. Sesudah sembahyang subuh C. Pada malam hari sebelum Idul Fitri D. Pagi-pagi sebelum sembahyang subuh 9. Siapa yang memimpin takbiran (berkeliling desa pada malam Lebaran)? A. Bapak Ridwan B. Ibu Hamidah C. Bapak Subarkat D. Teman Bapak Ridwan 10. Apa yang diucapkan orang pada saat Lebaran?

....................................................

Latihan 5—Pemahaman (2) Benar atau Salah? 1. Mereka makan tiga kali sehari di bulan Ramadan. A. Benar B. Salah 2. Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah libur selama bulan Ramadan. A. Benar B. Salah 3. Satu jam sesudah Ibu Hamidah pulang, Pak Ridwan pulang. A. Benar B. Salah 4. Keluarga Bapak Ridwan berbuka puasa kira-kira jam setengah tujuh malam. A. Benar B. Salah 5. Biasanya mereka berbuka dengan makanan manis. A. Benar B. Salah 6. Mereka ke rumah orang tuanya naik kereta api. A. Benar B. Salah

Lesson 47 7. Ada banyak makanan di rumah orang tua Bapak Ridwan saat Lebaran. A. Benar B. Salah 8. Ibu Hamidah masak banyak sekali untuk Lebaran. A. Benar B. Salah 9. Pada Hari Raya idul Fitri, mereka bisa bangun siang. A. Benar B. Salah 10. Besoknya, sesudah Hari Raya Idul Fitri, Bapak Ridwan hanya tinggal di rumah untuk makan dan minum bersama keluarga. A. Benar B. Salah

Latihan 6—Rangkai Kata Urutkan kata-kata berikut sehingga menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti: 1. “Mr. Ridwan’s family are followers of Islam.” Keluarga—Ridwan—Bapak—beragama—Islam. 2. “The fasting month is very important for all Muslims.” Bulan—semua—penting—sekali—puasa—untuk—orang—Islam. 3. “At around 6:00 Mr. Ridwan and Mrs. Hamidah depart to their work place.” Kira-kira—Ibu Hamidah—berangkat—dan—Bapak Ridwan—ke—pagi—tempat —jam enam—kerja. 4. “But they cannot eat or drink during the day.” Tetapi—pada—makan—tidak—dan—minum—boleh—mereka—siang hari. 5. “They are all hungry and thirsty.” Mereka—dan—semua—lapar—haus.

Latihan 7—Menjodohkan Dengarkanlah rekaman 047-02 dan pilihlah terjemahannya di sebelah kanan. 1.

a. Is Fatimah a boy?

2.

b. Mr Subarkat comes from Bali. Is he a Hindu?

3.

c. Does Mr Ridwan work in a government ofce?

4.

d. Is Mrs Hamidah a high school teacher?

5.

e. Do Mr Ridwan and Mrs Hamidah have a pre-dawn meal

6.

f. Is Kiai Haji Ahmad Abdulah a government ofcial?

7.

g. Did the director of the factory talk about sports when

Lesson 47 8.

h. Is the house of Mr Ridwan’s parents new?

9.

i. Do the children only play in the house?

10.

j. Does Mr Ridwan’s father have a dog?

Latihan 8—Menjodohkan Jodohkanlah pertanyaan di kolom kiri dengan jawaban yang tepat. 1. Apakah Ibu Hamidah guru sekolah menengah?

a. Bukan, dia berdagang batik di pasar.

2. Apakah Bapak Ridwan bekerja di kantor pemerintah?

b. Bukan, dia perempuan.

3. Apakah Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah sahur sesudah jam lima pagi?

c. Tidak, mereka juga bermain di halaman.

4. Bapak Subarkat dari Bali. Apakah dia beragama Hindu?

d. Tidak, rumahnya sudah lebih dari sepuluh tahun.

5. Apakah Bapak Kepala Pabrik berbicara tentang olahraga pada waktu berbuka puasa?

e. Bukan, dia bukan pegawai pemerintah.

6. Apakah rumah orang tua Pak Ridwan di Rejomulyo baru?

f. Tidak, mereka bersiap-siap untuk berangkat bekerja.

7. Apakah Kiai Haji Ahmad Abdullah pegawai pemerintah?

g. Tidak, dia hanya memelihara burung.

8. Apakah ayah Bapak Ridwan punya anjing?

h. Tidak, dia berbicara tentang olahraga pada waktu berbuka puasa.

9. Apakah Fatimah laki-laki?

i. Tidak, dia beragama Islam.

10. Apakah anak-anak kecil hanya bermain di dalam rumah saja?

j. Tidak, dia bekerja di pabrik.

Lesson 47

Latihan 9—Teka Teki Silang Mendatar: 4. to laugh 6. a prophet 8. another name for Idul Fitri 9. to visit one’s home town 15. to have such-andsuch a religion 16. the Hajj (pilgrimage to Mecca) 17. important 18. to fast Menurun: 1. to buy 2. to wait (for) 3. to repair something 5. God 7. to try to do something 10. a prayer 11. the fast 12. each, every 13. pre-sunrise breakfast 14. cake

Selamat Congratulations! You successfully completed Module 3. Keep up the good work and please do not forget to download Anki at http://ankisrs.net/ and to load the Anki decks for Modules 1 to 3 into the Anki application.

Support Us “The Indonesian Way” is free and will always remain free. In order to further develop TIW, we are dependent on the support of the user community. Our plans for the future encompass: 1) Developing iOS and Android applications 2) Replacing the online “Latihan” using technology that is not dependent on Flash. 3) Adding another Module consisting of 12 more lessons This can only be accomplished with your assistance. If, after completing each Module, all our users would donate $5 or $10, our goal could be accomplished in a short time. To make a donation please go to http://ulikozok.com/support Terima Kasih, Thank You, Mahalo

Wordlist

Wordlist for Module 3 

Lesson 32 berangkat (•angkat); Aduh! Sudah berangkat!



to depart, to set of (to go somewhere), to leave (on a trip); Oh no! It’s left already!

berkunjung (•kunjung); berkunjung ke  Glasgow

to visit (a place); to visit Glasgow

jam; jam dua belas lewat dua puluh



o’clock [a marker word used to express the time of day in hours and minutes]; twenty past twelve

kurang; jam delapan kurang seperempat



to (i.e. “before the hour” or “before the half-hour”, when telling the time); a quarter to eight.

léwat; pukul satu lewat lima



more, past (when telling the time); fve past one

makan siang



to have lunch

makan malam



to have dinner

perusahaan (•usaha); perusahaan asing



a company, a business enterprise; a foreign company

pukul; pukul satu



o’clock [a marker word used to express the time of day in hours and minutes]; one o’clock

sampai



until (a certain time), as far as (a certain place)

sarapan



to have breakfast

seperempat; dua seperempat



¼ (a quarter); 2¼ (two and a quarter)

setengah; satu setengah



½ (a half); 1½ (one and a half)

tengah malam



at midnight, in the middle of the night

tertawa (•tawa)



to laugh



Lesson 33 apaan (•apa); Orang apaan, tuh?



(Only used in informal speech Jakarta style) what kind of... [adding a note of humorous scepticism or cynicism to a question, especially a rhetorical question]; What kinda person is that?

banget; Cakep banget dia.



(Only used in informal speech Jakarta style) very, really; She’s really spunky.

bérés; Beres. Tunggu aja sebentar.



fxed up, put right, all okay, resolved, no worries; No worries. Just hang on a sec.

berlari (•lari)



to run

doyan; Nggak mau, aku nggak doyan. 

(Only used in informal speech Jakarta style) to like (especially food); I don’t want any. I don’t like it!

ikut kuliah

to attend a lecture, to go to a lecture



Wordlist jam berapa?; Jam berapa sekarang?



what time?; What time is it now?

kalo; kalo aku nggak mau.



(Only used in informal speech. In formal Indonesian use kalau) if, as for (me/him/that etc.), as far as ... is concerned; Speaking for myself, I don’t want to.

keliling

around

ketemu (•temu)



(informal for bertemu) to meet, to fnd

lapangan (•lapang); lapangan sepak bola



a feld, a ground, an open space (especially for recreation); a football feld

lebih suka; Saya lebih suka berjalan kaki.



to prefer, to like something better; I prefer to walk.

lumayan; Hmm ... masakanmu lumayan.



not bad, quite good; Hmmm... your cooking’s not bad.

nanti siang



this afternoon (spoken in the morning)

nanti soré



late this afternoon (spoken earlier in the day)

nanti malam



tonight (spoken earlier in the day)

paké; Pake bus apa taksi?



(Only used in informal speech) by (a certain mode of transport); (Shall we go) by bus or taxi?

pulang



to come home, to go home

punya; Aku udah ketemu ama dia punya ibu.



[a slangy word used to express possession]; I’ve met with his/her mother.

sih; Gimana sih, kamu!



[a slangy particle that adds emphasis and colour to a question, often making the question feel more pointed, even adding a note of irritation, bewilderment, surprise, puzzlement or sarcasm.]; What is it with you!?

tentu saja



of course

yuk; Minum yuk!



c’mon, let’s...; Let’s have something to drink!



Lesson 34 hari



a day

kadang-kadang



sometimes, occasionally, from time to time

musik



music

(pada) pagi hari



in the morning(s)

(pada) siang hari



in the afternoon(s)

(pada) soré hari



in the late afternoon(s)

(pada) malam hari



at night

salah; Maaf, saya kira Anda salah.



wrong, to be wrong; Sorry, I think you’re wrong.

sesudah (•sudah) ténis; bermain tenis

after 

tennis; to play tennis



Lesson 35 acara; Ada acara apa nanti malam?



a television/radio program, something you plan to do, a commitment to go somewhere; What are you planning to do tonight?

Wordlist apalagi; tidak banyak bus, apalagi hari  Minggu.

particularly, the more so, especially; There aren’t many buses, especially on a Sunday.

apartemén



an apartment, a fat, a unit

badminton



badminton; also bulu tangkis

berenang (•renang)



to swim, to go swimming

beristirahat (•istirahat)



to rest, to take a rest, to take a break

bersembahyang (•sembahyang)



to say/do your prayers, to worship

bersenam (•senam)



to do gymnastic, to do aerobics, to work out

cuma; cuma satu sudah cukup.



just, only; Just one will do.

émangnya kenapa?



(Colloquial) why? (what’s it to you), why? (why do you ask?)

kalian



(Colloquial) you (plural of kamu)

kegiatan (•giat)



an activity

kolam renang



a swimming pool

melakukan (•laku)



to do (something), to undertake (something); dilakukan be done

lalu

then; and so

lari pagi



early morning jogging

lu; Lu mau makan nggak?



you (Jakarta slang); Would you like something to eat?

makasih; Makasih duitnya ya.



(Colloquial) thanks; Thanks for the money.

musala



prayer room (for Muslims), a small mosque

ngapain; Lu lagi ngapain?



(Colloquial) why? why on earth...? what (is someone) doing? what for? what’s the point? what’s going on?; What are you doing?

nih; Mau ke mana, nih?



(Colloquial) this, at the moment, now; Where are you of to right now?

olahraga



sport

pacaran (•pacar); Dodi lagi pacaran sama siapa?



(Colloquial for berpacaran) to be going steady, to be dating, to be going out with; Who is Dodi going out with now?

senam



(Colloquial for bersenam) to do gymnastics, to do aerobics, to work out

sesudah (•sudah); sesudah pulang



after (doing something), after (a certain time), after going home

sulit



difcult, hard to do

taman; taman nasional



a park; a national park



Lesson 36 asal



bersama (•sama); bersama dengan hari libur

to originate (from) together; together with



kafe

a day of, a (day of for a) holiday, a one-day holiday a cofeeshop

kalau (Anda) bagaimana?; Kalau Pak Iman bagaimana?



what about (you)? what about (her/John etc.); What about Mr. Iman?

pasti; Tidak ada restoran? Pasti ada!



defnitely, sure to be, bound to (be...), must be (i.e. bound to be); No restaurant? There must be!

sekeluarga



the whole family

Wordlist sepi; Pasarnya sepi sekali.



quiet, lonely, deserted; The market was deserted.

suka sekali; Saya suka sekali bermain  tenis.

to really like, to enjoy, to love (doing something); I love playing tennis.

tidak boléh; Tidak boleh ada orang lain yang ikut.



not allowed to, shouldn’t, can’t (i.e. not permitted to); There shouldn’t be any other people coming along.

waktu senggang; Pada waktu senggang, saya ...



free time, spare time, leisure time; In my spare time, I ...



Lesson 37 anggur; buah anggur



wine; grapes

bulu tangkis



badminton

capai



tired

gelas



a glass (i.e. a tumbler you drink from), a drinking glass

kelab malam; also klab malam & club  malam

a night club

nanti dulu



just a moment, wait a moment, hang on a sec

percaya



to believe

semua; semua orang tahu



all, all of them, everyone, everybody; everyone knows.

tadi malam



last night

ternyata (•nyata); ternyata dia bukan teman yang baik



so ... after all, it turns out that ... after all (expressing mild surprise that something is contrary to expectations); So he wasn’t a true friend after all.

wiski



whisky



Lesson 38 bésok; besok pagi



tomorrow; tomorrow morning

hari ini



today

kemarin; kemarin siang



yesterday; yesterday afternoon

hari Minggu; hari Minggu yang lalu



Sunday; last Sunday

hari Senin; hari Senin malam



Monday; Monday night

hari Selasa; hari Selasa yang akan datang



Tuesday; next Tuesday

hari Rabu; hari Rabu pagi



Wednesday; Wednesday morning

hari Kamis; hari Kamis yang akan datang



Thursday; next Thursday

hari Jumat; hari Jumat yang lalu



Friday; last Friday

hari Sabtu; hari Sabtu malam



Saturday; Saturday night

malam Minggu



Saturday night (more common than Sabtu malam)

kapan?



when? (asking about time)

minggu; minggu yang lalu

week; last week

Sampai jumpa!

until (we) meet (again); see you! 

Lesson 39

Wordlist agén perjalanan



travel agent

jadwal



schedule

menurut



according to

penerbangan (•terbang)



fight

tikét



ticket



Lesson 40 kepada; Dia mengirimkan uang kepada suaminya.



to (when you are talking about something that is directed towards an individual or a group of people, not a place); She sent some money to her husband.

majalah



a magazine

membaca (•baca)



to read

membersihkan (•bersih)



to clean something

mencuci (•cuci)



to wash (something with water)

mendengarkan (•dengar)



to listen to something; to listen

menonton (•tonton); Saya suka menonton flm.



to watch something (especially TV, a sports match, a performance, a movie, a spectacle); I like seeing movies.

menulis (•tulis)



to write

menyapu (•sapu)



to sweep

novél



a novel

piring



a plate, the dishes

sapu



broom

sedang apa?



what are (you) doing?; what is (he/she) doing?

surat kabar



a newspaper

surat



a letter (i.e. an item of correspondence)



Lesson 41 bangun; bangun pagi



to get up (out of bed); to get up in the morning

berita; siaran berita



news; a newscast, a news broadcast

berpakaian (•pakai)



to get dressed

bersiap-siap (•siap)



to get ready, to make preparations, to prepare (for something)

bersisir (•sisir)



to comb

kemudian



then, after that

membeli (•beli)



to buy

mengambil (•ambil)



to go and get something, to fetch something, to reach out and remove, to pick up something

menggosok gigi (•gosok)



to brush your teeth

pemandangan (•pandang)



a view, a scene, a panorama, (natural) scenery

sebelum; sebelum itu



before (a certain time/event); before that

sendiri



by yourself/oneself (without help from anyone)



Lesson 42

Wordlist alat



a device, a tool, an implement

baju



clothes (in general), an upper-body garment, especially shirts, blouses etc.

éléktronik



electronic

habis



after (informal for sesudah)

ingin



to wish (to...), to want (to...)

jadi



(didn’t) happen, (didn’t) work out, so, therefore, thus

kami



we (excluding the person or persons you are talking to)

kerén



stylish, trendy

kita



we (including the person or persons you are talking to)

mencoba (•coba)



to try to do something, to try something out, to try on (clothes)

minggu



a week

nonton (•tonton)



(informal for menonton) to see, to watch something (especially TV, a sports match, a parade etc.)

sampai di + (name of place)



to arrive in/at (a place), to reach (a destination)

untuk



(in order) to

yang lalu



...ago, last...



Lesson 43 bahasa Belanda



Dutch (the language)

berkuasa (•kuasa)



to be in power, to be the dominant force

bikin



to make (something)

duduk-duduk



to sit around (in a casual or leisurely way)

dulu



in former times, a long time ago, used to (i.e. regularly happened in former times)

hukum



a law, the law (as a body of regulations or an area of study)

ibu kos



the landlady (in a boarding house)

kalo pagi



in the morning(s)

karena



because

kenapa



why?

macam-macam



all sorts (of), all kinds (of), various kinds of

mata kuliah



a subject (of study at a university), a course, a unit of study

membuat (•buat)



to make (something)

mengapa (•apa)



why?

memberikan (•beri)



to give something

ngorok



to snore

pagi-pagi



very early in the morning

sulit



difcult, hard to do

rumah kos



a boarding house

tadi pagi



this morning (spoken later in the day)

tadi siang



this afternoon (spoken later in the day)

Wordlist ya; Ini untuk saya, ya?



..., right? ...have you? ...do you? ...does he/she? ...okay? (seeking confrmation or approval); This is for me, right?

undang-undang



an act of parliament, law(s) of the land



Lesson 44 ada yang, ada ____ yang



some _[noun]_

ahli flsafat (also: flsuf)



a philosopher

berdagang (•dagang)



to trade, to earn a living buying & selling, to deal in such-&-such a commodity

berpikir (•pikir)



to think, to ponder, to ruminate

biji



a seed, a berry, a pip beans (e.g. cofee beans), the stone (in stone fruit)

bola voli



volley ball (sometimes simply: voli)

gitar



a guitar

istiméwa



special, exceptional, out of the ordinary

juta



million

kalah



to lose (a contest/fght etc.), to be defeated

kurang



don’t/doesn’t really..., isn’t/aren’t really...

lagu



a song, a tune, a piece of music

memperbaiki (•baik)



to repair something, to fx something broken

menang



to win

menjadi (•jadi)



to become, to be

menjual (•jual)



to sell something

menyanyi (•nyanyi)



to sing

menyanyikan (•nyanyi)



to sing (a certain song)

pandai



to be good at (doing something), clever, intelligent, smart

pernah



once, ever, at some time in the past

pintar



clever, intelligent, smart

sama sekali



absolutely, at all, completely, totally (in negative expressions)

tidak begitu...



not very..., not especially, not particularly...

yang lain



the other one

yang + [adjective]



the _[adjective]_ one



Lesson 45 memakai (•pakai)



to use something, to wear something

memelihara (•pelihara)



to keep (as a pet, domestic animal or farm animal)

mengajar (•ajar)



to teach (someone / students / pupils / a subject), to do teaching

menolong (•tolong)



to help someone (especially someone in difculty)

menunggu (•tunggu)



to wait, to wait for (someone / something), to await

minta tolong; Maaf, boleh saya minta  tolong?

to ask for assistance/help; Excuse me, could you help me?

Wordlist sejarah



history

selalu



always

selama; selama tiga minggu



for (a certain period of time); for three weeks

sendirian (•sendiri)



alone, on your own (i.e. without a companion)

sendiri; Mereka sendiri yang memperbaikinya.



self, -selves (myself, yourself etc. when you want to emphasise who did something); They themselves repaired it.

sudah cukup; Saya kira sudah cukup. 

that’s enough, that will do; I think that will do for the moment

tidak pernah



never (the opposite of “always”)

waktu; pada waktu itu



time; at that time



Lesson 46 akhirnya



fnally, in the end, eventually, lastly

berapa lama; Berapa lama flm ini?



how long; How long is this flm?

detektif



private detective

di antaranya



including, among them

jam; tiga setengah jam



hour / hours; three and a half hours

kaviar



caviar

lobi



the lobby (of a hotel)

masakan (•masak); masakan Perancis 

cooking, cuisine, cooked food; French cuisine

mawar



a rose (also bunga mawar)

membayar (•bayar)



to pay

memilih (•pilih)



to choose

mencium (•cium)



to kiss someone, to smell/snif something

méwah



luxurious

oléh; dilakukan oleh



by (i.e. done/made/written by); done by

pipi



cheeks

sambil



while

sampanye



champagne

senang



happy, enjoying yourself, to like something, to like doing something

seorang; seorang laki-laki



a, one (when you are counting people and there is just one person to be counted); a man / one man

waktu; also pada waktu; waktu saya sampai di rumah



when, at the time when (referring to a certain time in the past when something happened); when I arrived home

wanita



a woman, a lady



Lesson 47 Allah



God

Allahu akbar



God is great

Al-Quran



The Koran (the holy book of Islam)

ayat



a verse, a stanza (from a poem or from holy scripture); e.g. ayat-ayat Al-quran

Wordlist batik



batik

barang



a thing, goods

beragama (•agama); beragama Islam,  beragama Kristen

to be a follower of such-and-such a religion; a Muslim, a (Protestant) Christian

berbuka puasa; also simply berbuka or buka



to break your fast, to have a meal in the evening after a day of fasting

berkumpul (•kumpul)



to assemble, to gather

berpuasa (•puasa)



to fast, to abstain from food & drink

bersalaman (•salam)



to greet each other (usually by shaking hands)

bersyukur (•syukur)



to thank God

bésoknya



the next day

bulan puasa



the fasting month

di mana-mana



everywhere

doa



a prayer (especially a personal, meditative prayer)

gelap



dark

hari raya; Hari Raya Idul Adha



a feast day, a big religious holiday; the Festival of Sacrifce

haus



thirsty

Idul Fitri



the festival of Ied, the (usually two) days of celebrations at the end of the Muslim fasting month

kali



times, a time

ketupat



lumps of rice boiled in packets made from woven leaves (a special food eaten at Idul Fitri)

lahir dan batin



outwardly and inwardly

lantai



the foor (that you are standing on), a storey of a building

lapar



hungry

Lebaran



(the Javanese term for) the period of celebrations at the end of the Muslim fasting month

libur



to be shut/closed (for a holiday etc.), to have time of (from work/school etc.)

membawa (•bawa)



to bring

memimpin (•pimpin)



to lead

mengucapkan (•ucap)



to say something, to utter something

minta maaf



to ask for forgiveness

mohon maaf



to ask for forgiveness

mudik



to make a visit back to your home village in the countryside, to go upstream

nabi; Nabi Isa



a religious prophet; the Prophet Jesus

naik haji



to make the pilgrimage to Mecca

oléh-oléh



a gift/present brought back for family or a friend after a trip somewhere

perabot



furniture

puasa



fasting, the Islamic Fast

Wordlist réndang



a stew of beef chunks cooked until dry in spices and coconut milk

saat



a moment; a point in time; a short time; while; during

sahur



to eat a pre-dawn meal during the fasting month, to eat an early breakfast during the fasting month

sekitar



approximately, around, about

sekolah menengah



high school, secondary school

setiap



each, every

takbiran



to chant Allahu Akbar (God is Great) in chorus over and over

tempat kerja



work place

ulama



a very learned and pious Muslim

Keys to the Exercises

Lesson 32 Latihan 2: Latihan 3: Latihan 4: Latihan 5: Latihan 7:

1e, 2g, 3c, 4h, 5d, 6j, 7a, 8b, 9f, 10i 1i, 2a, 3f, 4c, 5g, 6h, 7d, 8e, 9b from left to right and top to bottom: 1e, 2c, 3h, 4f, 5b, 6g, 7d, 8a 1 Alastair McAlastair berkunjung ke kota Glasgow. 2 Jam berapa saya dapat keluar untuk berjalan-jalan? 3 Anda boleh sarapan dari jam tujuh sampai jam sebelas siang. Mendatar: 4 pegawai, 6 berapa, 7 sore, 8 kota, 10 minum, 13 lewat, 14 keluar, 15 sampai. Menurun: 1 melihat, 2 harus, 3 kurang, 5 siang, 6 bertanya, 9 boleh, 10 makan, 11 malam, 12 pagi.

Lesson 33 Latihan 2: Latihan 3: Latihan 7: Latihan 8: Latihan 9:

1c, 2d, 3b, 4a, 5g, 6h, 7f, 8e. 1d, 1. Jam berapa Anda ke bioskop? 2 Saya ke bioskop jam lima kurang seperempat. 3 Jam berapa pesawat terbang sampai? 4 Kira-kira jam setengah empat lewat lima. 1d, 2h, 3i, 4b, 5c, 6e, 7a, 8g, 9f. Mendatar: 1. teman, 3. makan, 6. berbelanja, 7. kembali, 9. gimana, 11. harus, 13. bioskop, 16. minum, 17. lapangan, 18. tidur, 19. bermain, 20. sekeliling, Menurun:, 2. nggak, 4. kuliah, 5. berlari, 6. bertemu, 8. mungkin, 10. tempat, 12. sampai, 14. sekarang, 15. ikut, 16. mandi

Lesson 34 Latihan 2: Latihan 3: Latihan 4: Latihan 5: Latihan 6: Latihan 7:

1 Pada, bermain, 2 bermain, 3 bertemu, 4 belajar, malam hari, 5 berjalan-jalan, 6 berkunjung, 7 berangkat, pada sore hari, 8 salah, 9 berbelanja. 1A, 2B, 3A, 4A, 5B, 6B. 1f, 2e, 3b, 4a, 5c, 6d. 1 Biasanya saya pergi ke kampus pada pagi hari. 2 Pada malam hari kadang-kadang saya belajar di perpustakaan. 3 Pada sore hari saya suka duduk di ruang tamu dan minum kopi. 4 Pada sore hari saya akan belajar dengan teman saya. 5 Adik saya tidak suka bermain tenis. 1A, 2A, 3B, 4B, 5A, 6B, 7B, 8B, 9A Mendatar: 3. angkot; 5. bertemu; 7. belajar; 8. pulang; 10. pagi; 11. ayah; 13. ruang; 14. lapangan; 15. setengah. Menurun: 1. perpustakaan; 2. murah; 4. kuliah; 5. berbelanja; 6. rumah; 9. pacar; 12. dengan.

Lesson 35 Latihan 2: Latihan 3: Latihan 4: Latihan 5: Latihan 6: Latihan 7: Latihan 8: Latihan 9:

1f, 2c, 3g, 4d, 5e, 6b, 7a, 8h. 1f, 2g, 3b, 4a, 5d, 6h, 7c, 8e. 1 Pada sore hari biasanya ada acara apa? 2 Biasanya ada kegiatan apa pada pagi hari? 3 Sesudah kuliah bahasa Inggris biasanya Anda pergi ke mana? 4 Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan sesudah pulang dari kantor? 5 Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam delapan pagi? 1B, 2A, 3C, 4B, 5A gimana, nih, ngapain, cuma, emangnya, nggak, malem, ama, makasih, kalian, main, aja 1i, 2e, 3j, 4h, 5a, 6c, 7f, 8d, 9g, 10k, 11b kegiatan, olahraga, senam, kolam renang, lari, sesudah, apartemen, pacaran, melakukan, badminton, dilakukan, taman, acara, beristirahat Mendatar: 2.sedang, 3.berbelanja, 4.musala, 5.berkunjung, 8.lakukan, 9.bersembahyang, 11.bekerja, 12.masih, 13.sulit, 14.masak, 15.pulang}. Menurun:1.bermain, 3.beristirahat, 6.kuliah, 7.berenang, 8.lapangan, bersenam, 10.tidur, 11.bertemu

Lesson 36 Latihan 2: Latihan 3: Latihan 4: Latihan 5: Latihan 6: Latihan 7: Latihan 9:

1d, 2e, 3c, 4b, 5a. 1e, 2b, 3a, 4f, 5d, 6c, g. 1e, 2g, 3c, 4a, 5b, 6d, 7j, 8f, 9h, 10i. 1k, 2j, 3e, 4a, 5f, 6b, 7i, 8h, 9c, 10d, 11g. 1a, 2b, 3a, 4b, 5a. beristirahat, kolam renang, olahraga, saya lebih suka masak di rumah, bekerja di kebun/berkebun, berjalan-jalan, saya sudah tua, boleh saya ikut, katanya/kata Ida, siapa tahu. 1 Apakah Anda suka berolahraga pada waktu senggang? 2 Kalau tidak bekerja, Anda suka berjalan-jalan ke mana? 3 Saya suka sekali berbelanja pada waktu senggang. 4 Pacar saya suka sekali bekerja di kebun pada waktu senggang. 5 Apa yang Anda lakukan pada hari libur? 6 Tadi pagi saya ke Toko Fajar

1

Keys to the Exercises bersama dengan teman saya Astuti. 7 Harganya cukup mahal, kira-kira Rp.50.000 untuk kopi dan kue.

Lesson 37 Latihan 2: Latihan 4: Latihan 6: Latihan 7:

1f, 2e, 3g, 4c, 5a, 6d, 7b 1C 2C 3B 4C 5BLatihan 5: 1d, 2f, 3e, 4c, 5b, 6a. 1 Jam berapa Anda lari pagi? 2 Jam berapa teman Anda akan pergi ke klab malam? 3 Pacar Anda mau berenang di kolam renang jam berapa? 4 Suami Anda mau berkunjung ke Pusat Mahasiswa jam berapa? 5 Jam berapa Anda mau bersembahyang di musala? Mendatar:1. bersembahyang, 3. kira-kira, 4. berenang, 7. ternyata, 8. susu, 10. pesta, 12. percaya, 14. warung, 17. acara, 18. kamu, 19.atau, 20.pusat. Menurun: 1.beristirahat, 2.berkunjung, 5.bertemu, 6.pulang, 9.hanya, 11.semua, 13.capai, 15.gelas, 16.pasti

Lesson 38 Latihan 1: Latihan 2: Latihan 3: Latihan 4: Latihan 5: Latihan 6: Latihan 7: Latihan 8: Latihan 9: Latihan 10:

Latihan 11:

1 mau; 2 boleh; 3 bisa; 4 masih; 5 sudah. ke mana; Jam berapa?; Sekarang; jauh; jam enam; besok; malam ini; nanti 1 Tidak ke mana-mana; 2A; 3C; 4A; 5D; 6 Sampai jumpa hari Senin;hari Selasa;hari Rabu;hari Kamis;hari Jumat;hari Sabtu;hari Minggu 1c, 2e, 3d 4g, 5a, 6b, 7h, 8f. 1D, 2B, 3C, 4C, 5B 1A, 2A, 3B, 4A, 5A, 6A 1h, 2l, 3a, 4g, 5c, 6j, 7b/k, 8i, 9e, 10f, 11d, 12b/k. 1 Hari Senin tanggal tujuh Mei. 2 Hari Jumat tanggal delapan belas Juni. 3 Kalau hari ini hari Senin, besok hari apa? 4 Kalau besok hari Rabu, hari apa hari ini? (Note that this sentence could also have been phrased “Kalau besok hari Rabu, hari ini hari apa?”) 5 Apakah Anda mau berbelanja dengan saya nanti malam jam tujuh? Mendatar: 1. bertemu, 3. berenang, 4. belajar, 5. kamis, 6. senin, 7. bekerja, 9. rabu, 10. jumat, 13. sabtu, 14. selasa, 15. bersembahyang, 16. bermain. Menurun: 1. berbelanja, 2. kemarin, 4. besok, 7. berbicara, 8. lusa, 11. minggu, 12. tanggal.

Lesson 39 Latihan 2: Latihan 4: Latihan 5: Latihan 6: Latihan 7: Latihan 8: Latihan 9:

1c, 2b, 3 kira-kira, 4 Rp. 500.000, 5a, 6 lebih murah, 7 yang paling murah, 8d, 9c, 10c. 1d, 2b, 3i, 4e, 5h, 6f, 7g, 8c, 9a. 1f, 2g, 3a, 4c, 5e, 6d, 7b. 1. 350.000, 2 180.000, 3 52.000, 4 4.800, 5 1.300, 6 15.700, 7 469. 1b, 2 jam tujuh lewat lima, 3 jam sembilan kurang dua puluh, 4 jam setengah sebelas kurang sepuluh, 5 jam satu kurang seperempat, 6 jam dua kurang dua puluh 1 Ada yang lebih murah? 2 Yang paling murah Mandala, tetapi Sabtusudah penuh. 3 Berapa lama penerbangan ke Yogyakarta? 4 Hari Sabtu penerbangan ke Palembang sudah penuh. 5 Boleh saya minta harga tiket ke Denpasar? Mendatar: 2.boleh; 3.saja; 5.jadwal; 6.jam; 8.bagaimana; 10.menurut; 12.harga; 15.penerbangan; 16.murah. Menurun: 1.kapan; 2.berapa; 3.sore; 4.lama; 7.tiket; 8.berangkat; 9.penuh; 11.tetapi; 13.bantu; 14.juga

Lesson 40 Latihan 2: Latihan 3: Latihan 4: Latihan 5: Latihan 6: Latihan 7:

Latihan 8:

membaca-to read; membersihkan-to clean sth; mendengarkan-to listen to sth; menulis-to write; mencucito wash sth; menonton-to watch sth; majalah-magazine; surat kabar-a newspaper; kepada-to, towards; surat-a letter; piring-plate, dish; sedang apa?-what are (you) doing? 1e (to attend a school), 2d (to pass away), 3c (a drink, beverage), 4f (all kind of fruits), 5b (a question), 6a (maid, servant, assistant) 1d, 2e, 3f, 4b, 5c, 6a. 1a, 2b, 3f, 4e, 5d, 6c. 1e, 2i, 3c, 4g, 5j, 6a, 7d, 8f, 9b, 10i. 1 Ibu Suratminingsih (sedang) mencuci piring. 2 Pak Fernandes (sedang) membaca surat kabar. 3 Keluarga Latumahina (sedang) menonton televisi. 4 Gerson (sedang) menulis surat. 5 Bambang (sedang) membaca buku. 6 Hendro (sedang) menyapu halaman/membersihkan halaman. 7 Keluarga Sucipto (sedang) mendengarkan radio. 8 Ibu Nia dan Ros (sedang) mencuci pakaian. 9 Orang-orang ini (sedang) menonton flm. 1b, 2b, 3a, 4c, 5d, 6a.

2

Keys to the Exercises Latihan 9: Latihan 10: Latihan 11:

1 menulis, 2 memasak, 3 mencuci, 4 menonton, 5 membaca, 6 membantu, 7 menyapu, 8 mendengar. Mendatar: 1 bercakap-cakap; 3 bertanya; 5 bersekolah; 7 berenang; 8 berwarna; 9 bermain; 11 bersenam; 12 berbicara; 13 bersembahyang; 14 berdiri; 15 berasal; 16 berkunjung. Menurun: 1 bertemu; 2 berbelanja; 3 bekerja; 4 berumur; 6 berjalan-jalan; 7 beristirahat; 10 berlari. Mendatar: 1 membantu; 5 menulis; 6 mencuci; 8 memanggil; 9 mendengarkan;10 mempunyai. Menurun: 2membersihkan; 3 membuka; 4 melihat; 7 membaca; 8 menonton.

Lesson 41 Latihan 2: Latihan 3: Latihan 4: Latihan 5: Latihan 6:

Latihan 7: Latihan 8: Latihan 9:

17.00 d, 11.00a, 13.30b, 22.30c, 19.15h, 05.25f, 16.55e, 00.10g. 1e, 2g, 3f, 4d, 5i, 6b, 7a, 8c, 9h. 1e, 2f, 3h, 4a, 5b, 6g, 7d, 8c, 9i. Sebelum berangkat ke kampus Anda harus bersiap-siap dulu. 2 Ratna bersisir, tetapi sebelum itu dia menggosok gigi. 3 Saya akan berbelanja di mal, tetapi sebelum itu saya harus mengambil uang. pagi; saya; bangun; jam; bangun; mendengarkan; radio; kadang; televisi; duduk; kebun; lalu; pagi; roti; buahan; minum; manis; makan; membersihkan; mencuci; piring; pergi; kampus; surat kabar; kadang; majalah; naik; kampus; membaca; majalah; duduk; orang; pemandangan; perpustakaan; tenang; belajar; hari; kira; mengambil; bank; makanan; makan; teman-teman; makan; sendiri 1B; 2A; 3C; 4B; 5B; 6A 1C; 2A; 3B; 4B; 5B; 6A&C; 7A; 8B; 9C; 10D Mendatar: 1 sebelum; 5 pemandangan; 6 menari; 10 kemudian; 11 menggosok; 12 sesudah; 13 berpakaian. Menurun: 2 mengambil; 3 berita; 4 bangun; 7 bersisir; 8 membeli; 9 sendiri}

Lesson 42 Latihan 2: Latihan 3: Latihan 4: Latihan 5: Latihan 6: Latihan 7: Latihan 9: Latihan 11: Latihan 12: Latihan 13: Latihan 14:

1e, 2d, 3f, 4a, 4c, 6b. 1b, 2f, 3c, 4g, 5a, 6d, 7e. 1a, 2b, 3b, 4b, 5a. 1 Jam berapa Anda berangkat dari rumah? 2 Apakah Anda membersihkan rumah sebelum berangkat? 3 Anda pergi ke kota naik apa? 4 Di toko alat-alat elektronik Anda mencari apa? 5 Jam berapa Anda sampai di rumah pada sore hari? 1i, 2h, 3j, 4l, 5k, 6d, 7b, 8a, 9g, 10c, 11e, 12f. 1c, 2c, 3a, 4b, 5b, 6b, 7a, 8c, 9a,10b 1i, 2c, 3d, 4h, 5d, 6a, 7b, 8f. 1 sesudah, 2 menonton, 3 baiklah, 4 tidak, 5 saya, 6 bertemu, 7 dengan 8 bermain, 9 begitu, 10 sesudah, 11 Anda, 12 berbelanja, 13 bertemu, 14 bagaimana, 15 mencari. 1f, 2b, 3i, 4g, 5e, 6a, 7j, 8c, 9d, 10h. 1k, 2n, 3e, 4f, 5h, 6c, 7g, 8d, 9o, 10a, 11b, 12l, 13m, 14j, 15i Mendatar 3 mencoba, 4 harga, 6 belanja, 7 jadi, 8 kita, 9 ingin, 12 menonton, 13 mencari, 14 untuk, 16 elektronik, 18 beres, 19 nonton, 20 cari. Menurun: 1 pakaian, 2 habis, 3 melihat, 5 alat, 9 minggu, 10 berangkat, 15 keren, 17 kami, 18 baju.

Lesson 43 Latihan 2: Latihan 3: Latihan 4: Latihan 5: Latihan 6: Latihan 7: Latihan 8: Latihan 11: Latihan 12:

1g, 2e, 3h, 4f, 5c, 6b, 7d, 8a 1 Mengapa Anda bangun jam setengah lima pagi? 2 Mengapa Anda tidak suka berjalan-jalan pada pagi hari? 3 Mengapa Gatot tidak mau menonton flm dengan kita? 4 Mengapa biasanya Anda mendengarkan radio pada pagi hari? 5 Mengapa Anda tidak suka tinggal di New York? A: Besok pagi saya akan bangun jam enam. B: Kenapa? A: Karena ada kuliah jam delapan. B: Jam delapan? Pagi sekali! Mengapa Anda harus kuliah jam delapan pagi? A: Karena Ibu dosen lebih suka memberikan kuliah pagi-pagi. 1.Saya mau tinggal di sini dulu., 2.Dulu saya tinggal di sini., 3.Duduk dulu., 4.Saya mau mandi dulu., 5.Dulu ada bioskop di sini. 1A, 2A, 3B, 4B, 5A, 6A, 7B, 8A, 9A, 10B 1b, 2a, 3c, 4g, 5i, 6e, 7h, 8f, 9j, 10d.1b, 2a, 3c, 4g, 5i, 6e, 7h, 8f, 9j, 10d. 1l, 2i, 3o, 4h, 5f, 6j, 7e, 8a, 9d, 10b, 11g, 12n,13k, 14m 1g, 2e, 3c, 4b, 5a, 6h, 7f, 8d Mendatar: 2 dulu, 6 berkuasa, 7 hukum, 8 bikin, 12 tua, 13 pagi, 14 mengapa, 15 memberikan. Menurun: 1 karena, 2 dosen, 3 sulit, 4 terkenal, 5 membuat, 6 berkunjung, 9 kuliah, 10 mencari, 11 bangun.

Lesson 44 Latihan 2:

1g, 2d, 3c, 4b, 5a, 6f, 7e

3

Keys to the Exercises Latihan 3: Latihan 4: Latihan 5: Latihan 6: Latihan 8:

1e, 2a, 3j, 4g, 5f, 6i, 7d, 8c, 9b, 10h 1e, 2a, 3d, 4b, 5c. 1. Saya kira laki-laki itu tidak pintar. 2 Dulu saya pandai main piano, tetapi sekarang tidak lagi. 3 Saya sama sekali tidak pandai memasak. 1D, 2C, 3A, 4C, 5A, 6C, 7B, 8D, 9D, 10D, 11B Mendatar: 4 menyanyikan, 6 pandai, 10 menjual, 11 istimewa, 12 kurang, 14 gitar, 15 pernah, 16 sayuran, 17 berpikir, 18 juta. Menurun: 1 biji, 2 kalah, 3 berdagang, 4 menjadi, 5 berenang, 7 betul, 8 memperbaiki, 9 lagu, 10 menang 13 tertawa

Lesson 45 Latihan 2: Latihan 3: Latihan 4: Latihan 5: Latihan 6: Latihan 7: Latihan 8:

Latihan 10: Latihan 11:

masuk–to enter; minum–to drink; makan–to eat; minta–to request; bangun–to get up; duduk–to sit; tidur– to sleep; hidup–to live; datang–to come; pergi–go; leave; ikut–follow, join; mandi–to bathe; kembali–to return; tahu–to know. berbelanja–go shopping; berumur–to be aged; bermain–to play; belajar–to learn; bekerja–to work; berangkat–to depart; berasal–to originate; berdiri–to stand; beristirahat–to rest; bercakap-cakap–to chat; berbicara–to talk; berpikir–to think. 1c, 2a, 3b, 4f, 5e, 6d. 1e, 2d, 3c, 4a, 5b, 6f. 1i, 2a, 3b, 4d, 5f, 6h,7c, 8j, 9g, 10e. 1 menolong, 2 mengajar, 3 memelihara, 4 menunggu, 5 memakai, 6 mendengar, 7 membaca, 8 mencuci, 9 membuka, 10 membuat, 11 menyapu, 12 membersihkan, 13 memasak, 14 membeli. 1 Ibu Mariana yang membuat kue itu. 2. Saya yang biasanya mencuci piring, tetapi kakak saya yang mencuci pakaian. 3. Bapak Tubagus selalu menyanyi pada waktu mandi. 4. Dia tidak pernah menolong orang yang minta tolong. 5. Terima kasih, Bu Lia, saya kira sudah cukup. 6. Siapa perempuan yang selalu memakai baju merah itu? 1B, 2B, 3B, 4B, 5A, 6D Mendatar: 1 mencuci, 3 bertemu, 4 semua, 6 pembantu, 8 anjing, 9 kemarin, 10 selalu, 11 sejajaran, 14 menunggu, 15 memelihara, 16 surat, 17 waktu, 18 tidur. Menurun:1 membuat, 2 selama, 5 menolong, 7 mengajar, 12 sendirian, 13 berangkat, 14 memakai.

Lesson 46 Latihan 2: Latihan 3: Latihan 4:

Latihan 5: Latihan 6:

Latihan 7: Latihan 9:

1d, 2e, 3a, 4c, 5b. 1.Berapa lama mereka tinggal di Sulawesi? 2.Berapa lama Anda bekerja di kantor tadi? 3.Berapa lama mereka berjalan-jalan di pusat kota? 4.Apa yang dilakukan oleh Bapak Yusuf? 5.Apa yang mereka lakukan? 1 Apa yang dilakukan Pak Alni sesudah sarapan? 2 Apa yang dilakukan perempuan itu pada malam hari? 3 Apa yang mereka lakukan sesudah berbelanja? 4 Apa yang dia lakukan tadi malam? 5 Apa yang dia lakukan sebelum mandi? 6 Apa yang dilakukan Bu Alni sesudah menonton flm? 7 Apa yang mereka lakukan sesudah bertemu di rumah makan? 8 Apa yang dilakukan Pak Alni sesudah bangun? 9 Apa yang suaminya lakukan sebelum membeli bunga? 10 Apa yang istrinya lakukan pada jam lima sore? 1g, 2h,3d, 4b, 5e, 6c, 7a, 8f. lobi—hour; oleh—rose; berapa lama—how long; jam—by; masakan—lobby; mawar—to choose; seorang —a person; memilih—luxurious; mewah—cooked food; akhirnya—happy; telur goreng—to pay; membayar—including; di antaranya—fried egg; senang—to kiss; waktu—fnally; mencium—while; pipi— time, when; sambil—cheeks. A6, B1, C4, D10, E5, F3, G8, H11, I2, J12, K7, L13, M14, N15, O9. Mendatar: 1 membayar, 6 beberapa, 7 masakan, 10 berdiri, 11 akhirnya, 12 pipi, 13 mencoba, 15 senang, 16 memilih, 17 mawar, 19 lobi. Menurun: 2 menunggu, 3detektif, 4 mencium, 5 jam, 8 sarapan, 9 seorang, 14 oleh, 15 sambil, 16 mewah, 18 waktu.

Lesson 47 Latihan 2: Latihan 3: Latihan 4: Latihan 5: Latihan 6:

1d, 2e, 3m, 4b, 5a, 6h, 7g, 8k, 9i, 10c, 11f, 12j, 13q, 14l, 15p, 16n, 17o. berasal, berpuasa, sehari, untuk, bersembahyang, tempat, perabot, kira-kira, lapar, capai, gelap, manis, mudik, saat, ramai, bermacam-macam, memperbaiki, membersihkan, sekali, berkumpul, memimpin, Allah, maaf, tertawa, Mohon, bermain 1C, 2B, 3 Ibu Hamidah, 4B, 5 kereta api, oleh-oleh, 6 sebelas jam, 7c, 8c, 9 Selamat Hari Raya. 10 Mohon maaf lahir dan batin. 1S, 2S, 3S, 4B, 5B, 6B, 7B, 8S, 9S, 10S 1.Keluarga Bapak Ridwan beragama Islam. 2.Bulan puasa penting sekali untuk semua orang Islam. 3.Kira-kira jam enam pagi Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah berangkat ke tempat kerja. 4.Tetapi mereka

4

Keys to the Exercises Latihan 7: Latihan 8: Latihan 9:

tidak boleh makan dan minum pada siang hari. 5.Mereka semua lapar dan haus. 1d, 2c, 3e, 4b, 5g, 6h, 7f, 8j, 9a, 10i. 1a, 2j, 3f, 4i, 5h, 6d, 7e, 8g, 9b, 10c. Mendatar: 4 tertawa, 6 nabi, 8 lebaran, 9 mudik, 15 beragama, 16 mudik, 17 penting, 18 berpuasa. Menurun: 1 membeli, 2 menunggu, 3 memperbaiki, 5 Allah, 7 mencoba, 10 doa, 11 puasa, 12 setia, 13 sahur, 14 kue.

5